INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO WHITE OAKS LIBRARY · interior renovations to . white oaks library . for ....

INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

FOR

THE CORPORATION OF THE TOWN OF OAKVILLE

1070 McCARNEY ST EAST, OAKVILLE, ON L6H 2R6

ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL and ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Project Manual Issued for Tender

ward99 Architects

Prime Consultant

JAIN SUSTAINABILITY CONSUL.

Mechanical and Electrical Engineers

ward99 architects Page 1 of 3

INDEX TO PROJECT MANUAL INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

PROJECT MANUAL ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Project Information Page

Professional Qualifications

List of drawings

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Refer to Front End by Town of Oakville

Section 00 31 00 Available Project Information

Limited Designated Substances Survey Report (Renovated Areas) DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 00 General Instructions

Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination

Section 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation

Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

Section 01 35 20 Safety Requirements

Section 01 35 43 Hazardous Materials

Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements

Section 01 42 13 Abbreviations and Acronyms

Section 01 43 00 Quality Assurance

Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities

Section 01 52 00 Construction Facilities

Section 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Controls

Section 01 73 00 Execution

Section 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management

Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures

Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 40 00 Demolition

of 3 ward99 architects

INDEX TO PROJECT MANUAL INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO

WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories

Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing

Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY Section 04 05 13 Masonry Mortar and Grout

Section 04 05 19 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement

Section 04 05 22 Concrete Unit Masonry

DIVISION 05 – METAL FABRICATIONS Not Used.

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry

Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry

Section 06 41 13 Architectural Wood Casework

Section 06 41 19 Plastic Laminate

Section 06 61 16 Solid Surface Fabrications

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 21 16 Batt and Blanket Insulation

Section 07 26 00 Sheet Vapour Retarders

Section 07 27 00 Air Barriers

Section 07 92 00 Sealants

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Section 08 42 29 Automatic Entrance Doors

Section 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

Section 08 80 00 Glazing


INDEX TO PROJECT MANUAL INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Section 09 22 00 Non-Structural Metal Framing

Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board

Section 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling

Section 09 51 00 Acoustic Ceilings

Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring

Section 09 68 00 Carpeting

Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Not Used.

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 23 33 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling

Section 31 32 19 Geotextiles

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 11 16 Granular Sub-Base

Section 32 11 23 Granular Base

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Section 33 46 16 Subdrains

*Refer to Electrical and Mechanical Sections for specifications.


PROJECT INFORMATION PAGE INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

OWNER: Town of Oakville 1225 Trafalgar Road, Oakville, ON L6H 0H3 Contact Person: Mr. Haitham Hana, Project Manager, Tel: 905-845-6601 Ext: 2897 CONSULTANT: ward99 architects, 2053 Williams Parkway, Unit 49A, Brampton ON L6S 5T4 Contact Person: Ms. Tina Ranieri-D’Ovidio, Principal, Tel: 416-613-5880 MECHANICAL HVAC SUB-CONSULTANT: JAIN Sustainability Consultants Inc., 7405 East Danbro Crescent Mississauga, ON L5N 6P8, Contact Person: Mr. Ezzat Mitri, Senior Engineer, Tel: (905) 285-9900 MECHANICAL PLUMBING SUB-CONSULTANT: JAIN Sustainability Consultants Inc., 7405 East Danbro Crescent Mississauga, ON L5N 6P8, Contact Person: Mr. Mohammed Khan, Senior Engineer, Tel: (905) 285-9900 ELECTRICAL SUB-CONSULTANT: JAIN Sustainability Consultants Inc., 7405 East Danbro Crescent Mississauga, ON L5N 6P8, Contact Person: Mr. Raed Hindi, Senior Engineer, Tel: (905) 285-9900


PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

COMPANY

COMPANY

ward99 architects

2053 Williams Pkwy, unit 49A Brampton, Ontario L6S 5T4

Tel: 416 613 5880 [email protected]

Certificate of Practice Number 5227

I reviewed and take responsibility for the design work on behalf of a firm registered under subsection 2.1 7.4 of the Ontario Building Code.

Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc.

7405 East Danbro Crescent Mississauga, Ontario L5N 6P8 CANADA

Tel: (905) 285-9900 Fax: (905) 567-5246

Certificate of Practice Number 21671011

Electrical and Mechanical: I reviewed and take responsibility for the design work on behalf of a firm registered under subsection 2.1 7.4 of the Ontario Building Code.

exec

DJ-ON STAMP

Tina

Rectangle


LIST OF DRAWINGS INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

LIST OF DRAWINGS Architectural: A0 Project Title and List of Drawings A1 Site Plan / Construction Mobilization Plan, Legend and Notes, O.B.C. Matrix, Project Information

and Key Plans A2 Existing Demolition Ground Floor Plan, General Demolition Notes and Demolition Notes A3 Existing Demolition Ground Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan, General RCP Demolition Notes and

RCP Demolition Notes A4 Proposed Ground Floor Plan, General Notes and Legend A5 Proposed Ground Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan, General RCP Notes and RCP Legend A6 Existing Exterior Elevations and Details A7 Door and Hardware Schedule, Door Elevation Types and Details, Window Elevation and Details,

Room Finish Schedule and Notes. A8 Proposed Millwork Details A9 Enlarged site Plan Demolition and New, Hoarding Plan, Site Mobilization, Access and

Construction Notes Mechanical: M2.1 Partial Ground Floor Demolition Plan – Plumbing and HVAC M2.2 Partial Ground Floor Renovation Plan – HVAC Layout Electrical: E1.0 Legend, Schedule and Details E2.0 Existing Ground Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan – Lighting Demolition Layout E2.1 Existing Ground Floor Plan – Power and Systems Demolition Layout E3.0 Existing Ground Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan – Lighting E3.1 Existing Ground Floor Plan – Power and Systems Proposed Layout


DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 31 00 – AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION


1.1 GENERAL

The documents listed below are enclosed in Project Manual as supplementary information.

Supplementary information is made available to assist the Contractor in the preparation of their bid and forms part of the Contract Documents for this project.

1.2 DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES SURVEY

Limited Designated Substance Survey Report (Renovated Areas) for the proposed

Interior Renovations to the White Oaks Library, 1070 McCraney Street East, Oakville, ON, prepared by Maple Environmental Inc. in the month of February 2018.

END OF SECTION

LIMITED DESIGNATED SUBSTANCE SURVEY

REPORT

(RENOVATION AREAS)

White Oaks Library

1070 McCraney Street East

Oakville, Ontario

Presented to: The Corporation of the Town of Oakville

1225 Trafalgar Road Oakville, Ontario

L6H 0H3

Attention: Haitham Hana

February 2018

Maple Project No. 16828

Limited Designated Substance Report Maple Project No. 16828

White Oaks Library

1070 McCraney Street E, Oakville Page i

MAPLE ENVIRONMENTAL INC. FEBRUARY 2018

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Maple Environmental Inc. (‘Maple’) was retained by The Corporation of the Town of

Oakville (the ‘client’) to perform a survey for Designated Substances as well as

polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) and mould within White Oaks Library located at 1070

McCraney Street East, Oakville Ontario (the ‘Site’). It is our understanding that the

building requires a survey to identify possible hazardous building materials that may

be disturbed during the proposed renovations.

The survey included all areas under Library jurisdiction, as well as the WOSS Library

Office. The findings of the current survey are summarized below. Please refer to the

main body of this report for details on all materials.

Asbestos

Asbestos-containing materials (ACM) identified within the surveyed area at the time of

the assessment are as follows:

• Pipe Fitting Insulation

• Drywall Joint Compound

• Texture Coat Finishes

• Transite Cement (Panels, Pipes, and Pipe Sleeves)

Suspect asbestos-containing materials identified within the surveyed area at the time

of the assessment are as follows:

• Fire-Rated Door Insulation

It should be noted that due to the presence of solid walls and ceilings (i.e. cinder block

walls and above solid ceilings) throughout the survey area, access for viewing within

the wall and ceiling cavities was not always possible. Suspect asbestos-containing

materials may be present within wall and ceiling cavities that were not identified but

are suspected to be present in this report. Caution should be taken when demolishing

solid walls and ceilings within the areas being surveyed.

Lead

Based on the Laboratory Analysis Report for lead samples and visual confirmation

observation made during the fieldwork:

• Pale yellow, blue, and off-white interior paints are considered to be “low-level

lead” (virtually safe)

• Brick mortar is considered to be below the level of detection for lead (virtually

safe).

• It should be noted that lead may also be present in wiring connectors, electric

cable sheathing, solder joints on copper piping, ceramic glazes, lead sheeting,

and as sub-surface layers to the most recent paint layers currently applied,

where present at the Site.

Mercury

• Mercury vapour is present in all fluorescent light tubes.

Silica

• Free crystalline silica, present as common construction sand, is present in all

concrete and masonry products where present within the surveyed areas.

Limited Designated Substance Report Maple Project No. 16828

White Oaks Library

1070 McCraney Street E, Oakville Page ii


Mould

• No visible mould growth was observed to be present within the surveyed area

at the time of the assessment.

• Staining was observed on acoustic ceiling tiles within various areas of the

surveyed area.

• It is possible that mould growth is present in concealed areas such as wall or

ceiling cavities, pipe chases, etc. or in areas not currently assessed by Maple.

The client should notify Maple should any water damage or suspect mould

growth be discovered.

PCBs

• No lights that contained ballast were observed to be present on site.

Recommendations

Based on the Laboratory Analytical Results and observations made on Site, Maple

provides the following recommendations.

• Remove all asbestos-containing materials that may be disturbed during the

planned renovation using the appropriate asbestos abatement procedures as

outlined in Section 5.0 of the Report.

• Low Level Lead paints (0.1% or less) and brick mortar are considered

virtually safe provided that;

• airborne lead concentrations are kept below 0.05 mg/m3

• general dust suppression and worker hygiene procedures are utilized

• torching or other activities that create fumes are not completed

• Remove all mercury containing components (including fluorescent light tubes)

prior to renovations if the materials are being removed. These components

should be removed intact and disposed of appropriately.

• Proper dust suppression techniques and other safety precautions to control

possible generation of silica dust from the demolition of concrete and masonry

products present in the surveyed area should follow those outlined in the

Ministry of Labour Guideline- Silica on Construction Projects, 2004.

• Using Level 1 mould remediation procedures consider removal and

replacement of the stained ceiling tiles throughout the surveyed area.

Appropriate procedures for asbestos, mercury, silica, mould and PCBs must be

observed if these materials are likely to be disturbed by scheduled renovations. Please

refer to Section 5.0 of the report to review the required procedures.

Consideration should be given to assessing other areas of the building that could be

associated with the current project, including travel path, mechanical or electrical ties

in the areas outside of the immediate project area, and penetrations through the slab

impacting floors below or above.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 1

2.0 APPLICABLE ONTARIO REGULATIONS ............................................................................... 1

2.1 DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES AND OTHER HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ....................................................... 1

2.2 ONTARIO REGULATION 278/05 (ASBESTOS) ......................................................................................... 2

2.3 ONTARIO REGULATION 347 .................................................................................................................. 2

2.4 ONTARIO REGULATION 362 .................................................................................................................. 3

3.0 SURVEY SCOPE AND METHODOLOGY ................................................................................. 3

3.1 ASBESTOS-CONTAINING BUILDING MATERIALS (ACM) ....................................................................... 3

3.2 LEAD ..................................................................................................................................................... 5

3.3 MERCURY ............................................................................................................................................. 5

3.4 OTHER DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES........................................................................................................ 5

3.5 MOULD ................................................................................................................................................. 6

3.6 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS ............................................................................................................ 6

3.7 LIMITATIONS AND OMISSIONS FROM SCOPE .......................................................................................... 6

3.8 DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................................ 6

3.9 PREVIOUS REPORTS .............................................................................................................................. 7

4.0 INVENTORY FINDINGS .............................................................................................................. 7

4.1 ASBESTOS ............................................................................................................................................. 7

4.2 LEAD ....................................................................................................................................................14

4.3 MERCURY ............................................................................................................................................15

4.4 SILICA ..................................................................................................................................................15

4.5 ISOCYANATES ......................................................................................................................................15

4.6 VINYL CHLORIDE MONOMER ...............................................................................................................15

4.7 BENZENE ..............................................................................................................................................15

4.8 ACRYLONITRILE ...................................................................................................................................15

4.9 COKE OVEN EMISSIONS .......................................................................................................................15

4.10 ARSENIC.............................................................................................................................................15

4.11 ETHYLENE OXIDE ..............................................................................................................................15

4.12 MOULD ..............................................................................................................................................15

4.13 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBS) ............................................................................................16

5.0 RECOMMENDATIONS ...............................................................................................................16

5.1 ASBESTOS ............................................................................................................................................16

5.2 LEAD ....................................................................................................................................................17

5.3 MERCURY ............................................................................................................................................17

5.4 SILICA ..................................................................................................................................................17

5.5 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS ...........................................................................................................17

5.6 MOULD ................................................................................................................................................17

6.0 LIMITATIONS ..............................................................................................................................17

APPENDICES APPENDIX I LABORATORY ANALYSIS REPORT - ASBESTOS

APPENDIX II LABORATORY ANALYSIS REPORT - LEAD

APPENDIX III DRAWINGS

Limited Designated Substance Survey Report

White Oaks Library

1070 McCraney Street E, Oakville


Page 1


1.0 INTRODUCTION

Maple Environmental Inc. (‘Maple’) was retained by The Corporation of the Town of

Oakville (the ‘client’) to perform a survey for Designated Substances as well as

polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) and mould within White Oaks Library located at 1070

McCraney Street East, Oakville, Ontario (the ‘Site’). It is Maple’s understanding that

the building requires a survey to identify possible hazardous building materials that

may be disturbed during proposed renovations.

The survey was limited to all areas within Library jurisdiction, as well as the WOSS

Library Office.

Section 30 of the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act requires that the

following Designated Substances be included in a Designated Substance Survey:

Asbestos Benzene

Lead Acrylonitrile

Mercury Coke Oven Emissions

Silica Arsenic

Isocyanates Ethylene Oxide

Vinyl Chloride Monomer

Additional detailed information with respect to asbestos was collected at the time of

the survey to ensure compliance with Ontario Regulation 278/05.

The assessment was performed by Ms. Sarah Doyle of Maple on January 30, 2018.

2.0 APPLICABLE ONTARIO REGULATIONS

Applicable Ontario Regulations for each of the materials included in the investigation

are briefly described below.

2.1 Designated Substances and Other Hazardous Materials

Section 30 of the Occupational Health and Safety Act requires building owners or

their agents (architects, general contractors, etc.) to prepare or have prepared a

Designated Substance report for specified potentially hazardous materials possibly

present in a facility. The owner must ensure that a prospective constructor has

received a Designated Substance report before entering into a binding contract with

the contractor. The owner is liable to the contractor for damages and costs arising

from unreported materials (of which the owner should reasonably have been aware),

and could also be subject to orders and fines from the Ministry of Labour.

In addition to the requirements under the Occupational Health and Safety Act,

Section 6 of the Ministry of Labour Regulations for Construction Projects requires the

contractor, when submitting the Notice of Project form, report any Designated

Substances likely to be used, handled or disturbed during the project.

The disturbance of asbestos materials on construction projects is controlled by

Ministry of Labour Regulation R.R.O. 2005/278. The disposal of asbestos waste is

controlled by Ministry of Environment Regulation, R.R.O. 1990/347.


White Oaks Library



Page 2


There are no specific Ministry of Labour regulations for control of the other

Designated Substances on construction projects. However, the Ministry of Labour

actively enforces the general duty clause of the Health and Safety Act which protects

workers and provides guidance on exposure monitoring, permissible exposure levels,

medical monitoring, etc. for all Designated Substances.

Although Regulations exist for many of the Designated Substances, they apply to

industry settings using Designated Substances in manufacturing processes, and do

not apply to general property management, renovation or maintenance of buildings.

Polychlorinated Biphenyls (“PCBs”) and mould were also included in the

investigation, which are not specifically named as Designated Substances. No

specific regulations are attached to these materials, but are generally governed by

the due diligence section of the Health and Safety Act for employers to protect their

workers.

2.2 Ontario Regulation 278/05 (Asbestos)

Ontario Regulation 278/05 applies to buildings with regards to maintenance,

renovations or demolition work where asbestos-containing materials (ACM) is

present and may be disturbed. The Regulation requires that a detailed asbestos

inventory be performed in all buildings where friable and non-friable asbestos

materials are present. The inventory must be available at the work place and must

identify the type of asbestos, and location of asbestos on a room-by-room basis.

The following report does not necessarily meet the requirements for an asbestos

survey under Ontario Regulation 278/05.

In addition, the regulation requires all buildings where asbestos has been used as

part of the building to implement an Asbestos Management Program (AMP).

The major requirements of the AMP include:

• Preparation and maintenance of an on-site record of where asbestos

material is located;

• Written notification provided to tenants or lessees occupying space where

asbestos is present;

• Advise workers of the owner, other staff and outside contractors of the

presence and location of ACM;

• Institute and maintain a program for the training and instruction of every

worker employed in the building that is likely to work in close proximity to

and may disturb asbestos.

• Update the asbestos report (minimum annually)

• Preparation of written asbestos work practices;

• Repair or removal of all damaged asbestos where it may be disturbed; and

• Other record keeping.

2.3 Ontario Regulation 347

Ontario Regulation 347 applies to the transport of waste from the location of

generation to a landfill site authorized to receive specific wastes. The regulation also

prescribes procedures on how the specific wastes are to be handled at the landfill

site.


White Oaks Library



Page 3


The major requirements of the building owner and the person(s) removing the waste

are to ensure that:

• The waste is appropriately packaged and labelled;

• The transport vehicle is appropriately placard; and

• The waste is to be transported as directly as possible to the landfill site once

it leaves the site.

Some wastes require the owner to register a Generator (of waste) number and many

wastes require classification that can restrict or even prohibit their disposal in landfill.

It is important to note that the building owner can be held responsible for the waste

until the waste disposal site accepts it.

2.4 Ontario Regulation 362

Ontario Regulation 362, made under the Ontario Environmental Protection Act

applies to the waste management and transport of PCB waste from the location of

generation to a landfill site authorized to receive specific wastes. The regulation

also prescribes procedures on how the specific wastes are to be handled at the

landfill site.

3.0 SURVEY SCOPE AND METHODOLOGY

The survey was limited to all areas under Library jurisdiction, as well as the WOSS

Library Office. The methodology included the assessment for hazardous materials

and how the assessment was performed is outlined below.

In order to determine the location of materials included in the assessment, the project

technologist entered the room where practical (i.e. where access was possible without

the demolition of walls, roof or ceilings or destruction of flooring). Representative

views were made above accessible suspended ceiling systems. Cavities within solid

ceiling and wall systems were accessed via existing access panels only. The inventory

did not include demolition of building systems or finishes to check on possible hidden

conditions.

3.1 Asbestos-Containing Building Materials (ACM)

The scope of the survey included all friable asbestos products and all major non-

friable asbestos materials. The term friable is applied to a material that can be

readily reduced to dust or powder by hand or moderate pressure. Asbestos

materials that are friable have a much greater potential to release airborne asbestos

fibres when disturbed.

Typical friable asbestos materials include: sprayed fireproofing or thermal insulation,

textured (stippled) plaster, and thermal mechanical insulation. Typical non-friable

materials include: asbestos cement (transite) products, vinyl floor tiles, asbestos

textiles and gaskets. Additional materials such as ceiling tiles, drywall joint

compounds and vinyl sheet flooring are classified as non-friable, but because of their

ability to release dust when disturbed are considered as “potentially friable” for the

purpose of this report.

Bulk samples of materials suspected to contain asbestos were collected for analysis

during the survey. Specifically, a small volume of material was removed either from a

damaged section of suspect material, or taken from intact material. In these latter


White Oaks Library



Page 4


cases, the material from which the sample was collected was sealed with tape to

temporarily prevent fibre release. Samples were placed in plastic bags and sealed

until receipt by an independent laboratory. To ensure quality results, the independent

laboratory chosen successfully participates in an "Asbestos Proficiency Analytical

Testing Program". As such, these independent laboratories are responsible for their

findings.

Bulk samples were collected in accordance with regulatory sampling requirements and

with sufficient frequency to obtain a general pattern of asbestos use within the

building. Due to building renovations or modifications that may have occurred in the

past, the consistency of the application of asbestos materials may not be uniform

throughout the entire Site. It is important to note that without sampling each

individual wall, pipe section, ceiling tile etc. it is not possible to identify the asbestos

content of every material present in the selected areas. For this reason, visually

similar materials are considered to be homogenous with those already sampled

elsewhere in the building without additional analysis.

O. Reg. 278/05 prescribes that a minimum number of samples be collected of

materials suspected to contain asbestos. These minimum sampling requirements are

summarized in Table 1, below.

Table 1 - Suspect ACM Bulk Sampling Requirements

Type of Material Quantity of Material

Present

Minimum # of Bulk

Samples Required

Surfacing Materials (i.e.

sprayed fireproofing,

drywall joint compound,

texture coat, and plaster)

Up to 90 sq. m. (1000 sq. ft.) 3

From 90 sq. m. (1000 sq. ft.)

to 450 sq. m. (5000 sq. ft.) 5

Greater than 450 sq. m. (5000

sq. ft.) 7

All other potential ACM Any 3

Excluding surfacing materials, the laboratory was instructed to cease analysis within

Sample Groups of homogenous materials when one of the samples in the group is

found to contain asbestos. For example, if three samples of a type of vinyl floor tile

are collected (as required by O. Reg. 278/05) and submitted for analysis and the first

sample is positively identified as containing asbestos, the balance of the sample group

is not analysed.

EMC Scientific Inc. (EMC), an independent laboratory, was selected to analyse the

collected bulk suspect asbestos samples. EMC successfully participates in an "Asbestos

Proficiency Analytical Testing Program" and as such, is responsible for its findings.

EMC followed the Code of Practice for the identification of asbestos in bulk material, as

detailed in O. Reg. 278/05. Bulk samples were analysed using the Polarized Light

Microscopy (“PLM”) Technique with Dispersion Staining. The identification of asbestos

fibre in bulk material is based on a collective set of parameters dependent on the

unique shape and crystallographic properties of each fibre as viewed through the

microscope. This method is useful for the qualitative identification of asbestos and the

semi-quantitative determination of asbestos content in bulk materials expressed as a

percent of projected area. The method identifies types of asbestos and also measures

percent of asbestos as perceived by the analyst in comparison to standard area

projections or trained experience.


White Oaks Library



Page 5


The recommendations made as part of this report with respect to asbestos have taken

into consideration: the condition and accessibility of the material, vibration, air

movement, and general activities likely to occur within the vicinity of the ACM.

In each area or room inventoried, the technician recorded the quantity, condition

(GOOD, FAIR, or POOR) of each suspect asbestos-containing material.

The definitions for condition and accessibility of the asbestos-containing items are as

follows:

GOOD Material is intact with no visible signs of damage.

FAIR Material is visibly damaged but can be repaired.

POOR Material is damaged beyond repair and likely needs to be

removed.

Where ACM is found to be in GOOD condition and not likely to deteriorate or fall, the

general recommendation would be to re-evaluate the condition of the material on an

annual basis (required by O. Reg. 278/05). This recommendation can be subject to

change if the material is located in a manner that persons untrained in asbestos

awareness could physically damage it.

Where ACM is found to be damaged (i.e. FAIR or POOR condition), a recommendation

to have the material cleaned-up, repaired, removed, enclosed, or encapsulated is

offered. The recommendation will also indicate which asbestos procedure should be

used to perform the remedial work (i.e. Type 1, Type 2, Type 3, or Glove Bag Removal

Methods).

3.2 Lead

The investigation included the collection and analysis of all major paint colour

applications for the presence of lead in the paint. Other materials that possibly contain

lead were identified by known historic use, where relevant. The lead in paint samples

were analysed by EMSL Canada Inc. (EMSL), using atomic absorption

spectrophotometry. EMSL is AIHA (American Industrial Hygiene Association) and

NIOSH (National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health) accredited for this type

of analysis. The Laboratory Analysis Report for lead in paint samples is included with

this Report as Appendix II.

3.3 Mercury

The assessment included a visual identification of fluorescent light tubes, switches,

electrical controls, heating system thermostats, thermometers, and other components

historically known to contain mercury.

3.4 Other Designated Substances

Other materials listed in Section 1.0 of this Report were identified on a visual basis

where present, as part of the current assessment. It should be noted that no

manufacturing or heavy industrial activities are known by Maple to occur at the Site.

Therefore, Designated Substances associated with these activities (i.e. those other

than Asbestos, Lead, Mercury, and Silica) would not be expected to be present in the

selected areas.


White Oaks Library



Page 6


3.5 Mould

The assessment for mould was conducted in accordance with standard industry

practice as set out in the Canadian Construction Association (CCA) “Mould Guidelines

for the Canadian Construction Industry” for a visual assessment. Although there are

no regulatory requirements in Ontario for such an assessment, the CCA Guidelines,

and similar guidelines from other agencies have been accepted as the industry

standard by most experts, consultants, the Ontario Ministry of Labour, and the

Canadian Construction Association.

All guidelines and protocols for mould investigations indicate that investigations

should be performed largely on a visual basis with limited collection of bulk and/or

air samples. The Ontario Ministry of Labour has consistently enforced the removal of

all mould from buildings regardless of mould genus or species, and therefore bulk

samples or air samples for confirmation of mould are not typically collected for

investigative purposes where mould is visible.

3.6 Polychlorinated Biphenyls

Manufacturers labels/codes collected from fluorescent lamp ballasts suspected of

containing Polychlorinated Biphenyls (“PCBs”) are compared with Environment

Canada’s document titled “Identification of Lamp Ballasts Containing PCBs”, which

identifies PCB-containing ballasts.

3.7 Limitations and Omissions from Scope

Due to the nature of building construction some limitations exist as to the possible

thoroughness of any building materials inventory. The field observations,

measurements, and analysis are considered sufficient in detail and scope to form a

reasonable basis for the findings presented in this report. Maple warrants that the

findings and conclusions contained herein have been made in accordance with

generally accepted evaluation methods in the industry and applicable regulations at

the time of the performance of the inventory.

It is possible that conditions may exist which could not be reasonably identified

within the scope of the inventory or which were not apparent during the Site

investigation. Maple believes that the information collected during the investigation

concerning the property is reliable. No other warranties are implied or expressed.

During a standard ACM inventory performed for the purposes of regulatory

compliance, it is industry practice to exclude certain suspect asbestos-containing

materials from sampling. These materials are often excluded from sampling due to

the risk of compromising the health and safety of the technician, other building

occupants, or the integrity of the systems with which these materials are associated.

Examples of such materials include; elevator brakes, roofing felts and mastics, high

voltage wiring, mechanical packing and gaskets, underground services or piping,

fire-doors, window caulking and levelling compound. Where observed, these

materials were presumed to be ACM.

3.8 Drawings

Drawings included in Appendix III will indicate the locations of any major applications

of an asbestos-containing material with the exception of mechanical insulations,

drywall, plaster finishes and transite (which cannot be accurately depicted on

drawings). The information depicted on the drawings is not to scale and is only


White Oaks Library



Page 7


meant to provide a general representation of the locations of asbestos-containing

materials.

3.9 Previous Reports

Where possible, Maple utilized the observations and representative bulk sampling

results from previous Survey Reports that were made available at the time of the

survey. Maple utilized sampling data from the following sources:

• July 2014 – Maple Environmental Inc. Project No. 14251 – Re-Assessment of

Asbestos-Containing Building Materials;

• July 8, 2013 – Maple Environmental Inc. Project No. 13640 – Bulk Sample

Analysis Summary;

• September 4, 2008 – Building Survey Consultants Project No. C0808235 –

Bulk Sample Analysis Summary; and

• April 5, 2001 – TROW Consulting Engineers Ltd. Project No. 08010560B –

Asbestos Analysis Report.

4.0 INVENTORY FINDINGS

The findings of the survey are presented separately below for each of the eleven

Designated Substances as well as microbial growth (mould), and polychlorinated

biphenyls. Asbestos is further detailed by typical applications of asbestos.

4.1 Asbestos

The following is a brief discussion of the extent to which ACM was identified in the

surveyed area. The discussion is organized under the headings of materials that are

generally suspected of containing asbestos. The sample numbers refer to the

laboratory analysis report presented as Appendix I and summarised in Table 2 below.

Thirty-two (32) bulk samples were collected for the determination of asbestos content

and submitted to the lab to be analysed. Due to the presence of more than one phase

of material in some of the original samples the laboratory may have performed

multiple analyses for some samples. In addition, some of the samples may not have

been analysed due to the positive confirmation of asbestos in a previous sample of the

same material during analysis. As a result, a total of thirty-nine (39) samples were

analyzed.

Table 2 - Summary of Analysis of Asbestos Bulk Samples

Sample No. Room Name Sample Description Result

S01A Front Foyer Drywall Joint Compound ND

S01B Front Desk Area Drywall Joint Compound ND

S01C Children’s Stack Area Drywall Joint Compound 2% CH

S01D Stack Area Drywall Joint Compound 2% CH

S01E Office Storage Room Drywall Joint Compound ND

S02A Stack Area Texture Coat Ceiling 2% CH


White Oaks Library



Page 8



S02B Stack Area Texture Coat Ceiling NA

S02C Stack Area Texture Coat Ceiling NA

S03A Mezzanine Area White Textured Plaster ND

S03B Mezzanine Area White Textured Plaster ND

S03C Mezzanine Area White Textured Plaster ND

S04A Book Drop

12x12 Grey with White Fleck

Vinyl Floor Tile ND

Black Mastic ND

S04B Book Drop


Vinyl Floor Tile ND

Black Mastic ND

S04C Book Drop


Vinyl Floor Tile ND

Black Mastic ND

S05A Men’s Washroom 12x12 Black Vinyl Floor Tile ND

Yellow Mastic ND

S05B Women’s Washroom 12x12 Black Vinyl Floor Tile ND

Yellow Mastic ND

S05C Women’s Washroom 12x12 Black Vinyl Floor Tile ND

Yellow Mastic ND

S06A Office Storage Room

12x12 White with Sparse Teal

Fleck Vinyl Floor Tile ND

Off-White Mastic ND

S06B Office Storage Room



Off-White Mastic ND

S06C Program Room



Off-White Mastic ND

S07A Program Storage Room 2x4 Galaxy Pinhole Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

S07B Program Storage Room 2x4 Galaxy Pinhole Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND


White Oaks Library



Page 9



S07C Program Storage Room 2x4 Galaxy Pinhole Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

S08A Stack Area 1x1 Large Pinhole Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

S08B Stack Area 1x1 Large Pinhole Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

S08C Stack Area 1x1 Large Pinhole Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

S09A Stack Area 1x1 Pinhole Fissure Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

S09B Stack Area 1x1 Pinhole Fissure Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

S09C Stack Area 1x1 Pinhole Fissure Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

S10A Stack Area 1x1 Small Pinhole Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

S10B Stack Area 1x1 Small Pinhole Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

S10C Stack Area 1x1 Small Pinhole Acoustic

Ceiling Tile ND

ND – None Detected, CH – Chrysotile Asbestos, NA – Not Analysed

Asbestos-containing materials (ACM) are present in the form of drywall joint

compound, texture coat ceiling finishes, mechanical insulation, and transite cement

piping, panels, and pipe sleeves. Details for all confirmed and suspect asbestos-

containing materials are presented below under the headings of the most typical

asbestos applications in buildings.

It should be noted that due to the presence of solid walls and ceilings (i.e. cinder block

walls and above solid ceilings) throughout the survey area, access for viewing within

the wall and ceiling cavities was not always possible. Suspect asbestos-containing

materials may be present within wall and ceiling cavities that were not identified but

are suspected to be present in this report. Caution should be taken when demolishing

solid walls and ceilings within the areas being surveyed.

4.1.1 Sprayed Fireproofing

Sprayed fireproofing was previously identified within the mezzanine of the surveyed

area, however, was not observed during the current assessment. The material was

previously sampled by Maple (Sample Set 13640-06A-B) and Others (Sample 77-5)

and was found not to contain asbestos.


White Oaks Library



Page 10


4.1.2 Thermal Mechanical Insulation (Friable)

Pipe Systems

Asbestos and non-asbestos pipe systems were identified within the surveyed area

during the current assessment.

No bulk samples of parging cement pipe fittings were collected during the current

assessment as the material was previously sampled by Others (Sample 77-8), and

was found to contain 60% Chrysotile asbestos.

Asbestos-containing pipe fitting insulation was observed to be limited to above

ceiling within the WOSS Office, and was observed to be in FAIR condition during the

current assessment.

Remaining pipe systems within the surveyed area were observed to be either not

insulated or insulated with fibreglass, which is not suspected to contain asbestos.

Friable asbestos-containing pipe system insulations may be present within sealed

pipe chases, bulkheads, and above non-accessible rigid ceilings within the surveyed

area. The client should notify Maple should any suspect asbestos-containing pipe

insulations be discovered.

It should be noted that asbestos-containing transite pipe straights were observed.

Refer to section 4.1.7 for more details.

Duct Systems

Duct systems within the surveyed area were observed to be either not insulated or

were insulated with foil-face fibreglass, which is not suspected to contain asbestos.

Mechanical Equipment

Mechanical equipment within the surveyed area was observed to be externally not

insulated.

4.1.3 Texture Finish (Friable)

Asbestos-containing texture coat finish was identified within the surveyed area

during the current assessment.

Three (3) representative samples (Sample Set S02A-C) of texture coat finish were

collected and analysed for determination of asbestos content. Analysis of Sample

S02A found that the sample contains 2% Chrysotile asbestos. Additionally, the

material was previously sampled by Others (Sample 77-6) and found to contain

5% Chrysotile asbestos.

Texture coat ceiling finish was observed to be limited to the Stack Area, and was

found to be in GOOD condition during the current assessment.

4.1.4 Acoustic Ceiling Tiles (Potentially Friable)

No asbestos-containing acoustic ceiling tile systems were identified within the

surveyed area during the current assessment.

Six (6) visually distinct types of ceiling tile systems were observed. A brief

description of each type of ceiling tile is outlined below.


White Oaks Library



Page 11


• AT-01 (2x4 Pinhole and Width-Wise Fissure)

No bulk samples of AT-01 were collected as a date stamp manufacture code

was present on the backside of the tile indicating the tiles were recently

manufactured and therefore not suspected to contain asbestos.

• AT-02 (2x4 Pinhole Fleck)

No bulk samples of AT-02 were collected as a date stamp manufacture code

was present on the backside of the tile indicating the tiles were recently

manufactured and therefore not suspected to contain asbestos.

• AT-03 (2x4 Galaxy Pinhole)

Three (3) representative samples (Sample Set S07A-C) of AT-03 were collected

and analysed for determination of asbestos content. Analysis of Sample Set

S07 found that the samples do not contain asbestos.

• AT-04 (1x1 Large Pinhole)




• AT-05 (1x1 Pinhole Fissure)




• AT-06 (1x1 Small Pinhole)




4.1.5 Vinyl Sheet Flooring (Potentially Friable)

No vinyl sheet flooring finishes were observed within the surveyed area during the

current assessment.

4.1.6 Vinyl Floor Tile (Non-Friable)

No asbestos-containing vinyl floor tile systems were identified within the surveyed

area during the current assessment.

Five (5) visually distinct types of vinyl floor tiles systems were observed. A brief

description of each type of vinyl floor tile is outlined below.

• VFT-01 (12x12 Off-White with Beige Fleck)

No bulk samples of VFT-01 were collected during the current assessment as

building personnel notified Maple that the tile was recently installed and is

therefore not suspected to contain asbestos.


White Oaks Library



Page 12


• VFT-02 (12x12 Grey with White Fleck)

Three (3) representative samples (Sample Set S04A-C) of VFT-02 were

collected and analyzed for determination of asbestos content. Analysis of

Sample Set S04 found that the samples do not contain asbestos. Black mastic

associated with the tile was also analysed as a part of the sample set and was

found not to contain asbestos.

• VFT-03 (12x12 Black)


collected and analyzed for determination of asbestos content. Analysis of

Sample Set S05 found that the samples do not contain asbestos. Yellow mastic

associated with the tile was also analysed as a part of the sample set and was

found not to contain asbestos.

• VFT-04 (12x12 White with Sparse Teal Fleck)


collected and analysed for determination of asbestos content. Analysis of

Sample Set S06 found that the samples do not contain asbestos. Off-white

mastic associated with the tile was also analysed as a part of the sample set

and was found not to contain asbestos.

• VFT-05 (12x12 Pale Blue Fleck)

No bulk samples of VFT-05 were collected during the current assessment as

building personnel notified Maple that the tile was recently installed and is

therefore not suspected to contain asbestos.

4.1.7 Asbestos Cement Products “Transite” (Non-Friable)

Asbestos-containing transite cement products in the form of panels and pipes were

identified within the surveyed area during the current assessment.

Panels

No bulk samples of transite panels were collected during the current assessment as

the material was previously sampled by Others (Sample 77-3) and found to contain

20% Chrysotile asbestos.

Transite panels were observed above ceiling within the Front Foyer, Book Drop, and

Front Desk, and on the exterior of the building. The panels were observed to range

from GOOD to POOR condition during the current assessment.

Pipes (Rain Water Leader)

No bulk samples of transite piping were collected during the current assessment as

sampling could damage the integrity of the pipes. Transite is historically known to

contain Chrysotile, Amosite, and/or Crocidolite asbestos. Visual identification of this

material is usually reliable although a non-asbestos equivalent is also available. The

material is assumed to contain asbestos until sampling proves otherwise.

Transite pipes were observed within the Stack Area, and were observed to be in

GOOD condition during the current assessment.


White Oaks Library



Page 13


Pipe Sleeve

No bulk samples of transite pipe sleeves were collected during the current

assessment as sampling could damage the integrity of the pipes. Transite is

historically known to contain Chrysotile, Amosite, and/or Crocidolite asbestos.

Visual identification of this material is usually reliable although a non-asbestos

equivalent is also available. The material is assumed to contain asbestos until

sampling proves otherwise.

Transite pipe sleeves were observed within the WOSS Library Office, and were

observed to be in GOOD condition during the current assessment.

4.1.8 Drywall Joint Compound (DJC) (Potentially Friable)

Asbestos and non-asbestos drywall joint compound was identified within the

surveyed area during the current assessment.

Drywall joint compound was previously sampled by Others (Sample 235-01, 235-

02, and 235-03) and was found to contain 1.2% - 2.3% Chrysotile asbestos.

Due to the various phases of construction, and the inconsistent concentration of

asbestos in joint compound, the samples previously collected may not be

representative of all drywall joint compound within the Site.

Five (5) additional representative bulk samples (Sample Set S01A-E) of drywall

joint compound were collected and analysed for determination of asbestos content.

Analysis of Sample S01C and S01D found that the samples contain 2% Chrysotile

asbestos, while the remaining samples were found not to contain asbestos.

However, Ontario Regulation 278/05 requires homogenous material to be

considered as an asbestos-containing material if one or more samples are found to

contain asbestos. As such, all drywall joint compound is to be considered as

asbestos-containing until further area-specific sampling proves otherwise.

Drywall finishes were present in the form of wall finishes within various areas, and

were observed to be in GOOD condition during the current assessment. Should

drywall joint compound be identified in rooms not accessed by Maple, collection and

analysis of the drywall joint compound is required.

4.1.9 Plaster (Potentially Friable)

No asbestos-containing textured plaster finishes were identified within the

surveyed area.

Three (3) representative samples (Sample Set S03A-C) of white textured plaster

were collected and analysed for determination of asbestos content. Analysis of

Sample Set S03 found that the samples do not contain asbestos.

White textured plaster was observed to be limited to columns within the Mezzanine

level. Should plaster finishes be identified in rooms not accessed by Maple,

collection and analysis of the plaster is required.

4.1.10 Vermiculite (Friable)

No vermiculite insulation was observed to be present within the surveyed area at

the time of the assessment. It should be noted that loose fill vermiculite insulation

can often be present within voids of masonry and possibly some pre-manufactured

surveyed area components that would not be identified during the course of this

assessment.


White Oaks Library



Page 14


4.1.11 Other

• Fire-Rated Door

Fire-rated doors were observed within various areas during the current

assessment. No samples of the insulation were collected as the material is

sealed within the door. This material should be assumed to contain asbestos

until sampling proves otherwise.

• Clear Caulking

No bulk samples of clear caulking, present at the Book Drop slot, were collected

during the current assessment as building personnel notified Maple the caulking

was recently installed, and therefore not suspected to contain asbestos.

4.2 Lead

Three (3) bulk paint samples and one (1) brick mortar sample were collected for

determination of lead content and submitted to EMSL for analysis during the

assessment. The sample number refers to the Certificate of Analysis Report

presented as Appendix II and summarised in Table 3 below.

Table 3 - Summary of Analysis of Lead-in-Paint Samples

Sample No. Locations Sample Description Result

Pb01 Walls, Ductwork Pale Yellow Paint <0.0098%

Pb02 Walls Blue Paint <0.0087%

Pb03 Walls Off-White Paint <0.0089%

Pb04 Exterior Brick Mortar <40 mg/Kg

No regulations currently exist in Ontario defining the lower limit of lead-containing

material. The Ontario Ministry of Labour (MOL) has issued a guideline for lead

abatement, entitled Guideline – Lead on Construction Projects (2004) which is

considered enforceable. The Guideline does not specify what constitutes a material

as “lead-containing”. Instead, it outlines procedures based on the concentration of

airborne lead encountered during removal, as well as provides procedures and/or

specific operations for lead-containing material removal. However, the

Environmental Abatement Council of Ontario (EACO) Lead Guideline for Construction,

Renovation, Maintenance or Repair document classifies paint as either Low-Level,

Lead-Containing, or Lead-Based as follows:

TABLE 4

EACO Classification of Lead Paint

Concentration of Lead

(%) Definition

0.1 or less Low Level Lead (Virtually Safe)

Greater than 0.1 but less than 0.5 Lead-Containing

0.5 or greater Lead-Based


White Oaks Library



Page 15


Based on these criteria and the results of the sample analysis, pale yellow, blue, and

off-white paints are considered to be “low-level lead” (virtually safe).

Lead concentrations of exterior brick mortar were found to be below 40 mg/Kg,

which is considered to be below the limit of detection.

4.3 Mercury

Mercury vapour is present in all fluorescent light tubes.

4.4 Silica

Free crystalline silica, present as common construction sand, is present in all concrete

and masonry products where present in the Select areas surveyed.

4.5 Isocyanates

Free isocyanate compounds would not be expected to be found in a non-

manufacturing facility.

4.6 Vinyl Chloride Monomer

Vinyl chloride monomer would not be expected to be found in a non-manufacturing

facility.

4.7 Benzene

Benzene would not be expected to be found in a non-manufacturing facility.

4.8 Acrylonitrile

Acrylonitrile would not be expected to be found in a non-manufacturing facility.

4.9 Coke Oven Emissions

Coke oven emissions would not be expected to be found in a non-manufacturing

facility.

4.10 Arsenic

Arsenic would not be expected to be found in a non-manufacturing facility.

4.11 Ethylene Oxide

Ethylene oxide would not be expected to be found in a non-manufacturing facility.

4.12 Mould

Staining was observed on acoustic ceiling tiles within various areas during the

current assessment.

• Book Drop – 3 stained tiles

• Main Office – 2 stained tiles

• Small Office – 1 stained tile

• Office Washroom – 2 stained tiles


White Oaks Library



Page 16


• Program Room – 5 stained tiles

• Children’s Stack Area – 7 stained tiles

• Stack Area – approximately 30 stained tiles

It is possible that mould growth is present in concealed areas such as wall or ceiling

cavities, pipe chases, etc. or in areas not currently assessed by Maple. The client

should notify Maple should any water damage or suspect mould growth be

discovered.

4.13 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)

No lights that contained ballast were observed to be present on site.

5.0 RECOMMENDATIONS

5.1 Asbestos

Asbestos materials within the site include parging cement fittings, transite cement

products in the form of piping, panels, and pipe sleeves, drywall joint compound, and

texture coat finishes.

General recommendations for each of the confirmed asbestos-containing and suspect

asbestos-containing materials are as follows.

Removal or disturbance of ACM mechanical insulations requires the use of Type 2,

Type 3, or Glove Bag procedures, as appropriate for the work being performed.

Removal or disturbance of ACM drywall less than 1m2 requires the use of Type 1

Asbestos procedures, greater than 1m2 Type 2 Asbestos procedures.

Removal or disturbance of ACM texture coat less than 1m2 requires the use of Type 2

Asbestos procedures; greater than 1m2 Type 3 Asbestos procedures apply.

Removal or disturbance of ACM transite cement products requires the use of Type 1

Asbestos procedures (provided no power tools are used and the material is wetted).

Should power tools be required for any part of the work, Type 3 Asbestos procedures

apply.

ACM transite cement panels were observed in POOR condition concealed above lay-in

ceiling tiles. Precautions should be taken prior to entry in these areas.

Following the removal of fire-rated doors, samples of the internal components, if

present, should be collected and analysed for asbestos content. Alternatively,

the doors can be wrapped and disposed of as asbestos waste.

It is important to note that due to the presence of solid wall and ceiling systems, the

assessment was not able to confirm or deny the presence of ACM within wall and

ceiling cavities. The presence of concealed ACM should be assumed as well as within

rooms that were not accessible during the assessment. It is possible that ACM is

present that was not identified in this report.


White Oaks Library



Page 17


5.2 Lead

Low Level Lead paints (0.1% or less) and brick mortar are considered virtually safe

provided that;

• airborne lead concentrations are kept below 0.05 mg/m3

• general dust suppression and worker hygiene procedures are utilized

• torching or other activities that create fumes are not completed

5.3 Mercury

Mercury vapour is present in all fluorescent light tubes. All fluorescent light tubes

should be handled and disposed of appropriately.

5.4 Silica

Proper dust suppression techniques and other safety precautions to control possible

generation of silica dust from the demolition of concrete and masonry products present

in the building should follow those outlined in the Ministry of Labour Guideline- Silica

on Construction Projects, 2004.

5.5 Polychlorinated Biphenyls

Prior to disposal, all fluorescent lamp ballasts should be inspected and compared with

Environment Canada’s document titled “Identification of Lamp Ballasts Containing

PCBs” for the presence of PCB’s.

5.6 Mould

Remove and replace all stained acoustic ceiling tiles.

6.0 LIMITATIONS

Due to the nature of building construction some limitations exist as to the possible

thoroughness of the subject investigation. The field observations are considered

sufficient in detail and scope to form a reasonable basis for the findings presented in

this report. Maple warrants that the findings and conclusions contained herein have

been made in accordance with generally accepted evaluation methods in the industry

and applicable regulations at the time of the performance of the assessment.

It is possible that conditions may exist which could not be reasonably identified

within the scope of the investigation or which were not apparent during the site

investigation. Maple believes that the information collected during the investigation

period concerning the property is reliable. No other warranties are implied or

expressed.

Information provided by Maple is intended for Client use ONLY. Any use by a third

party, of reports or documents authored by Maple, or any reliance by a third party

on or decisions made by a third party based on the findings described in said

documents, is the sole responsibility of such third parties. Maple accepts no

responsibility for damages suffered by any third party as a result of decisions made

or actions conducted.


White Oaks Library



Page 18


The liability of Maple or its staff will be limited to the lesser of the fees paid or actual

damages incurred by the Client. Maple will not be responsible for any consequential

or indirect damages. Maple will only be liable for damages resulting from negligence

of Maple; all claims by the Client shall be deemed relinquished if not made within two

years after last date of services provided.

Please contact Maple Environmental Inc. at (905) 257-4408 for inquiries regarding

this project.

MAPLE Environmental Inc.

Environment, Health & Safety Consultants

Prepared By: Reviewed By:

Sarah Doyle

Project Technologist

Brad Panzer

Senior Project Manager

C:\Users\Sarah Doyle\Google Drive\16800 - 16899\16828 Town of Oakville, White Oaks Library, DSUB\16828, White Oaks Library Limited

DSUB Report.doc

APPENDIX I

LABORATORY ANALYSIS REPORT - ASBESTOS

EMC Scientific Inc. 5800 Ambler Drive Suite 100 Mississauga Ontario L4W 4J4 T. 905 629 9247 F. 905 629 2607 EMC Scientific Inc. is Accredited by NVLAP (NVLAP Code 201020-0) for Bulk Asbestos Analysis

Page 1 of 3

Laboratory Analysis Report To: Sarah Doyle EMC LAB REPORT NUMBER: A36977 Maple Environmental Inc. Job/Project Name: White Oaks Library Job No: 16828 482 South Service Road East, Suite 116 Analysis Method: Polarized Light Microscopy – EPA 600 Number of Samples: 32 Oakville, Ontario Date Received: Jan 31/18 Date Analyzed: Feb 7/18 Date Reported: Feb 7/18 L6J 2X6 Analyst: Chengming Li, Analyst Reviewed By: Fajun Chen, Ph.D., Laboratory Director

Client’s Sample ID

Lab Sample

No. Description/Location Sample Appearance

SAMPLE COMPONENTS (%)

Asbestos Fibres Non-

asbestos Fibres

Non-fibrous

Material

S01A A36977-1 Drywall Joint Compound, front foyer White, joint compound ND 100

S01B A36977-2 Drywall Joint Compound, front desk White, joint compound ND 100

S01C A36977-3 Drywall Joint Compound, children’s stack area

Beige, joint compound Chrysotile 2 98

S01D A36977-4 Drywall Joint Compound, stack area Beige, joint compound Chrysotile 2 98

S01E A36977-5 Drywall Joint Compound, storage room

Off-white, joint compound ND 100

S02A A36977-6 Texture Coat, stack area Off-white, texture coat Chrysotile 2 98

S02B A36977-7 Texture Coat, stack area NA NA

S02C A36977-8 Texture Coat, stack area NA NA

S03A A36977-9 White Textured Plaster, children’s stack area

White, textured plaster ND 3 97

S03B A36977-10 White Textured Plaster, children’s stack area


S03C A36977-11 White Textured Plaster, children’s stack area


S04A A36977-12 12x12 Grey with White Fleck VFT,

book drop 2 Phases:

a) Grey, vinyl floor tile b) Black, mastic

ND ND

100 100

2

Laboratory Analysis Report EMC LAB REPORT NUMBER: A36977 Client’s Job/Project No.: 16828 Analyst: Chengming Li, Analyst


Page 2 of 3


Lab Sample




asbestos Fibres

Non-fibrous

Material

S04B A36977-13 12x12 Grey with White Fleck VFT,

book drop 2 Phases:


ND ND

100 100

S04C A36977-14 12x12 Grey with White Fleck VFT,

book drop 2 Phases:


ND ND

100 100

S05A A36977-15 12x12 Black VFT, Men’s Washroom 2 Phases:

a) Black, vinyl floor tile b) Yellow, mastic

ND ND

100 100

S05B A36977-16 12x12 Black VFT, Women’s

Washroom 2 Phases:


ND ND

100 100

S05C A36977-17 12x12 Black VFT, Women’s

Washroom 2 Phases:


ND ND

100 100

S06A A36977-18 12x12 White with Sparse Teal Fleck

VFT, storage room 2 Phases:

a) White, vinyl floor tile b) Off-white, mastic

ND ND

100 100

S06B A36977-19 12x12 White with Sparse Teal Fleck

VFT, storage room 2 Phases:


ND ND

100 100

S06C A36977-20 12x12 White with Sparse Teal Fleck

VFT, program room 2 Phases:


ND ND

100 100

S07A A36977-21 2x4 Galaxy Pinhole ACT, storage room

Grey, ceiling tile ND 65 35

2

Laboratory Analysis Report EMC LAB REPORT NUMBER: A36977 Client’s Job/Project No.: 16828 Analyst: Chengming Li, Analyst


Page 3 of 3


Lab Sample




asbestos Fibres

Non-fibrous

Material

S07B A36977-22 2x4 Galaxy Pinhole ACT, storage room


S07C A36977-23 2x4 Galaxy Pinhole ACT, storage room


S08A A36977-24 1x1 Large Pinhole ACT, stack area Grey, ceiling tile ND 70 30

S08B A36977-25 1x1 Large Pinhole ACT, stack area Grey, ceiling tile ND 70 30

S08C A36977-26 1x1 Large Pinhole ACT, stack area Grey, ceiling tile ND 70 30

S09A A36977-27 1x1 Fissure ACT, stack area Grey, ceiling tile ND 65 35

S09B A36977-28 1x1 Fissure ACT, stack area Grey, ceiling tile ND 65 35

S09C A36977-29 1x1 Fissure ACT, stack area Grey, ceiling tile ND 65 35

S10A A36977-30 1x1 Small Pinhole ACT, stack area Grey, ceiling tile ND 65 35

S10B A36977-31 1x1 Small Pinhole ACT, stack area Grey, ceiling tile ND 65 35

S10C A36977-32 1x1 Small Pinhole ACT, stack area Grey, ceiling tile ND 65 35

Note: 1. Bulk samples are analyzed using Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) and dispersion staining techniques. The analytical procedures are in accordance with EPA 600/R-93/116 method. 2. The results are only related to the samples analyzed. ND = None Detected (no asbestos fibres were observed), NA = Not Analyzed (analysis stopped due to a previous positive result). 3. This report may not be reproduced, except in full without the written approval of EMC Scientific Inc. This report may not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any other agency of the U.S. Government. 4. The Ontario Regulatory Threshold for asbestos is 0.5%. The limit of quantification (LOQ) is 0.5%. 5. Vinyl floor tiles may contain very fine asbestos fibres which the PLM method cannot detect. TEM analysis may be necessary to confirm the absence of asbestos.

APPENDIX II

LABORATORY ANALYSIS REPORT – LEAD

ConcentrationAnalyzed Weight RDL LeadClient SampleDescription Collected

Test Report: Lead in Paint Chips by Flame AAS (SW 846 3050B/7000B)*

EMSL Canada Inc.2756 Slough Street, Mississauga, ON L4T 1G3Phone/Fax: 289-997-4602 / (289) 997-4607http://www.EMSL.com [email protected]

Attn: Sarah DoyleMaple Environmental, Inc.482 South Service Road EastSuite 116Oakville, ON L6J 2X6

Received: 01/31/18 12:59 PM

16828-White Oaks Library

Fax: (905) 257-8865Phone: (905) 257-4408

Project:

1/30/2018Collected:

551801156CustomerID: 55MAPL78CustomerPO: 16828ProjectID:

EMSL Canada Or

Site: Pale Yellow paint, wallsInsufficient sample to reach reporting limit.

<0.0098 % wt2/1/2018 0.2051 g551801156-0001

0.00981/30/2018Pb01 % wt

Site: Blue paint, walls<0.0087 % wt2/1/2018 0.2288 g

551801156-00020.00871/30/2018Pb02 % wt

Site: Off-white paint, walls<0.0089 % wt2/1/2018 0.2247 g

551801156-00030.00891/30/2018Pb03 % wt

Page 1 of 2Test Report PB w/RDL-7.32.3 Printed: 2/7/2018 8:26:22 AM

Rowena Fanto, Lead Supervisoror other approved signatory

*Analysis following Lead in Paint by EMSL SOP/Determination of Environmental Lead by FLAA. Reporting limit is 0.010 % wt based on the minimum sample weight per our SOP. Unless noted, results in this report are not blank corrected. This report relates only to the samples reported above and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. "<" (less than) result signifies that the analyte was not detected at or above the reporting limit. Measurement of uncertainty is available upon request. The QC data associated with the sample results included in this report meet the recovery and precision requirements unless specifically indicated otherwise. Definitions of modifications are available upon request.Samples analyzed by EMSL Canada Inc. Mississauga, ON A2LA Accredited Environmental Testing Cert #2845.08

Initial report from 02/07/2018 08:26:22

http://www.EMSL.com

mailto:[email protected]

ConcentrationAnalyzed Weight RDL LeadClient SampleDescription Collected

Test Report: Lead in Soils by Flame AAS (SW 846 3050B/7000B)*

EMSL Canada Inc.2756 Slough Street, Mississauga, ON L4T 1G3Phone/Fax: 289-997-4602 / (289) 997-4607http://www.EMSL.com [email protected]

Attn: Sarah DoyleMaple Environmental, Inc.482 South Service Road EastSuite 116Oakville, ON L6J 2X6

Received: 01/31/18 12:59 PM

16828-White Oaks Library

Fax: (905) 257-8865Phone: (905) 257-4408

Project:

1/30/2018Collected:

551801156CustomerID: 55MAPL78CustomerPO: 16828ProjectID:

EMSL Canada Or

Site: Brick Mortar<40 mg/Kg2/2/2018 0.5026 g

551801156-0004401/30/2018Pb04 mg/Kg

Page 2 of 2Test Report PB w/RDL-7.32.3 Printed: 2/7/2018 8:26:22 AM

Rowena Fanto, Lead Supervisoror other approved signatory

*Analysis following Lead in Soil/Solids by EMSL SOP/Determination of Environmental Lead by FLAA. Reporting limit is 40 mg/kg based on the minimum sample weight per our SOP. Unless noted, results in this report are not blank corrected. This report relates only to the samples reported above and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Results reported based on dry weight. "<" (less than) result signifies that the analyte was not detected at or above the reporting limit. Measurement of uncertainty is available upon request. The QC data associated with the sample results included in this report meet the recovery and precision requirements unless specifically indicated otherwise. Definitions of modifications are available upon request.Samples analyzed by EMSL Canada Inc. Mississauga, ON A2LA Accredited Environmental Testing Cert #2845.08

Initial report from 02/07/2018 08:26:22

http://www.EMSL.com


APPENDIX III

DRAWINGS


DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 – GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS


1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

.1 The purpose of this Contract is the interior renovation of the one storey (with mezzanine)

White Oaks Public Library space located within the White Oaks Secondary School. The library is located at 1070 McCraney Street East in Oakville. Work under this Contract includes but is not limited to the following: .1 Partial renovation of the library space that includes the following:

.1 Removal of existing Information Circulation Counters, Service Counter and computers areas.

.2 Renovation and interior expansion to the existing staff work room.

.3 Renovation to the existing entrance and lobby of the Public Library.

.4 Exterior paving work at the main entry to the public library.

.5 Interior renovation to the existing staff school office to open up this room to the main library space.

.4 Interior renovation to the complete library to include for replacement of wall and floor finishes.

.5 Introduction of new millwork lap top counters in the main public library space.

.6 Replacement of light fixtures in the area of work where the library work room, main entry and lobby and school work room are renovated.

.2 Separate Prices are for work which is included in the total stipulated sum indicated on

the Form of Tender by the Contractor, but which can be removed by the Owner and subtracted from the total stipulated sum. Indicate on the Form of Tender, the Separate Price described below: .1 Separate Price No.1: Display Units

Mobile Display (total of two) as described on Architectural Drawings 3/A8 and 4/A8 and Cube Display (total of two) as described on Architectural Drawing 1/A8 are included in the Base Bid Price. Provide a price to supply and install the Mobile Display and Cube Display.

.3 The Library will be closed to the public for the duration of construction. Some areas of

the White Oaks Secondary School will be open to school staff and students for the duration of the construction in the Library.

.4 Any construction work that is required to occur within the existing Secondary School, as

required for the connection to existing building services (mechanical and electrical) and panels, is to occur after the building operation hours of the School Building or on the weekends. Any construction work that results in excessive noise, vibration or odour and in such negatively disrupts the activities occurring in the School, are to occur after building operation hours or on the weekends. Any construction work that requires access to, revision to or alteration to building services and panels and/or revision and/or upgrade to the building fire alarm within any part of the building is to occur after building operation hours or on the weekends. It is the General Contractor’s responsibility to become familiar with the School’s building hours of operation. The Contractor is to inform the Town Project Manager if work is required to be performed during a weekend some time in advance. No claims by the General Contractor for additional payments or overtime payments will be entertained by the Owner.




INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO

WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.5 If a shutdown is required (such as fire alarm, electrical shutdown, mechanical (HVAC or water etc. or any other building shutdown and for security reconfiguration) the Contractor is to inform the Project Manager and School Operations that action is required with enough advanced notice to coordinate as needed. Contractor to coordinate with the company providing the specific maintenance service for the Town, and the Contractor is responsible for all charges that the service company may apply to coordinate and complete the work.

.6 It is the General Contractor’s responsibility to review the scope of work and confirm what

work is required to occur after the building operation hours and/or on the weekends. No claims by the General Contractor for additional payments or overtime payments will be entertained by the Owner.

.7 Construction in the Library will start on May 28, 2018 only in the public library exterior, in

the entrance area and work room of the library (rooms labelled as G101, G102, G103 and G104 on proposed architectural floor plan).

Construction in the remainder of the library space (including the renovation to the existing school office) will start on July 1, 2018.

Substantial Completion is to be obtained on August 24, 2018. The Library is to open to the public on September 4, 2018. .8 If the time limit is not sufficient to permit completion of the work by the Contractor working

a normal number of hours each day or week on a single shift basis, the Contractor will provide for additional shifts as required throughout the life of the contract to the extent deemed necessary by the Contractor to insure the work will be completed within the time limit specified. Any additional costs occasioned by compliance with these provisions are to be included in the prices bid for the various items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

.9 The Contractor is to prepare a construction schedule showing the critical path and at

least one week free float time. In case of any major change that will require additional time (as approved by the Consultant), the free float time can be adjusted without the need to delay the project substantial completion date.

.10 Where the Contractor contemplates entering any occupied area of the premises to carry

out work, he shall request permission to the School Operations some time in advance. No Work to existing occupied areas shall proceed until so authorized by the Owner.

.11 Service providers for the library: There are special service providers for the Fire Alarm, Security, HVAC and phone systems that the Contractor will need to work with. The contact information for these service providers will be confirmed and provided by the Owner.

.12 Pricing of extra works should conform to the pricing of the original scope of work, and to the fair market prices. Excessive pricing of extra works will have a negative impact on the contractor’s and/ or the subcontractor’s evaluation for the purpose of future biddings.

.13 The Contractor is to coordinate with the Owner’s furniture installers to facilitate the furniture and power/data installations for the new furniture. For power, the Contractor is responsible to hardwire the electrical whips supplied by the furniture vendor. For data, the





Contractor is to provide wiring within system furniture, provide cover plates and terminate connections.

.14 School’s communication and power systems must not be affected during construction.

.15 All air returns in the construction area should be blocked to prevent the spread of dust and odours.

.16 For signage works, refer to the Town Interior Sign Standard.

.17 The owner has the right to place wireless surveillance cameras in the construction area to insure a continuous safe environment and buildings codes compliance.

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Contract documents for work under this contract consists of the following: .1 Standard Construction Document CCDC 2, 2008 .2 Town of Oakville – Front End Documents .3 Specifications as listed in Index to Specifications .4 Drawings as listed in List of Drawings .5 All Addenda issued prior to closing of the tender .6 Amendments incorporated prior to the signing of the Contract, as agreed to

between the signing parties.

1.3 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BY OWNER

Products, including appliances, indicated on the drawings as “N.I.C.”, or so noted in specifications, are not included in the Contract but will be supplied by the Owner. These are to be put in place and connected to services by the Contractor.

The Owner will provide manufacturer's installation instructions for each such product, when available.

The Contractor's duties with respect to products supplied by the Owner include:

.1 Unload and handle at site.

.2 Remove and dispose of packaging. Inspect delivered products notify Owner and Consultant of any damage or missing components.

.3 Temporarily store products in secure and suitable storage, if they are not to be installed immediately.

.4 Install and connect to services as applicable.

.5 Coordinate with millwork subcontractor to provide trim at items installed in cabinetry.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.4 RELATION OF TRADES

These specifications have been divided generally into sections conforming to Construction Specifications Canada Master Format 2004 for the purpose of ready reference. They must be read as a whole. The responsibility for apportioning the work or of settling disputes related to same shall rest entirely with the Contractor.

The Contractor is responsible for coordinating all trades. He is solely responsible for determining the lines of demarcation between Contractor and/or trades. Neither the Consultant nor the Owner assume any responsibility for any such determination or for any dispute arising concerning it. No extras will be considered due to any such dispute concerning either labour or materials.

Specifications and drawings form an integral part of the Contract Documents. Any

subject or item omitted from one but which is mentioned or reasonably implied in the other, shall be considered properly and sufficiently specified and will be part to the work.

1.5 EXAMINATION OF SITE

Examine site immediately prior to commencing Work to confirm that site as received by the Contractor, conform to information on tender documents.

Notify Consultant immediately if site conditions are not acceptable. Commencement of the Work of this Contract will be taken as acceptance of site conditions. No extras will be considered unless accepted in advance of performance of the work, in writing, by Owner and Consultant.

Contractor must make himself familiar with conditions on the roadway which may affect construction ie site access, etc.

1.6 ACCEPTANCE OF WORK IN PLACE

Before starting his work and from time to time as the work progresses, each subcontractor shall examine the work and materials installed by the other subcontractors insofar as it affects his own work, and shall promptly notify the Consultant IN WRITING, if any condition exists that will prevent him from giving a satisfactory result in his own work.

Should the subcontractor start his own work without such notification, it shall be construed as an acceptance by him of all preceding work and as a waiver of all claims or questions as to its suitability for receiving his work.

All Subcontractors installing building finishes and site work shall submit written confirmation of acceptance of existing conditions, to the Consultant, prior to commencing their work. Finishing work and landscaping work may not commence without submission of this confirmation. Receipt of this confirmation will be considered a prerequisite for certification of payment to the relevant Subcontractors.





1.7 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

All materials shall be new and the best of their respective kinds. Where a specific grade or brand is not indicated preference shall be given to materials of Canadian manufacture. Pre-packaged materials shall be delivered and stored in unopened containers.

All work performed under this Contract shall be done by mechanics skilled in their respective trades. They shall make use of such templates, jigs or special tools as may be required for the operation involved.

The Contractor is responsible for maintaining quality of workmanship. He shall report to the Consultant whenever the Work or material of any trade does not meet the required standard.

The acceptance of any materials or workmanship shall not be a bar to their subsequent rejection, if found defective.

Rejected materials and workmanship, and any work which is found defective, shall be removed and replaced or made good by the Contractor without cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

Where the Contractor stores materials outside in the mobilization zone, adequate, dry

storage sheds shall be provided and all stored materials shall be protected from damage and theft.

All contractors will do Work in accordance with the best industry practice of the type of work specified, unless the Contract Documents stipulate more precise requirements, in which case, the more precise requirements shall govern.

Do Work in a neat, plumb and square manner. Ensure that various work components are properly installed, forming tight joints and appropriately aligned junctions, edges and surfaces, free of warps, twists, waves, or other such irregularities.

Wherever indicated on the drawings or specifications, or in the manufacturers’/suppliers’ written instructions, arrange to have manufacturers’/installer’s representatives inspect the Work which incorporates their materials, products or items.

Do not permit materials to come in contact with other materials such conditions may result in corrosion, staining, discolouration or deterioration of the completed Work. Provide compatible, durable separators where such contact is unavoidable.

The design of the Work is based on the full interaction of its component parts. No provisions have been made for conditions occurring during construction. Ensure that no part of the Work is subjected to a load which will endanger its safety or which might cause permanent deformation.

Conceal pipes, ducts, conduit, wiring and other such items requiring concealment preferably in, wall or ceiling construction of all finished areas. If in doubt as to method of concealment, or intent of the Contract Documents in this regard, request clarification from the Consultant before proceeding with the Work.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Lay out mechanical and electrical work well in advance of concrete placement and furring installation to allow for proper concealment. Test and inspect Work before applying pipe covering and before it is concealed.

Provide and maintain control lines and levels required for the Work. Lay out the Work in accordance with these lines and levels and dimensions indicated on the drawings.

Verify lines, levels and dimensions and report any errors or inconsistencies on the drawings to the Consultants.

Final responsibility of satisfactory completion of all the Work, however, lies with the Contractor.

1.8 SCAFFOLDING

All necessary scaffolding shall be provided and constructed according to by-law and safety regulations.

Construct and maintain scaffolding in rigid, secure and safe manner.

Erect scaffolding independent of building walls.

Avoid interference with other trades.

Move when not in use to permit installation of other work and promptly remove when no longer required.

The provision of scaffolding shall be a matter of agreement between the Contractor and Subcontractors.

1.9 PROTECTION OF OTHER WORK

Each trade shall avoid damage to other trades and shall take all measures necessary and provide all masking and materials necessary to provide adequate protection.

Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall be held responsible for all damage to work installed by others that is caused by this work or by anyone employed by him.

Patching and repairing of damaged work shall be done by the contractor who installed the work, as directed by the Consultant, but the cost of same shall be paid for by the contractor who is responsible for the damage.

1.10 FASTENINGS

All fastenings must be permanent, of same metal or compatible with any metals with which they are in contact, of adequate size and spacing to ensure permanent anchorage against load or shear.





Exposed fastenings must be evenly spaced, neatly laid out and must not mar surfaces of prefinished materials.

No ram setting or similar techniques will be permitted without prior written approval of the Consultant.

No wood plugs and no anchorages which cause spalling or cracking will be accepted.

Generally, use plain washers. Where vibration may occur, use lock type washers and where fasteners are stainless steel use resilient washers.

1.11 SUPPLY AND INSTALL

Unless specifically noted "supply only", any reference to supply intends the supply and installation of material or item so noted.

1.12 OCCUPATION BEFORE COMPLETION

If the Contractor, for any reason, does not have the job completed by the completion date and the Owner, of necessity, is forced to occupy any part of the building before the whole of the work is completed, the Contractor will not be entitled to any indemnity for interference with his operation.

1.13 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All Subcontractors shall examine carefully all drawings and specifications to inform themselves fully of all conditions and limitations pertaining to the work of the contract.

All Subcontractors shall co-operate and co-ordinate their work for the proper completion of the work, including co-ordination of delivery dates and commencement of sub-trades work.

The responsibility for all work, including temporary structures, shoring and erection shall at all times rest with the Contractor and his Subcontractors. The Consultant will review construction methods and shop drawings for general arrangements only. The method of obtaining the results contemplated by the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Contractor.

The undertaking of periodic site review by the Consultant or Owner’s representative shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, nor make him responsible for providing a safe place for work, visit, use, access, travel, or occupancy of their employees or agents.

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for coordinating and expediting the work of all Subcontractors and shall employ the necessary and qualified personnel to provide the required quality of labour and materials and to prevent delays in the progress of the project. Each trade shall be afforded all reasonable opportunities for the installation of its work and for the storage and handling of its materials.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.14 COORDINATION

Coordinate all work and preparation on which subsequent work depends to facilitate

mutual progress, and to prevent any conflict.

Review all drawings to identify interference issues prior to commencing construction. Request and review interference drawings from all mechanical and electrical trades. Review all shop drawings, samples, product data, mock-ups, and other required submittals for potential interference issues and co-ordinate with the trades to avoid these conflicts.

Where interference issues arise during construction, correct work at no expense to the Owner where the interference could have reasonably been foreseen.

Ensure that each trade makes known, for the information of the Contractor and other trades, the environmental and surface conditions required for the execution of its work; and that each trade makes known the sequence of others' work required for installation of its work.

Ensure that each trade, before commencing work, knows requirements for subsequent work and that each trade is assisted in the execution of its preparatory work by trades whose work depends upon it.

Mechanical and electrical trades in particular, shall ensure that items, such as electrical panels, outlets, diffusers, switches, etc., are located where they will not interfere with the installation or operation of other items. .1 Check all drawings for the location of items to be installed later, such as millwork,

tackboards, and other wall or ceiling mounted items. .2 Ensure items installed do not interfere with the operation of equipment or fittings,

such as the swinging of doors, etc.

Review all shop and layout drawings, templates, and other required submittals for coordination purposes. .1 Ensure that all information necessary for the location and installation of materials,

openings, inserts, anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections and access panels are provided by each trade whose work requires co-operative location and installation by other trades and that such information is communicated to the applicable installer.

.2 Ensure that shop drawings for aluminum and hollow metal work are coordinated with the openings for doors, frames and windows; site measurements must be indicated on the drawings.

.3 Review millwork shop drawings to ensure adequate clearance from walls, doors, windows, mechanical and electrical equipment, etc.

Deliver materials supplied by one trade to be installed by another well before the installation begins.

Trades giving installation information in error, or too late to incorporate in the work, shall be responsible for any extra work caused thereby.





Immediately remove any work which is unsatisfactory for subsequent work, as directed by the Consultant or by the appointed inspection firms.

Inform Commissioning Agent of all equipment installations and start-ups.

1.15 ACCESS TO THE PROJECT

The Contractor for this work shall at all times allow the Owner or any other contractor or their employees in the building or around the premises, undisturbed, whether union or non-union, as may be required in the execution of other portions of the building work and installation of equipment, etc.

Cooperate fully with forces carrying out any work on behalf of the Owner.

1.16 SUB-TRADE AWARDS

The Contractor shall, on notice of award of the contract, obtain the Consultant’s approval of a complete list of all persons or firms to which he proposes to sublet any part of the work, the trades or divisions of work which are to be sublet to each, and the amount of each trade. He shall provide to the Consultant a financial breakdown showing all divisions of the work amounting to the full sum of the contract. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall be further broken down as required by the mechanical and electrical consultants.

1.17 SAFETY DATA SHEETS

The Contractor shall submit material and safety data sheets prior to commencing installation and application of at least the following: .1 lead-free solder .2 sealants and caulking .3 resilient flooring .4 painting and finishing .5 fertilizers .6 pesticides .7 herbicides .8 all adhesives .9 any other product which may give off air borne particles after installation

The Contractor and all of his Subcontractors must note that specifically, Asbestos and

Asbestos containing materials, solder for piping containing lead, and Painting & Coatings containing lead and/or mercury must be excluded from any part of the Work.

The Contractor must submit Certificates of Compliance, prior to the application for Substantial performance, for each of the following items: .1 An affidavit relative to the use of Lead-free solder for all domestic water lines,

regardless of location.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.2 Products for which Material Safety Data Sheets have been submitted and accepted.

.3 Other Work/Products identified in the Contract Documents as requiring a Certificate of Compliance.

Each Certificate of Compliance must indicate names and addresses of the project, the Owner, the date of Issue, produce description including name, number, manufacturer, with a statement verifying that the Work/Product installed meets specified requirements and, if applicable, complies with the submitted and accepted Material Safety Data Sheets.

Each Certificate of Compliance must be issued on the trade’s letterhead, properly executed, under whose work the respective Work/Product has been provided.

Each Certificate of Compliance must be endorsed by the Contractor with his authorized stamp/signature.

The Contractor must ensure that submissions are made to allow sufficient time for review without delaying progress of scheduled completion.

WHMIS Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are required to be provided before or with the first delivery of every controlled product.

Ensure that worksite copies of MSDS's are available to workers wishing to consult them and to the health and safety representative and/or joint health and safety committee.

Ensure that workers are instructed in the purpose and content of MSDS.

WHMIS MSDS sheets to be kept on site at all times.

The completion security account will not be paid to the Contractor without submission of all required affidavits and requested material and safety data sheets.

1.18 REGULATING DOCUMENTS

Refer to Section 01 41 00, Regulatory Requirements. Conform to applicable Codes and Building By-Laws. Conform to the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, such as public utilities. Where required under The Occupational Health and Safety Act, engage a Professional Engineer to design formwork and falsework for concrete.

Provide copies of documents referred to in the Specification for joint use of Contractor and Consultant, on site.

1.19 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILTY

The Contractor will be responsible to take all necessary steps to protect personnel (workers, visitors, general public, etc.) and property from any harm during the course of the contract. The list of Contractor’s responsibilities identified below is by no means comprehensive, nor is it in any priority or critical order. It is here, merely to identify the





most often forgotten or ignored responsibilities of the Contractor and is reproduced only as a reminder. The Consultants and the Owner advise the Contractor that it is he who is responsible for all aspects and facets of the Project, from start to completion, from compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations to compliance with all codes and statutes.

The Owner may perform periodic monitoring to ensure that safety requirements are met, and that safety records are properly kept and maintained. Continued disregard for safety standards can cause the Contract to be cancelled and the Contractor removed from the site.

All work procedures and equipment shall be in accordance with Owner and Legislation standards.

All equipment shall be in safe operating condition and appropriate to the task.

Only competent personnel will be permitted on site. During the site introduction, the Owner will determine who is competent. The Contractor will cause to remove from the site any persons not observing or complying with safety requirements.

The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, Provincial and Municipal Safety Codes and Regulations and the Occupational Health and Safety Act. He shall insure that all of his Subcontractors, suppliers, installers, etc. comply with all applicable codes, regulations, and acts.

The Contractor shall supply competent personnel to implement his safety program and ensure that the Owner's standards, and those of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, are being complied with.

The Owner may hire Commissioning Agents to perform inspections of building systems at the closing stages of the work of this contract. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate the work of the Owner's Commissioning Agent on site.

The Contractor shall report to the Owner and jurisdictional authorities any accident or

incident involving personnel and/or property of the Contractor, Owner, or Public, arising from the Contractor's or any of his Subcontractors, execution of the work.

Provide the Owner with a copy of each site visit report by the Ministry of Labour, as soon as the report is issued.

The Contractor shall include all provisions of this contract in any agreement with Subcontractors, and hold all subcontractors equally responsible for safe work performance.

If the Contractor is responsible for a delay in the progress of the work due to an infraction of legislation or Owner Health and Safety requirements, the Contractor will, without additional cost to the Owner, work such overtime, and acquire and use for the execution of the work such additional labour and equipment as to be necessary, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, to avoid delay in the final completion of the work or any operations thereof.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.20 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

Unless otherwise specified, comply with manufacturer's latest printed instructions for materials and installation methods.

Notify Consultant in writing of any conflict between these specifications and manufacturer's instructions. Consultant will clarify any such conflict when requested.

1.21 AIR, VAPOUR, AND THERMAL SEAL

Ensure that the existing vapour barrier system is not compromised by the work of this project. Maintain air-tight and vapour-tight membrane system in exterior walls, windows, floor and roof.

1.22 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Comply with safety requirements outlined in Section 01 35 20.

1.23 TRUCKING COSTS

The Contractor is responsible for all costs related to trucking required for the Contract. No extra costs will be considered for weight load or limits due to seasonal conditions or restrictions on load capacities imposed by any authorities, or any similar limitations.

1.24 INDEPENDENT TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

The Contractor shall appoint inspection firms as directed by Consultant and make payments from the cash allowances specified in Division noted, except for the following, which shall be included in the contract. .1 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or

authorities. .2 Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience. .3 Testing, adjustment and balancing of mechanical and electrical equipment and

systems. .4 Mill tests and certificates of compliance. .5 Re-testing as described in 1.29, Quality Control,

The Consultant will authorize payment of inspection services from specified cash

allowances.

Where tests or inspections reveal work not in accordance with Contract requirements, Contractor shall pay costs for additional tests or inspections as Consultant may require to verify acceptability of corrected work. In the case of soil compactions, the first retest only will be considered as part of inspection allowance.

The Contractor shall furnish labour and facilities to:





.1 Provide access to work to be inspected and tested.

.2 Facilitate inspections and tests.

.3 Make good work disturbed by inspection and test.

.4 Pour concrete test cylinders and store as directed by Inspection Firm.

Notify Inspection Firms sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of laboratory personnel and scheduling of test.

Where materials are specified to be tested, delivery representative samples in required quantity to testing laboratory

Pay costs for uncovering and making good work that is covered before required inspection or testing is completed and approved by Consultant.

1.25 CASH ALLOWANCES

Include in the Contract Price, a stipulated sum Cash Allowance in the amount of $40,000.00, to be expended as outlined below, which shall apply to the following aspects of the Work: Hazardous Materials Abatement Testing and Inspections Communications Work (including voice/data/telephone) by Idea Networks Door Hardware Additional Millwork, Millwork Accessories and Cabinetry Hardware (not indicated on the contract documents) P.A. System and Security System Glazing Film and Graphics Structural Work Additional Wall Removals (not indicated on the contract documents) Access panels Tactile indicator strips

Cash allowance items are for supply and install, unless noted otherwise.

Additional cash allowances, to be carried by mechanical and electrical Subcontractors, may be included the mechanical and electrical specifications.

The listing of a cash allowance in this section shall not be construed to imply the deletion from the base contract of any work which may be specified elsewhere. Where the expenditure of a cash allowance is not specifically outlined in the specifications, it shall be expended as per instructions and specifications to be provided by the Consultant at a later date.

Cash Allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover the net cost to the Contractor of services, products, construction, machinery and equipment, freight, handling, unloading, storage installation and other authorized expenses incurred in performing the Work.

The Contract Price, and not the Cash Allowance, includes the Contractor’s profit in connection with such cash allowance.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

The Contract Price will be adjusted by written order by the Consultant to provide for an

excess or deficit to the Cash Allowance. Any unused portion of the allowance shall be returned to the Owner at the conclusion of the Contract.

A schedule shall be prepared by the Contractor to show when items called for under Cash Allowances are required, so that the progress of the Work is not delayed.

Expend cash allowances as directed by Consultant in writing. Allowances will be adjusted to actual cost with no adjustment to Contractor's charges. Cash expenditure must identify the H.S.T. separately.

Material Allowances: .1 Material allowances shall include the following:

.1 Net cost of material

.2 Applicable taxes and duties, excluding H.S.T.

.3 Delivery to site

.2 For Material Allowance, the contract shall include: .1 Handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, storage and hoisting. .2 Protection from elements, from damage. .3 Labour, installation, and finishing. .4 Other expenses required to do cash allowance work (ie contract co-

ordination). .5 Overhead and profit.

Material and Installation Allowances:

.1 Material and Installation Allowances shall include the following:

.1 Net cost of material

.2 Applicable taxes and duties, excluding H.S.T.

.3 Deliver to site

.4 Handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, storage and hoisting.

.5 Labour, installation and finishing.

.2 For Material and Installation Allowances, the contract shall include: .1 Protection from elements, from damage .2 Overhead and profit .3 Other expenses required to do cash allowance work (ie contract co-

ordination)

Testing and Inspection Allowances: .1 Testing and Inspection Allowances shall include the following:

.1 Net cost of testing and inspection firm, and laboratory services, designated and authorized by Consultant.

.2 Applicable Taxes, excluding H.S.T.

.2 For Testing and Inspection Allowances, the contract shall include: .1 Overhead and profit .2 Supply of material tested





.3 Other testing and re-testing work specified

.4 Other expenses required to do cash allowance work (ie contract co-ordination)

1.26 WARRANTIES

The following is a summary of the warranties required by the contract:

# Years Entire Building, General Contract 1 Concrete Floors, Concrete Slabs 3 Finish Carpentry 2 Architectural Casework and Plastic Laminates 2 Solid Polymer Fabrications 10 Caulking and Sealants 5 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 3 Finish Hardware 3 Aluminum Windows & Screens 5 Glass and Glazing 10 Acoustic Ceilings 2 Carpet tile 10 Painting 3 *Refer to the specification sections for all warranties required by the contract.

1.27 ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS

Consultant may furnish additional drawings to assist proper execution of the Work.

These drawings will be issued for clarification only. Such drawings, however, shall have the same meaning and intent as if they were included with plans referred to in the Contract Documents.

1.28 QUALITY CONTROL

The Consultants and authorized Owner staff shall have access to all areas of the Work, including any off-site construction facilities.

The Contractor shall give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests, inspections, or approvals by the Consultants, or any other authorized Owner staff, or testing and Inspection Company.

If the Contractor covers, or permits to be covered Work that has been designated as outlined above, he shall uncover such work, have the inspections and tests satisfactorily completed and make good such work at no additional cost to the Owner.

The Consultants or the authorized Owner Staff may order any part of the Work to be examined, if such Work is suspected not to be according to the Contract Documents. If,





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

upon examination, such work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, then the Contractor shall correct such Work and pay for cost of examinations and correction. If such Work is found to be in full accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay for the cost of examination and making good.

If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, the appointed agency may request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain the full degree of defects. The Contractor shall correct the defects and irregularities as reported by the inspection and/or testing agency, at no additional cost to the Owner and the Contractor shall pay all associated costs for retesting and re-inspection.

The Contractor shall provide any tools, materials or equipment that may be required by the inspection and/or testing agencies in retesting the Work.

The employment of inspection and/or testing agencies does not, in any way, affect the Contractor’s responsibility to perform the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents.

The Contractor shall remove all defective work, whether the result of poor workmanship by him or his subtrades, use of defective or damaged products, whether or not incorporated into the Work and any Work that has been rejected by the Consultants or authorized Owner Staff as failing to conform to the Contract Documents. Replacement and execution of the affected Work shall be done in full accordance with the Contract Documents, making good other trades’ work damaged by such removals or replacements at no additional charge to the Owner.

If, in the opinion of the Consultant and/or the authorized Owner Staff, it is not expeditious to correct the defective Work, or Work not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, may, at its sole discretion, deduct from the Contract Price, the difference in value between the work performed and that required by the Contract Documents, the amounts of which shall be determined by the Owner.

1.29 START-UP

Demolition work may start immediately upon receipt of Letter of Award from Owner, and Contractors submission of start-up documents and insurance.

New work cannot commence without a building permit.

1.30 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

Refer to CCDC2 2008, Stipulated Price Contract, Part 5, Payment, and amendments included in the Town of Oakville’s Front End Documents.

Before submitting first request for payment, submit a Schedule of Values, which shall be a detailed breakdown of the Contract price, as directed by the Consultant and as per the Owner's format. Breakdown must equal Contract price. After approval by Consultant, cost breakdown will be used as basis for progress payments.





Notwithstanding the amounts indicated on the Schedule of Values for the various aspects of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to retain additional funds for some items, where listed in the specifications. This includes amounts to be retained for maintenance manuals and for commissioning, as outlined in the applicable specification sections.

Applications for payment shall list HST separately.

Refer to the Town of Oakville’s Front End Documents which supersedes the above description.

1.31 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS

Products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction included in the Contract Documents are to be used in the execution of the Work of this Contract unless otherwise accepted by the Consultant in writing. Substitute products and materials may not be ordered or installed without written acceptance from the Consultant.

Changes proposed by the Contractor are considered requests for “Substitutions”. Requests for Substitutions are to be submitted only by the Contractor.

Submit a complete package, including information and documentation outlined below, for evaluation by the Consultant.

A Request for Substitution must include the following information: .1 Data sheets for both the specified item and the proposed substitution, enabling

side by side comparisons. .2 Complete description of the proposed alternative product or material, including:

.1 Laboratory tests results

.2 dimensions, gauges, weights, etc. .3 An explanation of how the proposed substitute differs from the specified product:

.1 in physical properties

.2 in quality and performance .4 A list of any effects the proposed substitution would have:

.1 on service connections (wiring, piping, ductwork, etc.)

.2 on the work of other trades

.3 on construction Schedules .5 Evidence that manufacturers warranties and guarantees for the proposed

substitutes are the same, or exceed those required under the Contract. .6 Information on the availability of maintenance services and replacement

materials for proposed substitute. .7 Names, addresses, and phone numbers of fabricators and suppliers for proposed

substitute(s). .8 Confirmation that the proposed substitution, if accepted, would have no cost

impact, or indication of a credit (or extra cost) associated with the substitution.

Submissions of Requests for Substitution must be received by the Consultant well prior to any shop drawing submissions. The Shop Drawing process is not an acceptable means of requesting a substitution, and submission of drawings for products that have not been accepted will result in the automatic rejection of the Shop Drawing submission.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution lies with the Contractor.

Substitution requests deemed incomplete or incorrect by the Consultant will be rejected.

The Consultant may require the submission of further information in order to make an

informed determination on the suitability of the proposed substitution. Allow a minimum of 10 working days, upon receipt of all required information, for the Consultant’s decision. Substitutions requested too late, not allowing sufficient time for thorough review by the Consultant, will be rejected.

The Owner's decision, based upon recommendations of the Consultant, of acceptance or rejection, of a proposed substitution shall be final.

END OF SECTION



01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SITE SUPERVISOR

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for co-ordinating and expediting the work of all

Subcontractors and shall employ a qualified Site Supervisor who shall be in full time attendance on this project.

Prior to the Preconstruction Meeting, the Contractor shall inform the Consultant of their choice for Site Supervisors and shall provide resumes outlining qualifications and related work experiences.

Site Supervisor shall have as a minimum: .1 Recent, previous experience with renovation or addition projects involving

occupied buildings, managing occupants and pedestrian and vehicular traffic. .2 Successful completion of a multi-session Supervisor’s training course conducted

by a recognized Construction Association in Ontario.

The Supervisors must be assigned to projects for the duration of the construction period, until the buildings are fully occupied by the Owner.

The Owner and the Consultant reserve the right to reject the proposed Supervisors should they feel that they are not fully qualified to assume the responsibilities of the positions.

There shall be a minimum of one full time Site Supervisor dedicated to the site.

Site Supervisor must carry a cell phone at all times during construction with the ability to be reached directly during all work hours and the ability to have voicemail recorded during all non-work hours including weekends and holidays.

Once the Supervisors are confirmed, there will be no change permitted without the

written consent of the Consultant. 1.2 CONSULTANT/CONTRACTOR MEETING

Prior to the commencement of the Work, the Contractor together with the Consultant

shall mutually agree to a sequence for holding regular "site meetings" on same day (to be determined) of every second week.

1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

Immediately prior to construction, upon notification, attend at location of Owner's choice, pre-construction meeting, along with authoritative representatives of certain key Subcontractors as specifically requested by the Consultant.

Purpose of meeting is as follows:





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.1 Review project communications procedures. .2 Review contract administration requirements including submittals, payment and

change order procedures. .3 Identify all critical points on Construction Schedule for positive action. .4 Identify any product availability problems and substitution requests. .5 Establish site arrangements and temporary facilities. .6 Review any items which, in the Owner's, Consultant's and Contractor's opinion,

require clarification. .7 Exchange names & addresses of all key personnel representing Owner,

Consultant, Contractor and Subcontractors. .8 Identify Consultant's inspection requirements.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

Contractor shall Chair project meetings on Site, every two weeks during the course of the work and will issue minutes to Owner's Representative, Consultants, and all other affected parties.

Contractor shall take minutes of meeting showing: .1 List of persons attending. .2 Decisions taken. .3 Instructions required or issued - Allocating responsibilities to action items. .4 All matters discussed. .5 Schedule Update - Progress, Delays.

Contractor shall provide suitable on site accommodation for meeting, attend all meetings,

arrange for attendance of all necessary Subcontractors, and distribute minutes of previous meeting to Subcontractors and Suppliers as appropriate.

The Contractor's representatives at site meetings must include the project co-ordinator as well as site Supervisor.

Contractor shall hold regular co-ordination meeting with Subcontractors and shall chair

and minute each meeting. Copies of minutes shall be distributed to relevant Trades and Consultants and Owner.

In addition to jobsite meetings, Contractor shall arrange for, chair, and record safety

meetings and regular meetings with his Subcontractors and suppliers. He shall distribute copies of the minutes of these meetings to all Subcontractors, Owner and Consultant.

1.5 ON SITE DOCUMENTS

The Contractor shall maintain the following documents, up to date, in the site office:

.1 Contract Documents

.2 Reviewed Shop Drawings - Printed in full colour or redline

.3 All instructions and changes, i.e. Work Authorization, Jobsite Instructions, Notices of Contemplated Change, Change Orders, etc.

.4 All inspection and test reports





.5 Permit drawings and specifications

.6 Authorizations, approval documents, permits, special rulings, etc., issued for the project by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

.7 Details of tested assemblies being used on the project; ULC, cUL, etc.

.8 As-Built drawings.

Confirm with building inspector, at the commencement of construction, what documents are required for submission both during construction and for occupancy. Keep copies of such documents on site. Refer also to Section 01 41 00, Regulatory Requirements.

Documents listed above shall be printed, full size documents, not only digit format.

Maintain copies of Regulating Documents referred to in the specifications, up to date, in the site office.

Maintain a file of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials being used on site

and make available to all concerned, in the site office.

END OF SECTION



01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCHEDULE

Within ten (10) days of contract award, submit a detailed construction schedule. Base the submission on the commencement of completion dates of the Contract and indicate specified restraints and milestones, activities and durations for shop drawing submission and approval, testing, fabrication and delivery, construction sequence and timing, interdependencies and constraints. Include the procurement activities for major structural elements, cladding, windows, and mechanical and electrical equipment. Ensure the participation of all major Subcontractors and Suppliers. Schedule must include reasonably detailed breakdown of mechanical, and electrical work. Refer to Section 01 10 00 – General Instructions for additional requirements regarding the construction schedule.

Schedule shall show:

.1 Commencement and completion dates of Contract.

.2 Commencement and completion dates of stipulated stages if any.

.3 Commencement and completion dates of Trades.

.4 Order and delivery times for materials and equipment, where possible.

.5 Dates for submission of Shop Drawings, material lists and samples.

.6 Any other information relating to the orderly progress of Contract, considered by Contractor to be pertinent.

.7 Refer to Section 01 10 00 – General Instructions for additional requirements regarding the construction schedule.

The schedule shall be reviewed and updated at every Site meeting.

Include with each update a written report of activity progress reflected in the revised Schedule, and the corrective actions which have been made or are to be taken to maintain progress on the schedule in the future, anticipated delays, resources availability, schedule changes, and work to be completed in the next 2 month period.

1.2 UPDATING AND MONITORING

Set up format of Construction Schedule to allow plotting of actual progress against scheduled progress.

.1 Allow sufficient space for modifications and revisions to the Schedule as Work progresses.

.2 Format shall be approved by the Consultant.

Display copy of Schedule in Site office during complete construction period and plot actual progress weekly.

Updating:

.1 Arrange participation, on Site and off Site, with Subcontractors and Suppliers, as and when necessary for the purpose of updating schedule and monitoring progress.



01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.2 Conduct reviews of progress and update schedule, distributing copies to Consultant, Owner and Sub-Trades at least once a month or as directed by Consultant.

1.3 PROGRESS REPORTS

Keep a permanent written report on the Site of progress of the Work. This record to be open to review by the Consultant. A copy to be furnished to the Consultant upon request.

Indicate daily the number of persons engaged on the work (including subtrades) and the division and section of the work upon which each group of workers is engaged, in sufficient detail to record dates of construction of each particular section of work.

Record to show dates of commencement and completion of trades and parts of the work coming under the Contract, including reports on daily weather conditions, excavation work, erection and removal or forms, and other similar pertinent information.

Report delays (and potential delays) giving reason for delay and action being taken to resolve the problem.

1.4 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

Concurrently with monthly application for payment, submit 10 electronic format colour images, which shall clearly show overall progress of Work. Provide an index with printed images clearly identified with name of project, description of view and date taken.

1.5 QUALITY OF WORK / STATUS REPORTS

The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the quality of work on site. The

Contractor shall furthermore notify workers of deficient work immediately upon receipt of notification of deficiencies by the Consultant, Subconsultants and/or Owner.

The Contractor shall provide a monthly status report on the status of deficiencies

identified by the Consultant and Subconsultants. The report shall include a description of each deficiency, status of the deficiency, description of corrective action taken, value (cost) to the correct deficiency and trade (person) responsible for deficiency. The report shall be typewritten on the Contractors letterhead. A copy of the report format shall be submitted at least 2 weeks prior to the first progress draw, for review. Submit monthly status reports with each progress draw.

After Substantial Performance, the Contractor shall continue provide the deficiency

status reports on a monthly basis, including updated lists of deficiencies identified by the Owner and consultants.

END OF SECTION



01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

Obtain the documents listed under this heading and supply to Consultant within the time

stipulated in the Specification, or if not so stipulated, before issue of the first Certificate. .1 Performance Bond/Labour and Material Bond. .2 Insurance Policies required under General Conditions of Contract - Insurance. .3 Certificates of good standing from the Workplace Safety & Insurance Board for

the Contractor and all Subcontractors. .4 Shop Drawing Schedule. .5 Permits required for work of Electrical Trades Divisions 26, 27 and 28. .6 Permits for temporary structures, hoists, etc. .7 Schedule of Values: Refer to General Conditions of Contract. .8 Estimate of monthly progress claims (cash flow schedule). .9 Construction Schedule. .10 Equipment Delivery Schedule.

Concurrently, with schedule of values, submit cash flow schedule broken down on a

monthly basis, indicating anticipated monthly progress billings for duration of the Contract.

Submit schedule in a format acceptable to the Consultant. Indicate anticipated

submission dates and review periods. Highlight critical items.

Submit, in a format acceptable to the Consultant, a list of manufactured equipment complete with order dates, anticipated delivery dates, and dates required on site to meet progress schedule. Update schedule at least once a month or more often if directed by the Consultant. Clearly indicate late deliveries and anticipated impact on construction schedule. Include in schedule required delivery dates for products supplied by Owner.

Schedule of Values:

.1 Before submitting first request for payment, submit a detailed breakdown of the Contract price, as directed by the Consultant and as per the Owner's format. Breakdown must equal Contract price. After approval by Consultant, cost breakdown will be used as basis for progress payments.

1.2 DOCUMENTS AND ACTION REQUIRED DURING PROGRESS OF CONTRACT

Perform the action and/or obtain the documents listed under this heading and supply to the Consultant, within the time stipulated in the Specification or, if not so stipulated, as soon as possible following Consultant's request.

Adjust Cash Allowances by award of separate Contracts, where appropriate.

Documents specified under Section 01 10 00, General Instructions and Section 01 33 23, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.



01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Progress photographs, submitted concurrently with monthly application for payment. Refer to Section 01 32 00.

Any permits required from Authorities Having Jurisdiction enabling Owner to occupy the

work (or part thereof) prior to Substantial Performance of the Contract.

As-Built Documents: .1 The Owner requires as-built documents for all architectural, structural,

mechanical and electrical changes on completion of the construction. .2 The Contractor, and mechanical and electrical Subcontractors shall obtain, from

the Consultant, a complete and separate set of white prints of Contract Drawings and Project Manual to keep on the site at all times.

.3 The drawing prints shall be marked up by responsible personnel of the Contractor and Subcontractors to record clearly, neatly, accurately and promptly showing all locations of buried structural, mechanical and electrical work and deviations from the contract documents.

.4 The Project Manual shall be similarly marked up to reflect deviations from the Contract Documents, as well as indicate materials used, colours selected, etc.

.5 The accurate location, depth, size and type of each underground utility and service line shall be recorded before concealment to ensure accurately directed future access to these buried lines.

.6 The as-built documents will be reviewed at regular intervals by the Consultant and the quality of performance by the Contractor and Subcontractors in developing these records will be taken into consideration when reviewing the monthly applications for payment submitted by the Contractor.

.7 Prior to the date of Substantial Performance, request from the Consultant updated drawings incorporating all changes made to the building through Change Orders and Jobsite Instructions. Transfer all recordings from the white prints to these updated drawings and return them to the Consultant, as specified in Section 01 78 00, Close-out Submittals.

.8 Mark "as-built" changes in red coloured ink.

.9 Record following information: .1 Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. .2 Field changes of dimension and detail. .3 Changes made by Change Order or Supplementary Instructions.

.10 Clearly mark each of the drawings, “Project As-Built Record Copy".

.11 Final completion of these Drawings shall be a condition precedent to the

issuance of Consultant's final payment certificate.

.12 Refer to Electrical and Mechanical Specification Divisions for more specific requirements regarding preparation and submission of final Record Drawings.

END OF SECTION



01 33 23 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCHEDULE

Within 5 working days after award of Contract, prepare and submit to Consultant for

comment, a schedule fixing the dates for the submission of all Shop Drawings, product data and samples.

Allow reasonable promptness for Consultant to review submissions, exclusive of time required for inter-office transmissions.

All shop drawings must be reviewed and stamped by the Contractor prior to submission to the Consultant.

1.2 GENERAL

Submit to Consultant, for review, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other required submittals specified.

All shop drawings and related submittals must be reviewed and stamped by the Contractor prior to submission to the Consultant.

Until submittal is reviewed, Work involving relevant product may not proceed.

Do not use for construction, Shop or setting Drawings or diagrams which do not bear Consultant's stamp and signature.

Shop drawing reviews do not authorize changes in cost or time, which may only be accomplished by an appropriate Change Order issued through the Consultant.

Shop drawings shall be for products as specified or otherwise approved by the Consultant. The shop drawing process is not a means of requesting substitutions. Refer to Section 00 73 00, Supplementary Conditions, under GC 3.8, Labour and Products, for the process for requesting approval of substitutions.

Submission and subsequent review of Shop Drawings constitute a service and does not entitle the Supplier or Subcontractor to the right to remuneration until the materials are supplied and installed on the Site in accordance with the Contract.

The Contractor must include for delivery and pick up of shop drawings to/from the Consultant by hand or courier.

The Contractor must include for reproduction of shop drawings after review by the consultants.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

Drawings shall be copies of original drawings prepared by Contractor, subcontractor, supplier or distributor, for the work of the Contract which illustrate appropriate portions of the Work. Shop drawing submissions shall show pertinent information for incorporation of the products and equipment, including the following, as applicable: .1 fabrication details .2 dimensioned layout drawings, including clearances, with site dimensions .3 relationship to adjacent work .4 setting or erection details .5 performance requirements .6 operating weights of equipment .7 installation instructions .8 service connection requirements, including wiring diagrams .9 single line and schematic diagrams .10 additional information as may be specified in applicable Specification Sections.

Note that some shop drawings are required to be approved by a Professional Structural

Engineer in the Contractor's employ. .1 These include: structural steel shop drawings of folding partition, .1 and other

items as required in the specifications.

Submit Shop Drawings with transmittal forms listing: .1 the project name and number .2 the names of the manufacturer, supplier, subcontractor .3 the applicable Drawing numbers .4 the number of copies .5 the names of the items included the submittals .6 number of Specification section to which the Shop Drawings refer .7 dates and revision numbers, and submission numbers

All dimensions on shop drawings must be in metric.

Where approvals are required by Authorities having jurisdiction, submit Shop Drawings to

those authorities and obtain the approvals required.

On Shop Drawings for fire rated assemblies show required fire rating and ULC design numbers.

Submit four (4) copies of printed shop drawings generally, and as follows: .1 Submissions shall be in sufficient quantities for distribution to all reviewers, plus

one copy to be returned to the Contractor for reproduction and distribution. .2 The prime Consultant requires one copy of every submission, of all disciplines. .3 Each sub-consultant, of each discipline, will retain one copy of the shop

drawings. Where one sub-consultant is responsible for the review of more than one discipline, they will require multiple copies, as applicable.

.4 For architectural submissions which do not need to be reviewed by sub-consultants, only two copies are required.

.5 Refer to sections prepared by the sub-consultants for possible variations on these requirements.





Email Submission: .1 Submittals that are formatted for 11" x 17" (279 x 432mm) sheets or smaller may

be submitted by email, provided the total number of pages, for the entire submission, does not exceed 15.

.2 Submittals must be submitted in the same size and scale as they were originally prepared. Drawings may not be reduced in size for email transmission.

.3 If acceptable to the individual reviewers, larger format submittals and larger volume submittals may be reviewed by email submission. The Contractor must subsequently print and submit full sized, red line copies of such reviewed documents to each reviewer.

.4 Email submissions must be in pdf format and must be high quality documents, preferably generated by computer from the original documents (rather than scans of printed documents). If digital submissions are of insufficient quality, hard copies will be required.

.5 Emailed documents shall be reviewed and stamped digitally by the Contractor, or accompanied by a separate sheet from the Contractor listing the documents reviewed and bearing the Contractor’s review stamp, along with copies of any revisions made.

.6 Email submission is only used as a convenient means of distributing drawings, in lieu of sending hard copies by courier. Reviewed drawings must still be printed for job site files, record copies, etc. All site copies shall be red line prints or colour prints.

Drawings shall be of a size and quality which will be readily reproduced. Shop drawings must be certified to have been reviewed and corrected by Contractor and sub-contractor responsible for forwarding to the Consultant.

Shop drawings are to be to scale. Scale shall be large enough to adequately review details included. Provide site measured dimensions on drawings wherever possible.

All requirements for shop drawings apply also to resubmissions of shop drawings, as may be required by the Consultant.

Revise all reviewed shop drawings to incorporate Consultant’s comments. One complete set of final, revised Shop Drawings, used for construction, shall be submitted to the Consultant.

Shop Drawings are required for the following items: Concrete Floor Finishing Door Hardware Architectural metals Woodwork and Casework Solid Surface Fabrications Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals Hollow Metal Work Aluminum Frames and screens Mechanical and electrical equipment as listed in relevant specification sections. Other items as may be requested within the specifications.

Refer also to the Town of Oakville’s Front End Document.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.4 PRODUCT DATA

Certain Specification Sections specify that manufacturer's standard schematic drawings, catalogue sheets, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data will be accepted in lieu of Shop Drawings.

The above will be accepted if they conform to the following: .1 Delete information which is not applicable to project. .2 Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to

project. .3 Show dimensions and clearances required. .4 Show performance characteristics and capacities. .5 Indicate operating weight of equipment. .6 Show wiring diagrams and controls. .7 Add to standard sheet the Project identification data.

1.5 SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS

Where specified, shown or considered necessary, submit duplicate samples for

Consultant's approval.

Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples.

Samples must correspond in every respect to materials supplied for project.

Construct field samples and mock-ups at locations acceptable to Consultant. Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including work of all trades required to finish work.

Do not proceed with fabrication or delivery of materials until samples are approved.

Reviewed samples or mock-ups will become standards of workmanship and material against which installed work will be checked on project.

Approval of samples does not imply acceptance of finished work.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

Prior to submission to the Consultant, review all shop drawings, samples, product data, and other required submittals as follows: .1 Verify that the submission is for products as specified, or otherwise approved by

the Consultant. .2 Ensure that the submission is complete. .3 Note any potential interference issues and co-ordinate with the trades to avoid

these conflicts. .4 Verify:

.1 Field measurements.

.2 Field construction criteria.

.3 Catalogue numbers and similar data.





Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Refer to

Section 01 10 00, General Instructions, and the subsection on Coordination.

Notify Consultant, in writing at time of submission of any deviations in submittal from requirements of Contract Documents.

Stamp, initial or sign each Drawing, certifying approval of submission, verification of field dimensions and measurements and compliance with Contract Documents, prior to submission to the Consultant(s).

The Contractor shall be responsible for reproducing and distributing reviewed shop drawings, except for those copies required by the Architect and Consultants.

After Consultant's review, distribute copies as follows: .1 Job Site file (2 copies) - colour or redline copies .2 As-built documents file. .3 Other prime contractors. .4 Subcontractors. .5 Supplier. .6 Fabricator. .7 Authorities having jurisdiction, where required by Codes and/or By-Laws, i.e.

structural steel and sprinklers. .8 Owner’s Maintenance Manual (revised, as-built copies).

Distribute samples as directed by the Consultant.

Ensure that all samples are approved by authorities having jurisdiction, supplier for

correct application in Project, and other parties such as Owner in time to permit approval prior to ordering of quantity delivery to Site.

The Contractor shall advise all Trades, Subcontractors and suppliers of the limits of the Consultant's responsibility with respect to Shop Drawings and other submittals, as detailed below.

1.7 CONSULTANT'S RESPONSIBILITY

With reasonable promptness from the receipt of samples and Architectural shop drawings, the Consultant shall review them and return them to the Contractor. Allow 15 working days for review of shop drawings.

Review by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to the processes or techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of the work of all subtrades.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Shop drawing markings shall be interpreted as follows:

.1 Shop drawings marked "REVIEWED" by Consultant and/or Subconsultants are released for construction.

.2 Shop drawings marked "REVIEWED AS NOTED" by the Consultant or his Subconsultants are also released for construction, after revisions noted are made; with final copies sent to the Consultant.

.3 Shop drawings marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT" by the Consultant or his Subconsultants are NOT released for construction and must be resubmitted after being revised in accordance with the consultants’ comments.

.4 Shop Drawings marked with the Consultant's "RECEIVED" stamp only have not been reviewed by the Consultant.

Review by the Architect does not in any way constitute review of the design of engineering elements, which form part of the Contract Document's prepared by others.

Shop drawings for products that are not a specified item, or an approved substitution, will be rejected without being reviewed.

Shop drawings which have not been requested will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken by the Consultant.

END OF SECTION



01 35 20 - SAFETY REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY

Observe and enforce construction safety measures required by the Ontario Building

Code, Canadian Construction Safety Code, Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act, Workplace Safety & Insurance board (WSIB) and Municipal Statutes and Authorities. .1 The Contractor is again reminded that the Contractor is responsible for

Occupational Health and Safety on this project. The items listed below are only guidelines of the Owner’s expectations in this regard and not to be construed to be comprehensive or total in nature.

In particular, the Ontario Construction Safety Act, the regulations of the Ontario Department of Labour and Ontario Hydro Safety Requirements shall be strictly enforced.

In event of conflict between any provisions of above authorities the most stringent provisions will apply.

The Owner will take every reasonable precaution to prevent injury or illness to employees

and the public, participating in Owner activities, or performing their duties. This shall be accomplished by providing and maintaining a safe, healthy working environment and by providing the education necessary to perform these activities or duties safely.

The Owner is also vitally interested in the health and safety of Contractors and their

workers performing work for the Owner. Cooperation and support of the Contractor in the protection of the workers from injury or occupational disease is a major, continuing objective of the Owner. To achieve these goals, the Owner, in concert with the Contractors, will endeavour to make every effort to ensure that the Contractors provide a work site which is a safe and healthy work environment. The Owner insists that all Contractors and their workers are dedicated to the continuing objective of reducing risk and injury.

The Contractor covenants and agrees to comply with all statutory and other obligations,

including without limitation, the provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario) and all Regulations thereto, and all amending and successor legislation, in connection with all work performed by either the Contractor, Sub-contractors, or any Other Contractor on, or in connection with, the Project.

Without limiting the foregoing, for the purposes of this Contract, the Contractor agrees

that it shall be the "constructor" of the Project within the meaning of the Act, and as such, shall assume all the obligations and responsibilities, and observe all construction safety requirements and procedures, and duties of inspection imposed by the Act on the "constructor", as therein defined, for all work and services performed by the Contractor, Subcontractors and Other Contractors on or in connection with the Project. The Contractor further covenants and agrees that the Owner and its existing and former officers, trustees, employees and agents, and their respective heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns shall be released from any obligations or liabilities otherwise imposed on the Owner, or on any of them, pursuant to the Act in connection with the Project, and that the Contractor shall assume all liability and responsibility in connection with same. The Contractor agrees to save harmless and





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

indemnify the Owner from any losses, damages, costs and expenses of any kind, or nature whatsoever, including all legal expenses, and all defense costs and related expert or consulting fees, incurred by the Owner, or any of them, arising in connection with the failure, default, or inability of the Contractor of the Owner, or any of them, to comply with any of the aforementioned statutory, or other legal requirements, or arising in connection with any breach by the Contractor of any of its covenants, agreements and obligations under this Contract.

The Contractor shall inform and instruct Other Contractors that they, while performing work on this project, are under the authority of the Contractor. Other Contractors are to discuss and co-ordinate with, and follow instructions from, the Contractor on all matters of site access, vehicles, deliveries, storage, temporary facilities, coordination with the work of other subcontractors, work methods, scheduling, labour conditions, construction safety, environmental protection, security and all other matters which relate to the safe and proper execution of construction work.

The Contractor shall ensure that all supervisory personnel on job site are fully aware of

the procedures and requirements outlined herein and comply with all requirements specified.

All contractors are responsible to ensure that all machinery and/or equipment are/is safe and that the workers perform their tasks in compliance with established safe work practices or procedures. Workers must receive adequate training in their specific work tasks to protect their health and safety.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all persons and companies performing work, including other Contractors, on this project, at all times, up to and including, the date of Substantial Performance of the Work. Authority for coordination and instructions relating to all matters which relate to the safe and proper execution of construction work shall rest with the Contractor. The Contract Price will include the Contractor's fees for the coordination and supervision of the work of all other contractors.

In addition to the responsibility of all contractors as outlined in 1.1.10, above, Subcontractors will be held accountable for the health and safety of workers under their supervision.

Every worker must protect his/her own health and safety by working in compliance with the law and with safe work practices and procedures established by the authorities having jurisdiction.

All sections of the Occupational Health and Safety Act for Industrial Establishments,

latest edition, and the Occupational Health and Safety Act for Construction Projects, latest edition, shall be enforced, by the Contractor, in their entirety, throughout the duration of the construction project.

The Contractor shall provide the Consultant with the telephone number where the Contractor or his representative can be reached at any time, day or night, for the duration of the contract.

Where an accident, explosion, or fire causes a person injury at the work place, and the worker is disabled from performing the usual task, the Contractor shall prepare a written





notice and shall forward same to the Ministry of Labour within four days of the occurrence with a copy to the health and safety representative or the Joint Health and Safety Committee, containing such information and particulars as may be prescribed.

.1 Where a person is killed or critically injured from any cause at the work place, the

Contractor shall immediately call the Ministry of Labour. A written notice from the Contractor shall be given to the Ministry of Labour within forty-eight hours after the occurrence, containing such information and particulars as may be prescribed, with copies to the Consultant and the Owner's Representative.

.2 The Contractor is advised that the accident scene is under the jurisdiction of the Ministry of Labour and no wreckage, articles, etc., shall be interfered with, disturbed, destroyed, altered or carried away at the scene, or connected with the occurrence, until the Ministry of Labour has given permission.

1.2 REPORT ACCIDENTS

Promptly report in writing to the Consultant all accidents which cause death, personal injury or property damage, arising out of or in connection with the performance of the work on or adjacent to the site. Where death or serious injuries or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be reported immediately by telephone or messenger to the Consultant and to the relevant public authorities.

If any claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or Subcontractor on account of any accident, the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Consultant giving full details of the claim.

1.3 FIRST AID FACILITIES

Provide at the site the equipment and medical facilities necessary to supply first-aid service to anyone who may be injured in connection with the Work, and to conform to the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.

1.4 FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

The appropriate clauses of the Ontario Building Code, Ontario Fire Code, National Building Code of Canada and National Fire Code relating to fire safety and protection shall be strictly followed.

Provide and maintain free access to temporary or permanent fire hydrants acceptable to local fire department.

Provide sufficient temporary standpipes and connections, fire hose, valves, temporary cabinets, extinguishers, etc. to comply with the requirements of the governing Municipal and Provincial authorities.

Make necessary adjustments and modifications to temporary fire protection as required during progress of the work. Remove such temporary work when permanent system is installed and operating.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Conform to “Guidelines for Maintaining Fire Safety During Construction in Existing Buildings”, provided by the Office of the Ontario Fire Marshal. .1 Maintain existing exits and access to exits. Where an exit must be blocked,

provide an alternate exit acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. .2 Provide minimum 45 minute rated fire separations at junction between existing

corridors in occupied spaces and new corridors under construction. Any required access through these partitions shall be with rated doors, frames with closers and latching.

.3 Maintain exiting fire department access route or provide new, or temporary, access route acceptable to the fire department.

.4 Do not store combustible materials adjacent to existing building or where such materials could pose a fire hazard to the building or the occupants.

.5 Where temporary openings are made in existing floors, pack with mineral wool insulation to create temporary fire barrier.

.6 Existing fire alarm system is to be kept operational throughout the construction period. Keep fire department informed of any temporary shutdowns and arrange for alternate fire safety measures to be implemented during that period.

.7 Refer to the Ontario Fire Code for requirements for temporary shutdown of fire protections systems, including sprinklers and standpipe systems.

.8 Modify Fire Safety Plan in accordance with the Fire Code, when required to facilitate construction. Such modifications shall be determined in cooperation with the Owner and the local fire department.

1.5 OVERLOADING

Ensure no part of Work is subjected to a load which exceeds the design live loads shown on the structural drawings. Ensure that scaffolding and false work are not overloaded. Do not cut load bearing members without approval of Consultant.

1.6 FALSEWORK

Design and construct falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1 latest version.

1.7 VISITORS

Provide hard hats for use by all visitors.

1.8 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OCCUPIED SITES

The existing Library will be occupied throughout the Construction Period, additional safety requirements will apply, as outlined below:

Access Control: .1 The Contractor shall instruct all suppliers and subcontractors that they are

required to contact the Site Supervisor by cell phone prior to entering the site, and await escort.





.2 Gates and construction enclosure must remain closed and locked at all times and only opened for the time required for access/egress of authorized vehicles or personnel.

Site Communication:

.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with an emergency contact telephone number at which the Site Supervisor or other Contractor representative can be contacted directly during work hours and with voicemail available at all other times, including weekends and holidays, which will be checked regularly.

.2 Site Supervisor and flagman must have means of direct communication available at all times during work hours.

.3 Contractor shall be in daily communication with the Owner to determine any activities which may involve safety concerns, whether library related or construction related.

1.9 SIGNAGE

Provide signage indicating " Danger - Keep Out", "Hard Hats must be worn at all times",

"Safety Shoes must be worn at all times", "No Trespassing", etc., mounted on all sides of Site, and additional signs as necessary to adequately warn the public and workmen of the inherent dangers of the site and requirements to maintain personal safety. Safety Signage is also required at all construction entrances.

END OF SECTION



01 35 43 - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

The Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act requires the Owner to provide a list of Designated Substances to all prospective Contractors and they in turn must supply the list to their sub-trades who are likely to handle or disturb the material.

The Owner has provided a survey of hazardous materials/asbestos-containing building materials; refer to the report included in Project Manual at the end of Section 00 31 00 Available Project Information. Asbestos abatement work is to be carried in the cash allowance under this Contract

Other materials that may be present in the area of construction may include any or all of

the following and would be expected in normal construction: .1 Lead: in paint films, in solder or pipe for drinking water, in solder for other pipe or

electrical components. .2 Mercury : found in elemental form in an ampoule in thermostats or in electrical

soft switches, as a gas in fluorescent light tubes or in paint films and caulk. .3 Silica: primarily as Quartz, bound in building materials including but not limited to

concrete, brick and block.

In accordance with the Ontario Health and Safety Act and regulations enacted under the Act the Contractor and sub-trades shall take appropriate precautions for the building and their work force. Such precautions may include, for the substances listed, the measures outlined below.

Lead: .1 Any operation involving lead-based paints may potentially produce significant

exposures to lead if adequate controls are not provided. Exposure varies with the type of operation being employed.

.2 The presence of lead in building finishes left intact or found peeling in a few locations produces little exposure for workers to lead through contact, inhalation or ingestion.

.3 Operations involving the hand sanding and scraping of lead based paints can elevate exposure through inhalation. The use of a negative pressure respirator equipped with high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters is recommended to reduce exposure.

.4 Operations involving the machine sanding or abrasive cutting of paint and other surface coatings containing lead can elevate levels of much finer dust. The spray application of a lead bearing paint or coating produces a respirable fume. These operations increase the likelihood of exposure by inhalation. A negative pressure air-purifying respirator equipped with HEPA filters is recommended for these operations.

.5 Operations involving oxyacetylene torches or other heating operations produces the most significant exposure to lead in particular through inhalation and by contact of lead fumes solidifying on skin. A powered air-purifying respirator equipped with HEPA filters and full body covering is recommended for these operations.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.6 Lead found in solder of other pipe systems and electronic components poses no threat to the work force by inhalation, ingestion or by contact with the exception of maintenance or renovation activities. The maintenance of the pipe or electrical component may produce some exposure to lead fume during the seating on of lead solders but for a short duration of time. Inhalation is the source of entry and exposure is not very significant.

.7 All items identified in this section may be disposed of as regular non-hazardous waste unless concentrated. Metallic lead may be reclaimed through scrap metal dealers.

Mercury: .1 Fluorescent light tubes contain small quantities of mercury gas. These sealed

units do not pose any harm in the workplace except in the case of breakage. There are no liquid or residue present after breakage and spill cleaning is not a concern. A recommended practice is to evacuate the work area when breakage occurs. The gas will diffuse in about five to ten minutes and cleanup of the tubes can be performed. Mercury can be taken into the body by inhalation only from this source.

.2 The same precautions as those indicated for lead-based paints would apply to mercury in paints.

.3 Elemental mercury found in ampoules in electrical equipment may be disposed of as regular waste and should be turned over to the Owner for disposal through commercial recyclers. The other forms (light tubes and painted surfaces that have been concentrated) can be disposed of as regular waste.

Silica:

.1 Silica is presumed to be present in cement, cement blocks, bricks and mortar of the building. Unless the silica in these materials is reduced to respirable size (5 um or less) and the airborne concentration exceeds the time weighted average exposure of 0.2 milligrams per cubic metre in air, no adverse health effects are expected to occur. Building construction, renovation or demolition do not normally raise excessive exposure to silica with the exception of jack hammering, dry saw cutting or sand blasting. There is little likelihood for the work force to be exposed to excessive levels of respirable silica dust if the material is suppressed with water spray or flow. Respiratory protection is dependent on the type and airborne concentration of respirable silica present in the particular work environment.

.2 Prior to the disposal of building materials a leachate toxicity test in compliance with Water Management Regulation (Revised Regulation of Ontario 1990/Regulation 347) may be required by the local waster receiving site or the Ontario Ministry of Environment and Energy. Prior to disposal these authorities should be consulted with and tests performed where required.

.3 Where a friable building material enclosed in a wall, floor or ceiling such as fireproofing, insulation on pipe or ducts etc. (that is not fibrous glass) or an acoustical textured material (stucco) or a non-friable material such as cement board or cement pipe, the Contractor shall refer to the Consultant who shall contact the Owner for further direction.





END OF SECTION



01 41 00 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 REGULATING DOCUMENTS

Conform to the Ontario Building Code (Ontario Reg. 332/12), Ontario Fire Code (Ontario

Reg. 213/07), Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act (Ontario Reg. 191/11), National Building Code of Canada 2010, 2012 Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), CSA B44 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, CSA W59 - Welded Steel Construction, The Occupational Health and Safety Act, Ontario (R.S.O. 1990), the National Fire Code, the local municipal Fire Code, and all other applicable Codes and Building By-Laws. Conform to the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, such as public utilities. Where required under The Occupational Health and Safety Act, engage a Professional Engineer to design formwork and falsework for concrete.

Contract forms, codes, standards and manuals referred to in these specifications are the latest published editions at the date of close of tenders. Meet or exceed requirements of specified standards.

Provide copies of documents referred to in the Specification for joint use of Contractor

and Consultant, on site.

Other Purchasing Policies:

.1 The Contractor shall be familiar with and, where required, comply with the Town of Oakville’s purchasing policies. Refer to the Town of Oakville’s Front End Document.

1.2 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED BY BUILDING INSPECTOR

Confirm with building inspector, at the commencement of construction, what documents are required for submission both during construction and for occupancy. Keep copies of such documents on site.

At the time of request for occupancy, submit a complete package of all required documents to the building inspector. The package shall contain all documents required for the inspector’s sign off for occupancy, and should be expected to include the following documents: .1 Copies of Consultant’s General Review Reports .2 Copies of General Review Reports of consulting engineers .3 Consultant’s and engineers’ letters confirming project is ready for occupancy in

accordance with the provisions of the Ontario Building Code, Division C, and section 1.3.3, Occupancy of Buildings.

.4 Verification of compliance with tested designs for rated assemblies.

.5 Verification of Fire Protection Systems including: .1 Verification of engineer supervised sprinkler, standpipe and hose system

testing.



01 41 00 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.2 Material and test certificates for all work, including below ground, in conformance with NFPA-13 and NFPA-14, as applicable.

.6 Verification of Fire Alarm System as follows: .1 Testing to CAN/ULC S537 .2 Installation to CAN/ULC S524 .3 Monitoring to CAN/ULC S561

.7 Additional documents as required by the municipality.

END OF SECTION



01 42 13 – ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS


A A/B ANCHORBOLT AC AIR CONDITIONING ACT ACOUSTIC CEILINGTILE ADD ADDENDUM ADJ ADJUSTABLE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT ALM ALARM ALUM ALUMINUM ANN ANNUNCIATOR PANEL ANO ANODIZED AUTO AUTOMATIC A/V AUDIO VISUAL AVB AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER AWT ACOUSTIC WALL

TREATMENT

B BD BOARD BEV BEVELLED BF BARRIER-FREE BH BORE HOLE B/H BULKHEAD BIT BITUMINOUS BLDG BUILDING BLK CONCRETE BLOCK BM BEAM B/M BENCH MARK BN BULL NOSED BOT BOTTOM BP BEARING PLATE BRDG BRIDGING BRK BRICK BUR BUILT-UP ROOFING BV BLOCK VENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section describes abbreviations and acronyms that may be used in these

specifications and on the drawings and schedules. When references are made in these specifications to the standards, specifications, or

other published data of various international, national, regional, or local organizations, such organizations may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only.

The list of abbreviations and acronyms is provided to aid in the interpretation of notations in the construction documents and shall not be used to alter the meaning of notes for which the meaning is readily inferable from the context.

Abbreviations and acronyms can have more than one meaning. Their use shall be considered with respect to different subjects and disciplines where the context in which each is used makes the meaning clear. .1 Example:

.1 CB on floor plans typically refers to a chalkboard .2 CB on site plans typically refers to a catchbasin .3 CB on electrical plans typically refers to a circuit breaker

Where additional or alternate abbreviations and acronyms are listed and used on

drawings, schedules, and in the specification sections prepared by subconsultants, those shall apply to the documents on which they are noted.

Discrepancies shall be noted and brought to the Consultant's attention for interpretation.

1.2 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

The following is a list of abbreviations used in the specifications, schedules and on the drawings:





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

C CAB CABINET CAP CARPET CB CHALKBOARD, OR

CATCHBASIN C/B CATCHBASIN CBMH CATCHBASIN MANHOLE C/C CENTRE TO CENTRE CEM CEMENT CER CERAMIC CH CABINET HEATER CJ CONTROL JOINT CL CENTRE LINE CLF CHAIN LINK FENCE CLG CEILING CLR CLEAR CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COL COLUMN CONSTR CONSTRUCTION CONC CONTINUOUS CONTR CONTRACT OR

CONTRACTOR CONV CONVECTOR CORR CORRIDOR CP CONTROL PANEL CPT CARPET CR COAT RACK CS CONVENIENCE SHELF CT CERAMIC TILE C-UL UL TESTED FOR CANADA CTR CENTRE C/W COMPLETE WITH C/S CONCRETE, SEALED D DAM DAMPPROOFING DAT DATUM DBL DOUBLE DET DETAIL DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIA DIAMETER DIAG DIAGONAL DIFF DIFFUSER DIM DIMENSION DISP DISPENSER DL DOOR LOUVER DN DOWN DSP DOWNSPOUT DVTL DOVETAIL JOINT DRY DRYER DW DISHWASHER DWG DRAWING

E EF EACH FACE EJ EXPANSION JOINT EL ELEVATION ELEV ELEVATOR EQL EQUAL EQ/T EQUIVALENT THICKNESS EQPT EQUIPMENT EX EXISTING EXH EXHAUST EXP EXPANSION EXP STR EXPOSED STRUCTURE F FBD FIBREBOARD FD FLOOR DRAIN F/D FIRE DAMPER FCD FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION FDN FOUNDATION FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FFL FINISH FLOOR LEVEL FH FIRE HYDRANT FHC FIRE HOSE CABINET FIN FINISH FIX FIXTURE FLG FLASHING FLEX FLEXIBLE FLUOR FLUORESCENT FPR FIRE PROTECTION RATING FR FIRE RETARDANT/RATED FRR FIRE RESISTANCE RATING FSS FIRE SEPARATION FTG FOOTING FURR FURRING G GA GAUGE GALV GALVANIZED GB GYPSUM BOARD GL GLASS GRB GRAB BAR GVL GRAVEL GYP BD GYPSUM BOARD GWG GEORGIAN WIRED GLASS H HB HOSE BIBB H/C HANDICAPPED HD HAND DRYER HM HOLLOW METAL





HRD HAIR DRYER HTD HIGH TRAFFIC DOORS HVAC HEATING, VENTILATION AND

AIRCONDITIONING HWT HOT WATER TANK HYD FIRE HYDRANT I ID INSIDE DIAMETER INS INSULATION ISOL ISOLATION

L LAB LABORATORY LAM LAMINATE LAT LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL TILE LAT -1 LAY-IN ACOUSTICAL TILE

(TYPE 1) LAV LAVATORY LBL LABEL LDBR LOAD BEARING LDG LANDING LF LIGHT FIXTURE LH LEFT HAND LHR LEFT HAND REVERSE LIB LIBRARY LINO LINOLEUM LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL LNTL LINTEL LONG LONGITUDINAL LPT LOW POINT LMC LINEAR METAL CEILING LS LIGHT STANDARD LVL LEVEL LV -1 LOUVRE (TYPE 1) LWB LIGHT WEIGHT BLOCK M M METRES MAT MINERAL ACOUSTIC TILE MAX MAXIMUM MDF MEDIUM DENSITY

FIBREBOARD MECH MECHANICAL MEMB MEMBRANE MET METAL MEZZ MEZZANINE MH MANHOLE MIN MINIMUM MIRR MIRROR MISC MISCELLANEOUS MLWK MILLWORK

MLWK MILLWORK MM MILLIMETRES MO MASONRY OPENINGS MR MOISTURE RESISTANT MTD MOUNTED MWP MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING N NAT NATURAL NBCC NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF

CANADA NFHB NON-FREEZE HOSE BIBB NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NO NUMBER NOM NOMINAL NSF NON-SLIP FLOORING NTS NOT TO SCALE O OA OVERALL OBC ONTARIO BUILDING CODE OC ON CENTRE OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER O/H OVERHEAD OPG OBSCURE PLATE GLASS OWSJ OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST OV OVEN P P PAINT PAP PREFINISHED ALUMINUM PANEL PA PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM PB PORCELAIN BASE PAR PARALELL PB PUSH DOOR OPERATOR PBD PARTICLEBOARD PC PRECAST CONCRETE PE PORCELAIN ENAMEL PERF PERFORATED PERIM PERIMETER PERP PERPENDICULAR PG PLATE GLASS PL PLASTER PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE PLUMB PLUMBING PLYWD PLYWOOD PMF PREFINISHED METAL FLASHING PMS PREFINISHED METAL SIDING PMP PREFINISHED METAL PANEL PML PANEL POLY POLYETHYLENE OR POLYOLEFIN POR PORCELAIN TILE PR PAIR





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

PREFIN PREFINISHED PRELIM PRELIMINARY PT PAINT, OR PORCELAIN TILE PTD PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER PTN PARTITION PTW PRESERVATIVE TREATED

WOOD PVG PAVING PWC PLASTIC WALL COVERING Q QT QUARRY TILE R R RADIUS RA RETURN AIR RAD RADIATOR RB RUBBER BASE RD ROOF DRAIN REBAR REINFORCING BAR RCONV RECESSED CONVECTOR RCH RECESSED CABINET

HEATER REC RECESSED REF REFERENCE / REFER REFR REFRIGERATOR REINF REINFORCE/D/ING/MENT REM REMOVE/ABLE RES RESILIENT REV REVISE / REVISION RFG ROOFING RH RIGHT HAND R/H ROOF HOPPER RLG RAILING RM ROOM, OR RECESS

MOUNTED RMC REINFORCED MASONRY

COLUMN RUBB RUBBER RUH RECESSED UNIT HEATER RWL RAINWATER LEADER S S -1 STAIN (TYPE) 1 SAD SECURITY ALARM DEVICE SAN SANITARY SC SOLID CORE SCB SLIDING CHALKBOARD SCHED SCHEDULE SD SOAP DISPENSER SEC SPECIAL EPOXY COATING SF SHEET FLOORING SIM SIMILAR

SK SINK SL SLATE SND SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER SNR SANITARY NAPKIN RECEPTACLE SOG SLAB ON GRADE SP SPANDREL PANEL SPECS SPECIFICATIONS SPC SPECIAL COATING SPF SPORTS FLOORING SPKR SPEAKER SRCONV SEMI RECESSED CONVECTOR SS STAINLESS STEEL ST STEEL STAG STAGGERED STC SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS STD STANDARD STIFF STIFFENER STOR STORAGE STR STRUCTURE SUPPL SUPPLEMENT/AL SURF SURFACE SUSP SUSPENDED SVF SHEET VINYL FLOORING SIDEWALK SWF SPECIAL WALL FINISH SYM SYMBOL T TB TACKBOARD TB TOP AND BOTTOM TBD TO BE DETERMINED TC TEACHER’S CLOSET, OR TOP OF

CURB TEC TECTUM PANEL T&G TONGUE AND GROOVE TEMP TEMPERED GLASS TERR TERRAZZO TEL TELEPHONE TEMP TEMPORARY TH TEST HOLE TM TILT MIRROR T/O TOP OF TOC TOP OF CURB TOCS TOP OF CONCRETE SLAB TOS TOP OF STEEL TPG TEMPERED PLATE GLASS TPH TOILET PAPER HOLDER TR TRANSOM TYP TYPICAL U U/C UNDERCUT U/G UNDERGROUND UH UNIT HEATER





ULC UNDERWRITER’S LABORATORIES OF CANADA

UL UNDERWRITER’S LABORATORIES (USA)

UNEX UNEXCAVATED UNF UNFINISHED UNO UNLESS NOTED

OTHERWISE U/P UNPAINTED UR URINAL U/S UNDERSIDE UTIL UTILITY V VAR VARIABLE, VARIES VB VAPOUR BARRIER VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VERT VERTICAL VEST VESTIBULE VT VINYL FACED VR VAPOUR RETARDER VT VINYL TILE VWP VINYL WALL PANEL

W W/ WITH WASH WASHING MACHINE WB WHITE BOARD WC WATERCLOSET (TOILET) WD WOOD WDF WOOD FLOORING WF WASH FOUNTAIN WG WIRED GLASS W/O WITHOUT WP WATERPROOFING, WORKING POINT WR WASHROOM W/R WATER RESISTANT

END OF SECTION



01 43 00 – QUALITY ASSURANCE


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Refer also to the Quality Control Provisions of Section 01 10 00, General Instructions. Provide a system of quality control to ensure that the minimum standards specified herein

are attained. Bring to the attention of the Consultant any defects in the work or departures from the

Contract Documents which may occur during construction. The Consultant will decide upon corrective action and state recommendations in writing.

The Consultant's general review during construction and inspection by independent inspection and testing agencies reporting to the Consultant are both undertaken to inform the Owner of the Contractor's performance and shall in no way augment the Contractor's quality control or relieve him of contractual responsibility.

1.2 NOTIFICATION

Give the Consultant advance notice of shop fabrication, field erection and other phases of the work so as to afford him reasonable opportunity to inspect the work for compliance with contract requirements. Failure to meet this requirement may be cause for the Consultant to classify the work as defective.

1.3 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Where factual evidence exists that defective workmanship has occurred or that work has been carried out incorporating defective materials, the Consultant may have tests, concrete cores, inspections or surveys performed, analytical calculation of structural strength made and the like in order to help determine whether the work must be replaced, Test, inspections or surveys carried out under these circumstances will be made at the Contractor's expense, regardless of their results, which may indicate that, in the Consultant's opinion, the work may be acceptable.

All testing shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code, except where this would, in the Consultant's opinion, cause undue delay or give results not representative of the rejected material in place. In this case, the tests shall be conducted in accordance with the standards given by the Consultant.

END OF SECTION



01 51 00 – TEMPORARY UTILITIES


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE AND FAX

Install and pay for all telephone and fax machine services for Contractor’s own use, and

for the Owner's and Consultant's use. Fax shall have dedicated line.

Refer to Section 01 52 00, Construction Facilities, for alternatives to site phone and fax machine provisions.

1.2 POWER AND WATER SUPPLY

Provide all temporary light and power complete with all wiring, lamps and similar

equipment as required for completion of the Work. Provide adequate lighting for all workmen, sufficient for safety and for execution of good workmanship, taking particular care to observe all safety requirements. Adequate temporary lighting will be insisted upon. The Owner will not be liable for any loss, damage, delay, or claims for extra costs resulting from lack of services.

Existing building services may be used, as available. This does not include emergency generators or batteries. All costs resulting from the use of these services are the responsibility of the Contractor.

Water supply: The existing building water service may be used to supply potable water for construction use.

1.3 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION

Furnish heating apparatus and fuel for heating the temporary offices and sheds.

Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulations of hazardous

substances into atmosphere of occupied areas. Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons.

Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials. Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of work process to assure removal of harmful elements. Store paints & solvents in secure, locked, ventilated room at all times.

Protect existing ducting system with filters, inspect daily and replace weekly or more

frequently as necessary. Finally vacuum clean ducting system and replace filters at completion of the Work.

Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment. Contract documents for work under this contract consists of the following: .1 Enforce conformance with applicable codes and standards. .2 Enforce safe practices.



01 51 00 – TEMPORARY UTILITIES


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.3 Prevent abuse of services.

.4 Prevent damage to finishes.

.5 Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside.

1.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

An adequate number of ABC type fire extinguishers shall be provided for the protection of the work during construction.

1.5 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES

Remove temporary utilities from site when directed by Consultant and/or at the completion of the project

END OF SECTION



01 52 00 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACTOR'S SITE OFFICE

Provide and maintain a site office within the existing construction area.

The site office shall be furnished with the following as a minimum requirement:

.1 Desk and chair

.2 File cabinets as required for storage

.3 Plan file for storage of drawings

.4 Table and stacking chairs to provide seating at job meetings

.5 Telephone and fax machine, or other acceptable means of communication as noted below.

Mobile telephone will only be accepted in place of site telephone if the contact number for the site is available at all times when construction personnel are on site, and subject to acceptance by Owner and Consultant.

A printer and computer (or equivalent) may be accepted in lieu of a fax machine on site, subject to acceptance of provisions by Owner and Consultant.

Locate site office in a suitable location to approved of the Consultant.

The Contractor shall maintain the following documents, up-to-date, in site office:

.1 Contract Documents

.2 Reviewed shop drawings

.3 All instructions and change documents, ie Work Authorizations, Jobsite Instructions, Notices of Contemplated Change, Change Orders

.4 All inspection and test reports

.5 Permit drawings and specifications

.6 As-built drawings

1.2 STORAGE SHEDS

Provide adequate weather-tight sheds with raised floors, for storage of materials, tools and equipment which are subject to damage by weather.

Storage sheds shall be painted and doors shall be fitted with locks.

Locate storage sheds adjacent to building away, in the mobilization zone, from road to approval of the Consultant.

Material stored on site must be protected by tarpaulins until enclosed in building.

1.3 SANITARY FACILITIES .1 Workers will be permitted to use the existing washrooms in the Library.



01 52 00 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.2 Post notices and take such precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition.

1.4 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES

Remove temporary facilities from site when directed by Consultant and/or at the

completion of the project.

END OF SECTION



01 56 00 – TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND CONTROLS


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 PROTECTION

Supply, install and maintain all guard rails, barriers, night lights, sidewalk and curb protection as may be necessary or as the by-laws may require.

Supply, install and maintain all necessary temporary doors, screens and coverings to protect work areas. All such work shall be neatly painted. Doors shall have hasp and substantial padlock. Owners representative shall have key or combination where access is required.

Protect existing asphalt and concrete paving and curbs from damage and make good any

damage at completion of project.

Properly protect floors and roofs from any damage. Take special precautions when moving heavy loads or equipment over floors and roofs.

Keep floors free of oils, grease or other such materials likely to discolour them and/or

affect bonding of applied surfaces.

Protect glass and other finishes against heat, slab and weld splatters, using appropriate protective shields and covers.

Provide and maintain, in good working order, appropriately labelled ULC fire

extinguishers, to the approval of Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

Provide a minimum of two safety helmets on site at all times for the use of any other Owner authorized visitors to the site. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that any such visitors wear the protective headgear and any other safety gear which may be necessary at that particular time of construction.

Should the job be stopped for any cause, the Contractor shall be responsible for and

provide all necessary protection to prevent damage by weather or other cause until the cause of stoppage has been cleared.

The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for supervision of project and for protection

of public from vehicles in movement, stockpiled materials and construction.

The Contractor is responsible for the prevention of vandalism and theft of all tools, equipment and materials.

Any damage to roadways must be repaired immediately, to municipal standards.

The Contractor is responsible for snow removal as required for access to site.

Any damage to site by the Contractors forces, delivery vehicles, etc., must be made good

at the end of the job. Similarly any damage to curbs, sidewalks, or other municipal property shall be made good by the Contractor.



01 56 00 – TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND CONTROLS


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.2 TEMPORARY DUST PROOF PARTITIONS

Supply and install dust proof partitions in the existing library corridors and doorways at entrance to work areas prior to any work taking place. Refer to Section 02 40 00 for specific requirements for dust proof partitions.

Dust proof partitions shall be erected outside of Library and School operating hours and shall remain in place until the new Work is ready for occupancy, and accepted by the Owner.

.3 Refer to architectural drawings A1 and A9 for layout of temporary dust proof and plywood

hoarding partitions and the specific type of partitions to be erected.

1.3 SECURITY

The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for supervision of project and for protection

of public from vehicles in movement, for stockpiled materials and construction. Vehicular parking and stockpile materials must be maintained on the construction staging area only. No street parking or stockpiling will be allowed on the Municipal streets.

The Contractor is responsible for the prevention of vandalism and theft of all tools, equipment and materials until date of Substantial Performance of Contract.

1.4 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY BARRIERS

Remove temporary barriers and enclosures from site when directed by Consultant and/or at the completion of the project.

END OF SECTION



01 73 00 – EXECUTION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING

Before cutting, drilling or sleeving load-bearing elements, obtain approval of location and

method.

Do not endanger work or property by cutting, digging, or similar activities. No trade shall cut or alter the work of another trade who has installed it unless approved by that trade.

Cut and drill with true smooth edge to minimum suitable tolerances.

Fit construction tightly to ducts, pipes and conduit to stop air movement completely. The

trade performing work that penetrates a fire, air, vapour, moisture, thermal or acoustic separation element of the building shall pack voids tightly with insulation, rated where required; seal air, vapour and moisture barriers; and caulk joints as may be required to ensure that no air movement through the penetration is possible.

Cutting, drilling and sleeving of work shall be done only by the trade who has installed it.

The trade requiring drilling and sleeving shall inform the trade performing the work of the location and other requirements for drilling and sleeving. The Contractor shall directly supervise performance of cutting and patching.

Replace and/or make good damaged work.

Patching or replacement of damaged work shall be done by the subcontractor under

whose work it was originally executed, and at the expense of the subcontractor who caused the damage.

1.2 CONCEALMENT

Conceal all pipes, ducts and wiring in finished areas except where indicated otherwise.

This includes new work in existing building.

Where furring out is required, use material similar to adjacent surfaces except where indicated otherwise.

All new horizontal runs of ducts, pipes and conduits shall be concealed in ceiling spaces.

All new duct drops and risers shall be concealed in ceiling spaces, bulkheads or furred out duct shafts. All new pipe and conduit drops and risers shall be buried in walls. New devices in walls shall be recessed.

1.3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Mechanical and Electrical services must be temporarily capped or terminated to permit renovation in existing areas to proceed.



01 73 00 – EXECUTION


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Cutting of holes up to 100mm in size in the existing structure and surfaces required by the trades shall be by those Subcontractors. Cutting and patching of openings greater than 100mm in size shall be by the Contractor in co-ordination with the trades. PATCHING OF ALL HOLES IN EXPOSED FINISHED SURFACES SHALL BE BY THE CONTRACTOR. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall do their own coring of existing slabs as required.

1.4 GENERAL NOTES

Refer to the Door Schedule, Section 08 71 00, and the Room Finish Schedule, and the

general notes below.

Junction of different floor finishes shall occur on centre line of doors.

All masonry and drywall shall be extended to u/s steel deck or slab above. Where walls run parallel and under OWSJs the OWSJs shall be enclosed both sides with gypsum board to provide sound barrier between rooms. Fill with minimum 100 mm batt insulation.

All exposed concrete floor surfaces to be polished and sealed as specified.

All structural steel supporting ground floor structure shall be enclosed in 1 hr. fire rated

gypsum board enclosure.

All exposed concrete block corners shall be bullnose block.

Hardware shown on Door Schedule on the drawings refers to code requirements only. Refer to Hardware Schedule, included in Section 08 71 00, for total hardware required.

H.M. doors and frames shall be prepared for security alarm devices (S.A.D.) and

handicapped door operators.

All fabric finishes on walls shall be maximum 25 flame spread rating.

END OF SECTION



01 74 00 – CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances, anti-pollution

laws, and recommendations of Construction Safety Association.

Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily.

Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.

Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.

Provide instructions designating proper methods and materials to be used in final cleaning of Work.

Do not burn any rubble, waste or packaging, or surplus materials. No dumping of waste,

such as oil or paint, into sewers will be permitted. 1.2 MATERIALS

Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and

as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

1.3 POLLUTION CONTROL

Cover dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris.

Prevent dust nuisance to adjacent properties, existing Library and general public by taking appropriate pollution control measures as directed by Consultant.

1.4 FIRES

Fires and burning of rubbish on Site are not permitted.

1.5 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION

Maintain entire site and adjoining municipal and/or private property free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. Do not allow rubbish to accumulate in work under construction or on roofs. Clean site daily.

Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, and rubbish. Empty containers on a regular basis in conformance with Municipal and Provincial Regulations.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Cleaning operations shall include those areas used for temporary site access or used on a temporary basis to facilitate the Work.

Broom clean and vacuum areas as required for application of finishes. Continue to clean

on an “as needed” basis and insure that areas which receive paint, floor tile and other critical finishes are kept dry, dust free, and at acceptable temperatures.

Keep all areas of the Work clean and orderly, free from accumulation of dirt, debris,

garbage, oily rags, excess material, or such other trash items. Remove such items from all areas of the Work on a daily basis.

Vacuum and/or broom interior building areas when ready to receive painting and other finishes. Continue cleaning on an “as needed” basis until the building is ready for inspection and take-over.

Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust and other contaminants do not affect

wet, newly painted surfaces, or newly installed equipment, or devices. 1.6 CLEANING AT COMPLETION OF WORK

In addition to the progressive removal of rubbish from the entire building and Site, and

leaving the buildings broom clean, the Contractor shall perform the following work in preparation for Substantial Performance.

Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from all exposed interior and exterior finishes, including glass and other polished surfaces. Clean glass both sides, and replace broken glass. Vacuum inside all cabinets and drawers and leave millwork ready for use. Remove paint spots and smears from all surfaces, including hardware.

Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorated work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, and the like. Remove protective materials.

Remove all protective film from switchplates and hardware, particularly kick plates. Clean hardware, aluminum, stainless steel and the like.

Clean resilient and sheet flooring and all floor and wall tile.

Clean lighting reflectors, lenses and other lighting surfaces.

Replace heating, ventilation and/or air conditioning filters at Substantial Performance,

whether or not the units were operated during construction operations.

Vacuum clean all building interiors affected by construction operations before occupancy.

Broom clean paved surfaces and rake clean other disturbed surfaces in the area of the Work, to remove site debris caused by the Work of this Contract. Inspect for damages and make good.

Clean exterior walkways, driveways and the like. Remove snow from walks and paved

areas if necessary, prior to occupancy.





Conduct final inspection of interior and exterior surfaces, and concealed spaces.

Leave premises ready for immediate occupation without further cleaning, all to the

Consultant's approval.

END OF SECTION



01 77 00 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 TAKEOVER PROCEDURE

Subject to detailed instructions included in these specifications, conform to OAA/OGCA

document 100, Take-Over Procedures.

1.2 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

Review occupancy with the building inspector well in advance of required occupancy date, and ensure that the requirements are met for occupancy, including all document submissions. Refer also to Section 01 41 00, Regulatory Requirements.

An occupancy permit is required for any project that is not deemed complete prior to the date of occupancy.

Refer to OBC Division C, section 1.3.3, Occupancy of Buildings, for occupancy requirements. The designated building official is required to issue an occupancy permit only under the conditions outlined therein.

In addition to the OBC requirements for occupancy, the spaces must be complete for the

purposes of occupancy by the Owner.

The issue of an occupancy permit shall not imply Substantial Performance of the Contract. Determination of Substantial Performance is defined by lien legislation.

1.3 ACTION REQUIRED AT OCCUPANCY

When of the opinion that the Occupancy Requirements have been met, perform an

inspection of the work, accompanied by the major subcontractors. Submit an inspection report, confirming that the occupancy requirements have been met, to the Consultant and the Owner.

Arrange for and pay related fee for all necessary inspections required for occupancy such as Hydro, Fire Department and Building Department.

Confirm with the building inspector that the occupancy requirements of the municipality have been met, and submit evidence of such to the Consultant and Owner.

Next, arrange for a review of the Work with the Consultants and Owner. The Consultant

will determine whether the Work is Fit for Occupancy.

Request letters confirming General Review from Consultant, and Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Engineers, for submission to Authorities Having Jurisdiction.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Upon receipt of the required documents, confirm that occupancy of the Work is accepted by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Submit evidence of the permission for occupancy to the Consultant and Owner.

When partial occupancy of uncompleted project is required by the Owner, co-ordinate the Owner’s uses, requirements and access with the construction requirements to complete project.

1.4 ACTION REQUIRED AT SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE

Perform the actions listed below prior to issue of the Certificate of Substantial

Performance of the Contract.

Submit the documents and material detailed in section 01 78 00, Closeout Submittals. Deliver all required submittals to the Consultant for approval PRIOR to Substantial Performance of the Work. Final payment will not be made until all these items have been received and approved.

Prior to applying for a Certificate of Substantial Performance, perform an inspection in accordance with OAA/OGCA Document 100, Stage 2, Contractor’s Inspection for Substantial Performance. Submit a copy of the deficiency list to the Consultant.

Ensure all sub-systems ie fire alarm, security, E.M.S., are fully operational prior to

Substantial Performance.

When of the opinion that the requirements for Substantial Performance have been met, submit an application for a Certificate of Substantial Performance to the Consultant. The application shall be as outline for Stage 3 of the OAA/OGCA Take-Over Procedures.

Expedite and complete deficiencies and defects identified by the Consultant. Final

Certificate for Payment will not be issued until all deficiencies are satisfactorily corrected, inspected, and approved by the Consultant, and all documentation has been handed to the Consultant.

Remove all protection erected, and make good all damage to the Work and adjoining

Work due to the lack or failure of such protection. In addition, all debris, surplus materials tools equipment shall be removed from the work areas and the site, and the Project shall be left clean and tidy to the full and complete satisfaction of the Consultant and Owner.

Perform final adjustment of Cash Allowance, specified in Section 01 10 00, General

Instructions.

Arrange for Consultant to prepare CAD drawing files for the Owner using the final as-built drawings. In addition, have the Consultant prepare an updated Project Manual, in Word format.

At time of Substantial Performance, instruct the Owner’s personnel in operation,

adjustment and maintenance of equipment and systems, using operation and maintenance manuals as the basis for instruction.





Prior to final site review, start up and demonstrate operation of all systems to the Owner and the Consultant.

Review cash allowances in relation to contract price, change orders, hold-backs and

other contract price adjustments.

Review inspection and testing reports to verify conformance to the intent of the documents.

Review condition of all equipment, which has been used in the course of the Work to ensure turnover at completion in “as new condition” with warranties, dated and certified from time of Substantial Performance of the Contract.

When partial occupancy of uncompleted project is required by the Owner, co-ordinate the

Owner’s uses, requirements and access with the construction requirements to complete project.

Provide on-going review, inspection, and attendance to building call back, maintenance

and repair problems during the warranty periods.

Continue to submit monthly deficiency status reports, as specified in Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Documentation.

1.5 TOTAL PERFORMANCE

Upon completion of all items noted on the deficiency list, clean all areas, surfaces, and

components affected by corrections and completion of deficient items.

Ensure that all services, equipment, and apparatus are properly tested and adjusted.

Letter of Completion:

.1 Submit a Letter of Completion to the Consultant stating that the Contract is complete, that all deficiencies identified by the Consultant, Subconsultants, Inspectors and Owner have been rectified, and requesting final reviews by Consultant and Subconsultants.

.2 Sign and return deficiency lists, issued by Consultant and Subconsultants, to confirm completion of all deficiencies identified thereon.

Final Site Review: .1 Consultant will conduct one site review for Total Performance, within ten (10)

working days of the request by the Contractor. Should the Contractor fail to provide the Letter of Completion, the Consultants will be under no obligation to perform a site review within the above noted time.

.2 Additional site reviews, as requested by the Contractor or as necessitated due to the Contractor's failure to complete work as required, shall be paid for by the Contractor at a rate of $500 per visit, per consultant, plus the cost to prepare additional site review reports at per diem rates (rates as recommended by the OAA or PEO, or as negotiated in advance).





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Submit a final request for payment, incorporating all approved changes to the Contract

price, and adjustments to the Cash Allowance.

Final Certificate for Payment will not be authorized until all deficiencies are satisfactorily corrected, reviewed and signed off by the Consultant, and required submittals have been completely and accurately provided.

1.6 WARRANTY PERIOD

The Warranty Period on this Project will expire twelve (12) months from the date of

Substantial Performance of the Work, except for extended warranties as called for throughout the Specifications or equipment not certified by Consultant at time of Substantial Performance.

1.7 UTILITY CHARGES

The Owner will assume responsibility for utility service billing.

Contractor to arrange for reading of meters at completion of Work.

END OF SECTION



01 78 00 – CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED FOR OCCUPANCY

Refer to Section 01 41 00, Regulatory Requirements for documents required to be

submitted to Authorities having Jurisdiction, for occupancy.

1.2 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED AT SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE

Prior to Substantial Performance of the Contract, perform the actions detailed in section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures, and submit the following documents and materials:

.1 Deficiency list prepared by Contractor for all areas of the project. .2 Certificates of good standing from the Workplace Safety & Insurance Board for

the Contractor and all Subcontractors .3 Operations and Maintenance Manuals, including warranties .4 One complete set of final approved Shop Drawings (bound separately) indicating

corrections and changes made during fabrication and installation, plus one digital copy of the same (on CD).

.5 Keys and construction cores

.6 Maintenance materials

.7 As-Built Documents as specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures

.8 Electrical panel directories (typed and mounted in panels); refer to electrical specifications.

.9 Pressure Vessels Inspection Certificates

.10 Balancing Report for Ventilation System.

.11 Inspection Certificates required by Provincial, Municipal and other authorities having jurisdiction.

Deliver all required submittals to the Consultant for approval prior to Substantial Performance of the Work. Final payment will not be made until all these items have been received and approved. These submittals include:

1.3 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

At Substantial Performance submit to Consultant two (2) printed copies, and one digital copy, of Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical Operations Data and Maintenance Manuals made up as follows: .1 Bind printed data in vinyl hard covered, three-ring loose leaf binder for 212.5mm

x 275mm (8-1/2" x 11") size paper. .2 Enclose title sheet, labelled "Operation Data and Maintenance Manual -

Architectural", project name, date and list of contents. Enclose similar sheet labelled Mechanical and Electrical in applicable manuals. Include the following information:

.1 name of project





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.2 name of Owner

.3 name of Consultant

.4 name of Contractor

.5 date of Substantial Performance.

.3 Organize contents into applicable sections of work to parallel project specification break-down. Mark each section by labelled tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividing sheets.

.4 All data related to a section of work or product shall be grouped together, except for shop drawings, unless otherwise requested by the Owner. Confirm method of organization with Owner prior to assembling manuals. Typically, each section shall be organized, as applicable, as follows: .1 General information; identify section of work, subcontractor(s)

responsible .2 Warranty .3 Guarantees, Bonds .4 Schedules (hardware, paint) .5 Product data sheets .6 Material safety data sheets (MSDS) .7 Operating manual .8 Maintenance instructions .9 Receipts for maintenance materials, keys, etc., .10 Maintenance contracts (applicable to elevator, wheelchair lift, planting,

sod, etc.) .11 Inspection and testing reports

Provide one copy of each of the following in the first binder:

.1 Contractor’s final statutory declaration on CCDC form 9A-2001

.2 Major Subcontractor’s final statutory declarations on CCDC form 9B-2001

.3 Workers' Compensation and Insurance Board (WSIB) certificate

.4 certificates of approval of the work by the Building Department (if available)

.5 Ontario Hydro certificate of inspection.

Provide a disk or memory stick containing all construction progress photos submitted; refer to Section 01 32 00. Provide an index with printed images clearly identified with name of project, description of view and date taken. Disks are to be clearly labelled.

Include the following information, plus any additional data required within the specifications. .1 List of all Subcontractors, major suppliers, and local equipment service

representatives, their addresses and telephone numbers. .2 Date of Substantial Performance (commencement of warranty periods) and

termination dates of warranties. .3 Operating manuals including lubricating, repair and other instructions to keep all

mechanical and electrical/electronic equipment in good working order. Reviewed shop drawings of same. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Specifications for further requirements.

.4 Door and Frame Schedule (as-built); insert in front of Division 08 section in manuals.





.5 Final hardware schedule, revised to include all changes during construction, including local manufacturer's descriptive and service literature. Include AHC’s final inspection report.

.6 Final finish/colour schedule; insert in front of Division 09 section in manuals.

.7 Provide paint schedule indicating paint brand and formulas used.

.8 Maintenance instructions for all types of floor finish and other special finishes. Include instructions for cleaning, repairing, refinishing and freshening, and warnings of damaging or dangerous practices where necessary.

.9 Maintenance and service instructions and manufacturer's literature for all special architectural features: i.e. windows, patent glazing, handicapped lift etc.

.10 Description, operations and maintenance instructions for equipment and systems, including complete list of equipment and parts list.

.11 All warranties, guarantees, bonds, etc., properly completed and signed, which extend beyond the general warranty period, for all work and equipment as specified or as otherwise supplied and installed, from manufacturers and trades. Warranties, guarantees and bonds shall include: .1 Name and address of project. .2 Warranty commencement date. .3 Duration of warranty. .4 Clear indication of what is being warranted and what remedial action will

be taken under warranties. .5 Signature and seal of Contractor.

List additional material used in project showing name of manufacturer and source of

supply.

Neatly type lists and notes. Use clear drawings, diagrams or manufacturer's literature.

Supply copies of inspection and testing reports, inspection and acceptance certificates, balancing reports, all bound in all three copies of manuals.

Supply Operations and Maintenance manuals, and other required documentation as

specified for Mechanical and Electrical work.

Manuals must bear seal and signature of Contractor.

Maintenance Manuals must be delivered, complete and in one package, to Consultant. The final Certificate for payment will not be issued until ALL documentation has been received, reviewed, and approved, by Consultant.

Due to the high value to the Owner of these manuals, for the purpose of project

administration and calculation of Substantial Performance, the manuals will be assigned a value of $5,000.00 per discipline (architectural / mechanical / electrical).

1.4 SHOP DRAWING MANUAL

Provide one complete set of final approved Shop Drawings, bound separately. Shop

drawings shall be the drawings reviewed and stamped by the consultants. Mark-up shop drawings to indicate corrections and changes made during fabrication and installation.

Provide a complete set of the same documents in digital format also.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Refer to the Index to Shop Drawing Manual included in the Appendix to this Project

Manual. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

Where supply of maintenance materials is specified, deliver items as follows:

.1 Materials in unbroken cartons or, if not supplied in cartons, they shall be strongly packaged.

.2 Clearly mark as to content.

.3 If applicable give colour, room number of area where material used.

.4 Obtain signed receipt from the Owner’s designated representative and store in an assigned, lockable room.

Copies of signed receipts for maintenance materials are to be included in the maintenance manuals.

Replacement materials are for the sole use of the Owner and must not be used by Contractor to replace deficient work.

1.6 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND RECORD DOCUMENTS

Provide As-Built Drawings, as specified in Section 01 33 00, and Record Documents

(electronic files).

Prior to the date of Substantial Performance, request updated drawings from the Consultant. Transfer all “as-built” markups from the on-site drawings to these updated drawings and return them to the Consultant for preparation of architectural Record Drawings.

Record documents shall consist of the original documents altered to reflect all changes and information indicated on as-built documents.

The Consultant shall prepare architectural Record documents and be reimbursed for

costs by the Contractor through the Cash Allowance included in the Contract.

Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Specification Divisions for specific requirements regarding preparation and submission of final mechanical and electrical Record Drawings.

1.7 REVIEW OF MANUALS BY CONSULTANT

Submit all manuals for review by the Consultant. Mechanical and electrical manuals may

be forwarded directly to the consulting engineers for review.

The Contractor is responsible for confirming the completion of the manuals prior to forwarding to the Consultant for review. If any items are outstanding, provide tabs at the





appropriate locations and indicate the nature of the outstanding documents to be inserted.

Do not submit partially complete manuals to the Consultant; only documents which cannot be provided at the time of Substantial Performance are permitted to be flagged for later insertion. The Consultant will review manuals once for completion and will then review only one resubmission. If additional reviews are required, the Contractor will be invoiced for the Consultant’s time at a rate of $90/hour.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 40 00 – DEMOLITION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK

Temporary Barriers and Controls Section 01 56 00 Execution Section 01 73 00 Asbestos Abatement Section 02 00 82

1.2 REFERENCES

Conform to all laws, By-Laws and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and, in particular, the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act; The Environmental Protection Act; The Ontario Building Code, Ontario Regulation 332/12; The Ontario Fire Code; The National Building Code, 2010; and the National Fire Code.

CSA S350-M, code of practice for safety in demolition of structures.

Ontario regulations under the Environmental Protection Act: .1 O.Reg. 102/94 Waste Audits and Waste Reduction Work Plans .2 O.Reg. 103/94 Industrial, Commercial and Institutional Source Separation

Programs .3 O.Reg. 347/90 General - Waste Management; refer to "Definitions"

Ontario regulations under the Occupational Health and Safety Act:

.1 O.Reg. 213/91 Construction Projects

.2 All regulations regarding “Designated Substances”

.3 O.Reg. 860/90 Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)

Conform to “Guidelines for Maintaining Fire Safety During Construction in Existing Buildings”, provided by the Office of the Ontario Fire Marshal.

RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings 1.3 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING SITE AND STRUCTURE

Examine the existing site and building before tendering to be familiar with the detailed

extent of demolition, dismantling, relocation and reassembly required.

Copies of the original working drawings for the construction of the building are available for viewing, in the office of the Consultant, during the tender period.

An inventory of hazardous materials has been conducted for the existing building; a copy of which is included in Project Manual, which contains the supplementary information. Contractor to coordinate removal of asbestos and other hazardous materials, as part of the Contract.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Examine the phasing drawings and include all costs associated with phasing of the work, including after-hours work and remobilization costs.

No allowance will be made for failure to obtain complete information prior to close of

tenders. 1.4 SUMMARY OF WORK

Carry out all alteration and demolition work required to accommodate new work indicated

on drawings. Make good any damage caused by alterations required.

Remove HVAC equipment, electrical fixtures and all other items so noted on drawings as required for the interior renovations, unless otherwise noted.

Unless noted otherwise, building materials resulting from demolition under this contract shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed by the Contractor.

Supply and install temporary dust proof partitions at junctions with work area, as

indicated on the drawings. Dust proof partitions shall be erected outside of library operating hours and shall remain in place until the work is fully commissioned and accepted by the Owner.

1.5 SCHEDULE OF WORK

Safety and required exiting from the existing building must be maintained at all times,

particularly during operating hours and scheduled events. Work must be suspended if the Owner advises that noise and/or dust is interfering with the building operation.

Work which will generate excessive noise must be undertaken outside of the Library’s hours of operation. Library’s published hours of operation are 10:00am to 8:00pm, Monday through Thursday, 10:00am to 5:00pm on Friday and Saturday, and 1:00pm to 5:00pm on Sunday; confirm with Owner.

Dust proof partitions must be installed prior to any work being undertaken.

Refer to drawings for phasing of the work. 1.6 PROTECTION

Protect adjacent properties against damage which might occur from falling debris or other

cause. Make good damage to adjacent public or private properties resulting from Work of this Contract.

Protect existing building from damage and contamination during demolition activities. All openings must be made weatherproof. Provide temporary barriers, dust control measures, security controls, supports, and such additional protection as may be required by specific demolition work.





Hoarding/Dust proof partitions: .1 Hoarding/Dustproof partitions shall be provided at the following locations:

1. At exterior window openings (where windows are demolished) and 2. At corridor doors and frames (where doors and frames are demolished

and 3. To separate the phase one construction work that will begin in May 2018

from the phase two construction work that will not start until July 2018. Once phase two construction work begins, the construction hoarding separating the two phases can be removed. Construction hoarding partitions separating the two phases of work is to be installed to underside of the existing steel roof deck.

4. At any other areas noted on the drawings. .2 Hoarding to be 45 minute fire separations and shall consist of 152mm steel stud

framing, extending to the underside of floor slab above, with 152mm of mineral wool insulation between studs, with one layer of 13mm plywood sheathing covered by 10 mil polyethylene sheet caulked all around the partition, covered by two layers of 16mm Type X gypsum board with offset joints taped and filled.

.3 Where access is required through hoarding partitions (as required between phase one and phase two construction work), provide a solid core wood door or hollow steel door, in steel frame, equipped with self-closing and latching hardware.

Prevent movement, settlement, and damage to existing building to remain, including services, paving, landscaped areas to remain, and adjacent structures. Provide temporary supports, including shoring and bracing, as required. All shoring must be designed by a professional engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario.

Employ licensed rodent and vermin exterminators to destroy all discovered vermin and rodents.

Remove contaminated and dangerous material from the site and dispose of safely and

legally. Meet all M.O.E. requirements.

Take precautions to guard against movement or settlement of adjacent land, existing building, and remaining services and utilities. Provide and place bracing or other means of support.

Take precaution against contamination of air and adjacent properties.

1.7 MAINTAINING FIRE SAFETY IN EXISTING BUILDING

Maintain all required exiting for safe operations within the existing building. Where an exit is closed off due to construction activities, provide alternate exit acceptable to both the Consultant and to Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Any temporary exits must be clearly identified with appropriate signage.

Maintain access roadways for fire department vehicles, acceptable to the fire department. Access must be approved prior to commencement of construction activities.

Store all combustible materials in accordance with the Fire Code and the Occupational Health and Safety Act. Do not store combustible materials within the existing building or





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

against the building. All combustibles shall be stored in a manner which minimizes risks to building and occupants.

Maintain dust proof partitions and protection at openings, as specified above, with fire

separation ratings as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

Maintain fire alarm system in operating condition in existing building. Notify the fire department and Owner of any temporary shutdowns of service and provide alternative measures during such periods of time.

Coordinate with Owner and Authorities Having Jurisdiction for all changes to fire emergency procedures as may be required during construction.

1.8 SERVICES

Seal and cap mechanical and electrical services in order to facilitate removals indicated

on drawings. Mark location and type of service of all capped services at the site. Submit record drawing showing locations and dimensions of all capped services.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

existing

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMING & ACCESSORIES


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES

Canadian Standards Association (CSA International), latest updates at time of tender:

.1 CSA-A23.1-04/A23.2-04, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.

.2 CSA-O86S1-05, Supplement No. 1 to CAN/CSA-O86-01, Engineering Design in Wood.

.3 CSA O121-M1978, Douglas Fir Plywood.

.4 CSA O151-04, Canadian Softwood Plywood.

.5 CSA O153-M1980, Poplar Plywood.

.6 CAN/CSA-O325.0-92, Construction Sheathing.

.7 CSA O437 Series-93 Standards for OSB and Waferboard.

.8 CSA S269.1-1975, Falsework for Construction Purposes.

.9 CAN/CSA-S269.3-M92, Concrete Formwork, National Standard of Canada

Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC), latest updates at time of tender: .1 CAN/ULC-S701-05, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and

Pipe Covering.

The Contractor will be responsible to coordinate all materials and compaction tests and distribution of test reports.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Formwork materials:

.1 For concrete without special architectural features, use wood and wood product formwork materials to CSA-O121 CAN/CSA-O86 CSA O437 Series CSA-O153.

.2 For concrete with special architectural features, use formwork materials to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.3 Rigid insulation board: to CAN/ULC-S701.

Pan forms: removable permanent steel reinforced plastic aluminum as indicated.

Tubular column forms: round, spirally wound laminated fibre forms steel, internally treated with release material.

Form ties:

.1 For concrete not designated 'Architectural', use removable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or adjustable length, free of devices leaving holes larger than 25 mm diameter in concrete surface.

.2 For Architectural concrete, use snap ties complete with plastic cones and light grey concrete plugs.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Form liner: .1 Plywood: high density overlay medium density overlay Douglas Fir to CSA O121

Canadian Softwood Plywood to CSA O151 Poplar to CSA O153 grade, T and G. .2 Waferboard: to CAN/CSA-O325.0.

Form release agent: non-toxic, biodegradable, low VOC.

Form stripping agent: colourless mineral oil, non-toxic, biodegradable, low VOC, ree of

kerosene, with viscosity between 70 and 110s Saybolt Universal 15 to 24 mm2/s at 40 degrees C, flashpoint minimum 150 degrees C, open cup.

Falsework materials: to CSA-S269.1.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION AND ERECTION

Verify lines, levels and centres before proceeding with formwork/falsework and ensure

dimensions agree with drawings.

Obtain Owner’s approval for use of earth forms framing openings not indicated on drawings.

Hand trim sides and bottoms and remove loose earth from earth forms before placing concrete.

Fabricate and erect falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1.

Refer to architectural drawings for concrete members requiring architectural exposed finishes.

Do not place shores and mud sills on frozen ground.

Provide site drainage to prevent washout of soil supporting mud sills and shores.

Fabricate and erect formwork in accordance with CAN/CSA-S269.3 to produce finished concrete conforming to shape, dimensions, locations and levels indicated within tolerances required by CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

Align form joints and make watertight. .1 Keep form joints to minimum.

Locate horizontal form joints for exposed columns 2400mm above finished floor

elevation.

Use 25mm chamfer strips on external corners and/or 25mm fillets at interior corners, joints, unless specified otherwise.





Form chases, slots, openings, drips, recesses, expansion and control joints as indicated.

Construct forms for architectural concrete, and place ties as indicated and as directed. .1 Joint pattern not necessarily based on using standard size panels or maximum

permissible spacing of ties.

Build in anchors, sleeves, and other inserts required to accommodate Work specified in other sections. .1 Ensure that anchors and inserts will not protrude beyond surfaces designated to

receive applied finishes, including painting.

Line forms for following surfaces: .1 Outer face of outside girders beams and vertical edge of bridge sidewalk slab. .2 Soffit of girders and underside of bridge decks if exposed. .3 Exposed faces of abutments, wingwalls, piers and pylons: do not stagger joints of

form lining material and align joints to obtain uniform pattern. .4 Secure lining taut to formwork to prevent folds. .5 Pull down lining over edges of formwork panels. .6 Ensure lining is new and not reused material. .7 Ensure lining is dry and free of oil when concrete is poured. .8 Application of form release agents on formwork surface is prohibited where

drainage lining is used. .9 If concrete surfaces require cleaning after form removal, use only pressurized

water stream so as not to alter concrete's smooth finish. .10 Cost of textile lining is included in price of concrete for corresponding portion of

Work.

Clean formwork in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2, before placing concrete.

When slip forming and flying forms are used, submit details as indicated in PART 1.2 - SUBMITTALS.

3.2 REMOVAL AND RESHORING

Leave formwork in place until testing Agency approves removal of formwork.

Provide necessary reshoring of members where early removal of forms may be required or where members may be subjected to additional loads during construction as required.

Space reshoring in each principal direction at not more than 3000mm apart.

Re-use formwork and falsework subject to requirements of CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

END OF SECTION



03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCING



American Concrete Institute (ACI), latest updates at time of tender:

.1 SP-66-04, ACI Detailing Manual .1 ACI 315-99, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. .2 ACI 315R-04, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for

Reinforced Concrete Structures.

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM), latest updates at time of tender: .1 ASTM A143/A143M-03, Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against

Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement.

.2 ASTM A185/A185M-05a, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.

.3 ASTM A497/A497M-05a, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete.

.4 ASTM A775/A775M-04a, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.

Canadian Standards Association (CSA International), latest updates at time of tender:

.1 CSA-A23.1-04/A23.2-04, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.

.2 CSA-A23.3-04, Design of Concrete Structures.

.3 CAN/CSA-G30.18-M92, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, A National Standard of Canada.

.4 CSA-G40.20/G40.21-04, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.

.5 CAN/CSA-G164-M92, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles, A National Standard of Canada.

.6 CSA W186-M1990, Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada (RSIC), latest update at time of tender: .1 RSIC, Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Reinforcing steel: billet steel, grade 300 350 400, deformed bars to CAN/CSA-G30.18,

unless indicated otherwise ON DETAILS.

Reinforcing steel: weldable low alloy steel deformed bars to CAN/CSA-G30.18.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Cold-drawn annealed steel wire ties: to ASTM A497/A497M.

Deformed steel wire for concrete reinforcement: to ASTM A497/A497M.

Welded steel wire fabric: to ASTM A185/A185M. .1 Provide in flat sheets only.

Welded deformed steel wire fabric: to ASTM A497/A497M.

.1 Provide in flat sheets only.

Epoxy Coating of non-prestressed reinforcement: to ASTM A775/A775M.

Galvanizing of non-prestressed reinforcement: to CAN/CSA-G164, minimum zinc coating 610g/m². .1 Protect galvanized reinforcing steel with chromate treatment to prevent reaction

with Portland cement paste. .2 If chromate treatment is carried out immediately after galvanizing, soak steel in

aqueous solution containing minimum 0.2% by weight sodium dichromate or 0.2% chromic acid. .1 Temperature of solution equal to or greater than 32 degrees and

galvanized steels immersed for minimum 20 seconds. .3 If galvanized steels are at ambient temperature, add sulphuric acid as bonding

agent at concentration of 0.5% to 1%. .1 In this case, no restriction applies to temperature of solution.

.4 Chromate solution sold for this purpose may replace solution described above, provided it is of equivalent effectiveness. .1 Provide product description as described in PART 1 – SUBMITTALS

Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

Mechanical splices: subject to approval of Owner.

Plain round bars: to CSA-G40.20/G40.21.

2.2 FABRICATION

Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2 ACI 315 and Reinforcing

Steel Manual of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada. .1 ACI 315R unless indicated otherwise.

Obtain Consultant's/Town’s approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than

those shown on placing drawings.

Upon approval of Owner, weld reinforcement in accordance with CSA W186.

Ship bundles of bar reinforcement, clearly identified in accordance with bar bending details and lists. .1 Ship epoxy coated bars in accordance with ASTM A775A/A775M.





2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Upon request, provide Owner with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel,

showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum four (4) weeks prior to beginning reinforcing work.

Upon request, inform Owner of proposed source of material to be supplied. PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Galvanizing to include chromate treatment.

.1 Duration of treatment to be 1 hour per 25 mm of bar diameter.

Conduct bending tests to verify galvanized bar fragility in accordance with ASTM A143/A143M.

3.2 FIELD BENDING

Do not field bend or field weld reinforcement except where indicated or authorized by Owner.

When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying slow and steady pressure.

Replace bars, which develop cracks or splits. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

Place reinforcing steel as indicated on placing drawings and in accordance with CSA-

A23.1/A23.2.

Use plain round bars as slip dowels in concrete. .1 Paint portion of dowel intended to move within hardened concrete with one coat

of asphalt paint. .2 When paint is dry, apply thick even film of mineral lubricating grease.

Prior to placing concrete, obtain Owner’s approval of reinforcing material and placement.

Ensure cover to reinforcement is maintained during concrete pour.

Protect epoxy and paint coated portions of bars with covering during transportation and

handling.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

3.4 FIELD TOUCH-UP

Touch up damaged and cut ends of epoxy coated or galvanized reinforcing steel with compatible finish to provide continuous coating.

END OF SECTION



03 30 00 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing

1.2 REFERENCES

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM), latest updates at time

of tender: .1 ASTM A185-05, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,

Plain, for Concrete. .2 ASTM D260-86, Standard Specification for Boiled Linseed Oil. .3 ASTM D1751-04, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB), latest update at time of tender: .1 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound.

Canadian Standards Association (CSA International), latest updates at time of tender: .1 CSA-A23.1/A23.2, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CAN/CSA-A3000-03, Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001,

A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005). .1 CSA-A3001-03, Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete.

.3 CAN/CSA-G30.18-M92, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

In accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2, and as described in Mixes of PART 2 - PRODUCTS.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Concrete hauling time: maximum allowable time limit for concrete to be delivered to site

of Work and discharged not to exceed 120 minutes after batching. .1 Modifications to maximum time limit must be agreed to by the Owner and

concrete producer as described in CSA A23.1/A23.2. .2 Deviations to be submitted for review by the Owner.

Concrete delivery: ensure continuous concrete delivery from plant meets CSA A23.1/A23.2.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3001, Type GU.

Blended hydraulic cement: Type GUb GU to CAN/CSA-A3001.

Supplementary cementing materials: with minimum 20% Type F CI CH fly ash

replacement N GGBFS, by mass of total cementitious materials to CAN/CSA A3001.

Water: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

Reinforcing bars: to CAN/CSA-G30.18, Grade 400.

Welded steel wire fabric: to ASTM A185.

Premoulded joint filler: .1 Bituminous impregnated fibreboard: to ASTM D1751.

Joint sealer/filler: grey to CAN/CGSB-19.24, Type 1, Class B.

Sealer: boiled linseed oil to ASTM D260, mixed with mineral spirits 1:1 proprietary poly-siloxane resin blend. Other concrete materials: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2. Concrete compressive strength 32 MPa @28 days 5%-8% air entrained, or as otherwise indicated on drawings.

2.2 MIXES

To meet performance criteria in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

Ensure concrete supplier meets performance criteria as indicated on drawings. Provide the following prior to commencing work: .1 Concrete supplier's certification. .2 Provide quality management plan to ensure verification of concrete quality to

specified performance. PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Provide Owner 24 hours notice before each concrete pour.





Place concrete reinforcing in accordance with Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

During concreting operations:

.1 Development of cold joints not allowed.

.2 Ensure concrete delivery and handling facilitates placing with minimum of re- handling, and without damage to existing structure or Work.

Protect previous Work from staining. Clean and remove stains prior to application of concrete finishes.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION

Perform cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

3.3 INSERTS

Cast in sleeves, ties, slots, anchors, reinforcement, frames, conduit, bolts, waterstops,

joint fillers and other inserts required to be built-in. .1 Sleeves and openings must be reviewed by Owner.

3.4 FINISHES

Pads, walks and curbs:

.1 Screed to plane surfaces and use aluminum magnesium wood floats.

.2 Provide round edges and joint spacings using standard tools.

.3 Trowel smooth to provide lightly brushed non-slip finish.

3.5 CONTROL JOINTS

Cut and form control joints in slabs on grade at locations indicated, in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

3.6 EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS

Install premoulded joint filler in expansion and isolation joints full depth of slab flush with finished surface to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

3.7 CURING

Use curing compounds compatible with applied finish on concrete surfaces free of bonding agents and in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

3.8 SITE TOLERANCES

Concrete floor slab finishing tolerance in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Concrete testing: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2 by Independent Testing Agency.

3.10 VERIFICATION

Quality Control Plan: ensure concrete supplier meets performance criteria of concrete as established in PART 2 – PRODUCTS and provide verification of compliance as described in PART 1.5 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.

3.11 CLEANING

Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses.

Designate cleaning area for tools to limit water use and runoff.

Cleaning of concrete equipment to be done in accordance with Section 013543- Environmental Procedures.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

04 05 13 – MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT


1.1 RELATED WORK

Concrete Unit Masonry Section 04 22 00 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Section 04 05 19

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

CAN/CSA A179 Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry CAN/CSA A371 Masonry Construction for Buildings CSA A3000 Cementitious Materials Compendium ASTM C 780 Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. ASTM C 1357 Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Arrange for representative of mortar manufacturer to meet with mason on site prior to

commencement of masonry work, to review proper mixing procedures of mortar. Mixing must conform to instructions from supplier of pre-mixed mortar materials.

Submit test data as specified below.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Submit three (3) copies of performance data sheet for mortar mixtures. Indicate related standards and mortar properties in terms of compressive strength, water retention and air content. Provide all test certificates required for mortar mixture lots delivered to site.

1.5 WARRANTY

Mason shall warrant that only mortar containing integral water-repellent mortar admixture, added at the manufacturer’s recommended rate, has been placed in exterior concrete masonry walls.

1.6 TESTING

Testing of mortar materials will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by Consultant.

Pay for tests from Cash Allowance, Section 01 10 00.

Submit samples of sand and water for testing to ensure that mortar will not produce efflorescence.

Test for compliance with the performance requirements for integral mortar water-repellence. Mortar shall be capable of achieving a Class E Rating when evaluated using




INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO WHITE OAKS

LIBRARY

ASTM E 514 with the test extended to 72 hours, using the rating criteria specified in ASTM E 514.

Perform compressive strength tests on all mortar and grout in accordance with the requirements of CSA S304.1. Compressive strengths must conform to the property specifications of CSA-A179.

Perform tests for flexural bond strength of masonry in accordance CSA S304.1. Flexural

bond strengths shall not be less than 0.20MPa, in conformance with CSA-A179. PART 2 – MATERIAL

2.1 MANUFACTURER

Sand: fine grain aggregate, graded in accordance with CSA A179 Water: potable, free off ice and any contaminants, to CSA A179. Portland cement: to CAN/CSA-A5 normal Type 10 Hydrated lime: type ‘S’, in accordance with ASTM C207

2.2 MORTER

Mortar:

.1 Betomix Plus by Daubois or bulk preblended silo mix as supplied by Max-Mix, or

equal approved by Consultant. Colourants to be premixed with mortar materials. Colour to be selected by Consultant.

Mortars for concrete unit masonry to be Portland cement/ hydrated lime/ sand mortars to the property standards of CSA A179.

Mortar for masonry partitions to be Type ‘S’ as per property specifications of CSA A179.

Mortar for non-load bearing walls and partitions to be Type ‘N’ as per property specifications of CSA A179, unless indicated otherwise on the Structural Drawings.

Compressive strengths of mortars shall conform to the values indicated on Tables 8 and

9, for solid brick and concrete block respectively, of CSA Standard A179. Compressive strength of mortars must not exceed the compressive strength of the masonry units with which they are being used.

2.3 GROUT

Grout: .1 Coarse grout to CSA A179, with maximum aggregate size of 12.5mm. .2 Use fine grout where least dimension of void is less than 50mm. .3 All grout to CSA A179, with sufficient water to produce pouring consistency

without segregation of ingredients, but to retain cohesiveness.





.4 Slump is to be 200mm to 250mm. Minimum compressive strength is to be 20 Mpa. Refer to structural drawings for additional grout requirements at reinforcing steel.

2.4 SOURCES

Use same manufactured brands and sources of mortar materials for entire project, in

order to ensure uniformity of mix and coloration.

2.5 PARGING

Cement mortar parging: 1 part cement, 1 part lime to 6 parts sand by volume with sufficient water for a trowelable mix.


3.1 MIXING OF MORTARS

Mason to review mixing procedures with mortar manufacturer.

Mix mortar thoroughly, in quantities only as needed for immediate use.

Mix mortar in mechanical mixer operated until homogeneously blended, but not less than

3 minutes after all materials are in mixer.

Obtain manufacturer’s approval for any additives.

END OF SECTION



04 05 19 – MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCEMENT



Concrete Unit Masonry Section 04 22 00 Masonry Mortar and Grout Section 04 05 13

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit product data sheets for all reinforcement types proposed for use in this project, in accordance with Section 01 33 23.

Include a copy of the data sheets in the shop drawing manual at the conclusion of the project.

Submit samples of anchors, ties, and fasteners for approval of Consultant.

PART 2 – MATERIAL 2.1 MATERIALS

Reinforcing bars: to CSA G30.18, Grade 400.

Masonry Reinforcement:

.1 This Specification is based on products manufactured by Blok-Lok Limited. Products listed by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. and Wire-Bond are approved equivalents.

.2 Size: Wall thickness less 50mm.

.3 Weight: .1 Standard Ladder type reinforcement shall be extra heavy duty, with

4.8mm side wires and 3.8mm (9 ga) cross wires, welded. .2 Ladder type reinforcement shall be super heavy duty where noted below

or on drawings, with both side and cross wires 4.8mm thick, welded. .3 Truss type reinforcement shall be super heavy duty, with both side wires

and cross wires 4.8mm thick, welded.

.4 Finish: .1 Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A153-B2 and CSA

G164, minimum 1.5 oz/sq. ft. .2 Provide stainless steel where indicated below, or on drawings.

.5 Type: For multi-wythe solid walls above & below grade:

.1 Blok-Lok Cavity-Lok BL12, extra heavy duty, 4 wire; H&B #240; or Wire-Bond Series 200 Ladder 4 Wire.





WHITE OAKS

Wall Ties:

.1 Masonry to Masonry: .1 Corrugated Wall Ties of 1.2 mm (18 ga.) galvanized steel, 22mm wide,

by length required for the application. .2 Length to be long enough to embed minimum 75 mm into each bearing

or to fit dovetail anchor slots, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

.2 Masonry to Structural Steel: .1 Blok-Lok Flex-O-Lok BLT9, sized to suit wall thickness less 50mm, with

continuous weld-on anchors Flex-O-Lok, type A; H&B VEE-Byna Tie with 359 weld-on ties; or Wire-Bond Triangular Tie 1100 with Type 1 Weld-On Anchor.

.2 Blok-Lok Flex-O-Lok BLT-9, with continuous weld-on anchors, sized to suit wall thickness less 50mm. Anchors to be Flex-O-Lok, type A, stainless steel. H&B VBT ties with 359C weld-on anchors, and Wire-Bond 1100 Series triangular ties 1000c weld-on anchors are also acceptable.

.3 Ties minimum to be minimum 4.76mm stainless steel wire. Weld-on anchors to be minimum 6.35mm diameter stainless steel wire.

.3 Dovetail anchor slots and ties: Hot dipped galvanized anchor slots with minimum 9 gauge hot dipped galvanized ties.

For Securing Insulation: Wedge-Lok by Blok-Lok


3.1 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCEMENT

Refer to Section 04 22 00 for installation of masonry anchorage and reinforcement.

Note that “solid wall” describes a masonry wall consisting of 1 or more wythes of brick and/or block (which may be solid or hollow core) with mortar joint only between wythes - no air space.

Install reinforcement as indicated above for the materials specified, in conformance with

structural drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.

For single wythe interior masonry walls, truss type reinforcing is required at every second course for walls 190mm wide or less, and ladder type reinforcing is required at each course at walls wider than 190mm.

Install ties in accordance with Ontario Building Code.

Pre-drill for anchors using appropriate type and size of bit. Provide two anchors per tie

with minimum embedment of 25mm. Conform to manufacturers specifications.





Test at least two anchors to failure. Test must be carried out by a Professional Engineer

and must certify tension load test to anchor failure. Cost of test will be paid from Cash Allowance included in the Contract.

END OF SECTION



04 05 22 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY



Masonry Mortar and Grout Section 04 05 13 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement Section 04 05 19


.1 CAN/CSA-A165 Series CSA Standards for Concrete Masonry Units .2 CAN/CSA-S304.1 Design of Masonry Structures .3 CAN/CSA-A371 Masonry construction for Buildings .4 CAN/CSA-A370 .5 National Concrete Masonry Association

1. NCMA TEK 10-2C Control Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls - Empirical Method 2. NCMA TEK-3A Control and Removal of Efflorescence 3. NCMA TEK-3A Cleaning Concrete Masonry

1.3 PROTECTION

Protect adjacent surfaces from marking or damage due to masonry work. PART 2 – MATERIAL 2.1 MATERIALS

Concrete blocks:

.1 to CAN/CSA-A165 Series, metric modular, Type H/15/A/M in concealed spaces, and H/15/D/M lightweight for exposed walls.

.2 Provide block of higher compressive strength where indicated on structural drawings.

.3 Blocks for fire rated partitions to have required percentage of solid material necessary to provide rating.

.4 Sizes as indicated on drawings.

Curing of lightweight block: .1 Autoclave or low pressure steam curing is acceptable, provided that masonry

units comply with linear shrinkage and moisture content requirements of CSA A165.1 for type M units at time of delivery to site.

.2 Age all units, prior to delivery to site, as follows: .1 Autoclaved units: minimum 7 days. .2 Low pressure steam cured units: minimum 28 days

Metal Anchors: Conforming to Ontario Building Code and Section 04 05 19.





WHITE OAKS

Control Joint Filler: Blok-Lok “Exp-Joint”, closed cell neoprene expansion joint material.

2.2 EXPOSED MASONRY FACES

Notwithstanding visual inspection requirements of CSA standards, masonry units shall be free of surface indentations, surface cracks due to manufacture, or chipping. Units so delivered shall be culled from use for exposed purposes, but may be used where concealed.

Concrete masonry units exposed both sides, such as at interior partitions walls, must be visibly uniform in width, so that both faces of the wall are smooth, with all block faces in plane. Total variation in width must not exceed 2mm. Mason shall reject blocks which do not conform to this size requirement.


3.1 WORKMANSHIP

Build masonry work true-to-line, plumb, square and level, with vertical joints in proper alignment.

Assume complete responsibility for dimensions, plumbs and levels of this work and constantly check same with graduated rod.

Masonry courses to be of uniform height, and both vertical and horizontal joints to be of equal and uniform thickness.

Extend non-loadbearing partitions to underside of existing masonry wall opening above.

Carry wall up in uniform manner, no one portion being raised more than 1200mm above

another at any time. Build no more than 1500mm of wall measured vertically in any one day.

Buttering corners of units, throwing mortar into joints, deep or excessive furrowing of bed

joints not permitted. Do not shift or tap units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustments must be made after mortar has started to set, remove mortar and replace with fresh supply.

Where new masonry abuts old or fully set masonry, clean existing surfaces and dampen

if necessary to obtain bond.

Evidence of noncompliance with Contract Documents including the following will require replacement and/or repair: .1 Shrinking .2 Curling .3 Spalling





.4 Poor colour blend .5 Poor texture blend .6 Discolouration of mortar .7 Chipping

3.2 BLOCKWORK

Lay concrete block in running bond, except as noted on Drawings, with thicker end of face shell upward. Standard coursing to be modular 200mm for one block and one joint.

Use lightweight concrete blocks for exposed interior surfaces of walls and partitions. Regular concrete blocks may be used for concealed surfaces.

Concrete masonry units shall have face shells and their end joints fully filled with mortar, and joints squeezed tight. Also fill webs at cores, to be reinforced and grouted, and strike flush at core taking care to prevent mortar from falling into core.

Tie intersecting non-bearing walls together with masonry reinforcing every second

course.

Do not tie intersecting bearing walls together in masonry bond, except at corners.

Exercise special care laying up concrete block in locations where plastic wall coating finish is indicated. Block walls in these locations shall be plumb with joints tooled, concave.

Where resilient base is indicated, tool the joints to within 100mm of the floor. Cut joints

flush behind the base.

3.3 MORTAR AND POINTING

Mortar is specified in Section 04 05 13.

Make all joints uniform in thickness, straight, in line, with mortar compressed to form concave joints.

Strike joints flush where walls are to receive insulation, ceramic tile, or similar finishes. Point faced blockwork by filling holes and cracks in exposed mortar joints. Cut out

defective joints, refill solidly with mortar and tool to form neat concave joint.

3.4 BEARING POINTS

Fill concrete block solid with 20 MPa concrete grout at the following locations: .1 for two courses below bearing points of structural members; .2 behind wall-hung mechanical fixtures; .3 and elsewhere as indicated on drawings.





WHITE OAKS

Install building paper over wire mesh reinforcing in the beds below solid block section.

Use 100% solid concrete blocks where indicated.

3.5 CONTROL JOINTS

Provide continuous vertical control joints in concrete block and brick partitions and walls at locations indicated, and at maximum 4.0m o.c. Control joints may be at 6.0m o.c. for autoclaved block only.

Control joints are required at changes in wall height, at pilasters and changes in wall thickness, at movement joints in foundations and floors and roofs, at one side of door or window openings under 1.8m wide, on both sides of openings over 1.8m wide, and adjacent to corners.

Confirm all control joint locations with the Consultant prior to wall construction. Provide drawings marked up to show locations of all control joints.

Form control joints as detailed. Stop masonry reinforcing each side of joints; except

where structural reinforcing is required, such as at bond beams.

Provide bond breaker at each control joint, of building paper or black polyethylene. Continue bond breaker over lintels at openings.

3.6 HORIZONTAL REINFORCING

Cavity wall and concrete block walls shall be continuously reinforced and tied together

with horizontal masonry reinforcing in every second block bed joint. Additionally, place masonry reinforcing in first and second bed joints above and below

openings. Reinforcing in first bed joint shall be continuous. Second bed joint reinforcing shall extend 600 mm beyond each side of opening.

Place continuous reinforcing in second bed joint below top of wall.

Lap reinforcement minimum of 150mm at splices. Supply & install prefabricated sections at corners and intersection of walls to insure continuity of reinforcing.

3.7 REINFORCED MASONRY WALLS

Construct reinforced masonry walls to conform to the requirements of the Ontario

Building Code and CSA-A371, and as indicated on Structural drawings.

Lay units so as to maintain an unobstructed vertical continuity in the cells. All walls and cross webs shall be fully bedded. No over-hanging mortar or debris shall be allowed inside the reinforced cells unless otherwise on the drawings.

Vertical reinforcing shall be provided full length without splicing. It may be installed after

the first 1200mm of masonry is erected. Locate rods accurately in the cells as shown on





the Drawings. Hold in position top and bottom. Fill cells containing reinforcement solidly with 20 MPa concrete grout, unless noted otherwise on Structural drawings. Consolidate by puddling when placing and again reconsolidate before plasticity is lost. Place concrete grout in lifts not exceeding 1200mm. Stop each lift 38mm below the top of a masonry unit.

Refer to Architectural drawings for locations and grout strength.

3.8 CUTTING MASONRY

Cutting of masonry units exposed in finished work shall be done with approved type

power saw. Where electrical conduit outlet or switch boxes occur, grind and cut units before services installed. Quick saw not permitted for cutting block above grade.

Obtain Consultants approval before cutting any part or area which may impair appearance or strength of work.

Patching of masonry not permitted without Consultants approval.

3.9 CLEANING

On completion, remove excess mortar and smears using wood paddles or scrapers.

Point or replace defective mortar to match existing, as required or directed.

Clean concrete masonry walls exposed in the finished work in accordance with

manufacture’s recommendations and NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-4A.

Remove dirt and stains from masonry walls exposed in the finished work in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-2A.

Remove efflorescence from masonry walls exposed in the finished work in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and NCMA TEK Bulletin #8-3A.

Repeat cleaning operations until work is satisfactory.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 – ROUGH CARPENTRY


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK

1. Plastic Laminate Work Section 06 41 19 2. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13 3. Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 4. Painting and Coating Section 09 90 00 5. Electrical Division 26, 27, 28

1.2 REFERENCES 1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Do not deliver materials until they are required for incorporation into the work.

Protect materials, under weatherproof cover, both in transit and on site.

All interior finish materials shall, upon delivery, be neatly stored in a dry place and shall

be protected from damage due to weather, water, or any other cause. 1.4 PROTECTION

Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture.

Protect countertops and cabinets with 6 mm plywood or other suitable sheet material.

Protect installed hardware from damage and blemishes.

PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.1 MATERIALS

Wood materials: straight, sawn square, true, dressed four sides, properly sized and

shaped to correct dimensions from nominal sizes indicated or specified.

1. CAN/CSA O80-Series Standards for Wood Preservation 2. CSA O121 Douglas Fir Plywood 3. CSA O141 Softwood Lumber 4. CSA O151 Canadian Softwood Plywood 5. CSA B111 Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples. 6. National Lumber Grading Authority (NGLA), Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Lumber grade and moisture content: .1 Comply with the official grading rules of NLGA for the particular lumber and

grade, and structurally complying with the latest requirements of the Ontario Building Code.

.2 Comply with CSA Standard O141 Softwood Lumber. Use only grade marked lumber.

All wood materials: .1 Well-seasoned NLGA, free from defects which impair strength and durability. .2 Moisture content limit:

.1 S-GRN: Unseasoned

.2 S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content

.3 KD: Maximum 15% moisture content

Blocking: .1 NLGA No. 2 Ontario White Pine, No. 2 Red Pine, all complying with the grading

rules of the NLGA for Construction, .2 Douglas Fir dense complying with COFI standard grading and dressing rules.

Douglas Fir plywood:

.1 comply with CSA Standard O121, COFI Exterior.

.2 Western softwood plywood - comply with CSA Standard O151, COFI Waterproof glue WSP. Exposed two sides shall be grade G2S, and exposed one side shall be grade G1S.

Fire Retardant Treatment: To ULC S102; flame spread rating 25 or less.

Rough hardware: .1 Nails, screws, bolts, lag screws anchors, special fastening devices and supports

as required for the erection of all carpentry items. .2 For preservative treated wood, use only stainless steel hardware, with the

following exception: .1 where galvanized steel items, such as gates, flashings, etc., are being

attached to wood, galvanized steel fasteners shall be used. .3 Do not mix stainless steel with galvanized steel; contact of these dissimilar

metals can cause galvanic corrosion. .4 Stainless steel hardware to be type 317. .5 Galvanized hardware must be hot-dipped galvanized as follows:

.1 fasteners meeting CAN/CSA-G164 minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2 (ASTMA153 Class A or B1 G 185)

.2 connectors meeting CAN/CSA-G164 minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2 (ASTM A653 Class G-185 sheet) or better.

.3 Electroplated galvanized hardware is not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION





Examine surfaces to receive the work of this Section and proceed only when conditions are satisfactory for a proper installation.

Lay out work carefully and to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately cut and fit; erect in proper position true to dimensions; align, level, square, plumb, adequately brace, and secure permanently in place. Join work only over solid backing.

3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL

Provide running members of the longest lengths obtainable.

Slowly feed machine-dressed members using sharp cutters. Provide finished members free from drag, feathers, slivers or roughness of any kind. Remove machine marks by sanding.

Machine sand surfaces exposed in the finished work and hand sand to an even smooth surface free of scratches.

Properly frame material with tight joints and rigidly secure in place. Use glue-blocks were

necessary.

Design construction methods for expansion and contraction of the materials.

Conceal joints and connections wherever possible. Locate prominent joints only where directed.

Match joints made on the site with joints made in the shop.

Unless otherwise specified glue and blind screw or nail all work. Set and fill and plug surface screws using matching wood plugs.

Accurately scribe, cope and mitre members where required to produce hairline joints.

Erect work plumb, level, square and to the required lines.

Do not regard blocking, strapping and other rough carpentry indicated as complete or

exact. Provide rough carpentry items required for the installation of the Work of other Sections.

Aluminum must not be in direct contact with pressure treated wood. Provide minimum

6mm spacing between aluminum products and treated wood, with10mil polyethylene barrier and polyethylene or nylon spacers.

3.3 INSTALLATION - ROUGH CARPENTRY

1. Blocking: Fasten wood nailers, blocking, bucks, grounds curbs, copings

and strapping solidly to supporting materials in true planes so that they will remain straight and not be loosened by work of other Trades.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

2. Framing: Do all wood framing in accordance with the Ontario Building Code -latest version, and to CAN 3 086 as applicable.

3.4 INSTALLATION - ELECTRIC AND TELEPHONE BACKBOARDS

Supply and install 19mm thick backboards of fir plywood, fire retardant, pressure treated,

solid, good 2 sides, sanded both sides, in electrical and telephone rooms to sizes required by equipment.

Before installation, all backboards are to be prime painted, both sides. Painting to be in conformance to Specification Section 09 90 00.

Fasten to wall using fasteners and spacing suitable to wall type to provide secure, sturdy installation which will carry equipment load without damaging wall. Confirm heights and locations required with electrical Subcontractor.

Painting shall be done in accordance with Section 09 90 00

END OF SECTION



06 20 00 – FINISH CARPENTRY


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

All finished wood items and trim, other than custom cabinetry, shown on drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK

1. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 2. Architectural Wood Casework Section 06 41 13 3. Plastic Laminate Work Section 06 41 19 4. Painting and Coating Section 09 90 00

1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Protect materials against high humidity and moisture at all times.


Wood materials - straight, sawn square, true, dressed four sides, properly sized and shaped to correct dimensions from nominal sizes indicated or specified.

Lumber grade and moisture content - comply with the official grading rules of NLGA for the particular lumber and grade, and structurally complying with the latest requirements of the Ontario Building Code. Comply with CSA Standard 0141 Softwood Lumber. Use only grade marked lumber.

All wood materials unless noted otherwise - well seasoned NLGA, free from defects which

impair strength and durability. Moisture content limit: S-GRN: Unseasoned; S-DRY: Maximum 19% moisture content: KD: Maximum 15% moisture content.

Hardwood Lumber:

.1 Select white hard maple moisture content of 7% or in accordance with: .1 National Hardwood Lumber Association NHLA

.2 AWI / AWMAC custom grade moisture content as specified.

Douglas Fir plywood - comply with CSA Standard 0121, COFI Exterior. Exposed two sides shall be grade G2S, and exposed one side shall be grade G1S

Canadian Softwood Plywood - comply with CSA Standard 0151, COFI Waterproof glue WSP. Exposed two sides shall be grade S2S, and exposed one side shall be grade S1S.



06 20 00 – FINISH CARPENTRY


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Hardwood plywood - conforming to CSA 0115 and AWMAC. Face veneer: plain sliced,

bookmathed, select white hard maple. Core as specified.

FASTENERS: .1 Wood screws: electroplated, to CSA-B35.4 .2 Nails and Staples: to CSA-B111

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Examine surfaces to receive the work of this Section and proceed only when conditions are satisfactory for a proper installation.


Provide running members of the longest lengths obtainable.

Slowly feed machine-dressed members using sharp cutters. Provide finished members free from drag, feathers, slivers or roughness of any kind. Remove machine marks by sanding.

Machine sand surfaces exposed in the finished work and hand sand to an even smooth surface free of scratches.

Properly frame material with tight joints and rigidly secure in place. Use glue-blocks where necessary.

Design construction methods for expansion and contraction of the materials.

Conceal joints and connections wherever possible. Locate prominent joints only where

directed.

Match joints made on the site with joints made in the shop.

Unless otherwise specified glue and blind screw or nail all work. Set and fill and plug surface screws using matching wood plugs.

Accurately scribe, cope and mitre members where required to produce hairline joints.

Erect work plumb, level, square and to the required lines.

END OF SECTION



06 41 13 - ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

Provide all casework indicated on drawings. Casework shall have plastic laminate finish except where noted otherwise.

1.2 RELATED WORK 1. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 2. Plastic Laminate Work Section 06 41 19 3. Solid Surface Fabrications Section 06 61 16 4. Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 5. Glazing Section 08 80 00 6. Resilient Base Section 09 65 00 7. Painting and Coating Section 09 90 00 8. Electrical Work Division 26, 27, 28

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 All Work to conform to minimum standard for premium Grade Work as specified in Quality Standards for Architectural Woodwork prepared by Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada.

1.4 INTENT

The intent of this Section is that the casework shall be manufactured and finished at the plant, delivered to the Site and immediately installed by this Section including provision of necessary strapping, backings, bearers, rough hardware and finish hardware. Touch up finish immediately prior to completion of the Work and leave in perfect condition.

It is also the intent of this Section that all casework be manufactured with low or no VOC products, to minimize VOC emissions in the finished products.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Submit Shop Drawings of all finish carpentry and in accordance with Section 01 30 00.

Draw Shop Drawings in related and/or dimensional positions with sections. Scale minimum 1:10.

Shop Drawings shall show fabrication details, materials, jointing, description of anchorage and hardware. Dimensions shall be based on actual measurements taken at the Site.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Provide details and dimensions for all fittings and the like for mechanical and electrical connections to this work.

Submit product data for all finishes.

Submit samples of materials, construction method and finishes for Consultant's approval. The colour of stain shall be selected by the Consultant; submit prepared 300mm x 300mm finished samples for approval.

Submit samples of all hardware.

Submit one full size sample of proposed units of Type selected by Consultant prior to proceeding with the remainder of cabinet work.

1.6 CO-OPERATION

Co-operate with other Sections and do all cutting, fitting and making good of own work for all Sections as may be necessary to carry out the true intent of the Drawings and Specifications. Examine the work and materials installed by others insofar as it affects this Work, and report to Consultant any such work not done properly.

1.7 MEASUREMENTS

Take necessary measurements at the Building of spaces and conditions to which work must conform or through which access is required. Take such measurements prior to fabrication of the Work of this Section and in ample time to avoid delays in the Work.


Do not deliver finished material during rain or damp weather or until "Wet Trades" have completed their work and windows are glazed or covered. Carefully protect from damage of any kind.

1.9 WARRANTY

Provide an extended Warranty to the General Conditions of the Contract to two (2) years from date of Substantial Performance of the Contract.

The warranty shall cover replacing, reworking and/or refinishing to make good defects in architectural woodwork due to faulty workmanship or defective materials, which appear during this two (2) year period. Work showing defects during this period shall be replaced or made good without delay and at no cost to Owner.






1. All wood must be straight and true, dressed 4 sides and conform to details. It must

conform to official grading rules of Canadian Lumberman's Association for quality and moisture content. It must conform to NBC Structural requirements and be grade stamped according to CSA Standards 0140 or 0151. Stained woods and plywoods must be selected for colour and grain uniformity.

2. All materials shall be low VOC products. 3. Softwood Lumber: Conform to CAN/CSA 0141 and National Lumber

Grades Authority requirements. 4. Hardwood Lumber:

Conform to National Hardwood Lumber Association

(NHLA) requirements. Provide stain finish to AWMAC Premium Grade. Select white hard maple moisture content 7% or less in accordance with:

.1 National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) .2 AWI/AWMAC premium grade, moisture content as specified.

5. Hardwood Plywood: Conform to CSA 0115 and AWMAC. Select white hard maple, plain sliced and bookmathed face veneer core as specified. Exposed faces to be natural grade per AWMAC. Interior of cupboard and closet doors to be classified as exposed faces.

6. Canadian Softwood Plywood: Veneer plywood conforming to CSA 0151. 7. Douglas Fir Plywood: Veneer plywood conforming to CSA 0121. 8. Poplar Plywood: Veneer plywood conforming to CSA 0153. 9. Wood Particleboard:

Conform to CAN3-0188.1. fabricated from 100% recycled or recovered wood fibre, containing no added

urea formaldehyde, and certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC). Conform to ANSI A208.1/Grade M-2, with formaldehyde emissions of 0.09 ppm or less. .1 Nu Green 2 Particleboard as manufactured by Uniboard, or equal by

Panolam Industries or Flakeboard. 10. Hardboard: Conform to CGSB 11-GP-3M. 11. Nails and Staples: Conform to CSA B111. 12. Plastic Laminate: Refer to Section 06 41 19 for plastic laminate work. 13. Glue: Waterproof synthetic resinous glue, of approved type

for general carpentry work and thermo-setting type for plastic laminate work, low VOC emitting. Adhesives shall be free of urea formaldehyde. All adhesives to conform to CSA 0112 Series.

14. Typical Wood Finish:

to Master Painters Institute (MPI) system INT 6.3E Polyurethane Varnish over Stain .1 Wood Stain; MPI #90 .2 3 coats Polyurethane Varnish, clear gloss; MPI #86

Materials to be premium quality.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Stain colour to be selected by the Consultant.

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE

The hardware specified herein is to be provided as listed. Any proposed substitutions must be submitted to the Consultant for approval prior to shop drawing submission. Proposed substitutions must be equal or better quality than the specified items and will be considered at the Consultant’s discretion. Hinges must be as specified.

Furnish and install all hardware to custom millwork as follows: Hardware for Display Units: .1 Algood model 2100 medium duty casters, 2 swivel and 2 swivel with DLB brake

per cart; grey soft rubber wheels, 75mm x 30mm wide; 113 kg capacity. .2 Pilaster Strips and Shelf Clips: Knape & Vogt, 255 ZC Steel, Zinc Finish. Hardware for Counters: .1 Continuous piano hinge at cable access tray: stainless steel piano hinge by

Richelieu, flange to suit application, length to be full length of cable tray. Refer to architectural drawings for details.

.2 Recessed pull at cable access tray: Richelieu type 3100-310075160174, 630 finish.

.3 Deadbolt lock: Hafele, type 235.08.358, polished nickel finish. Provide locks at all cable access trays below counters.

Supply and install additional hardware as follows: .1 Aluminum Inserts: Aluminum inserts for slat wall by Uline

(or equivalent). Inserts to be continuous and Cut to suit the length of each slat wall panel.

.2 Cable Grommets: Hafele, two piece, plastic with brush, silver, 80mm

diameter, No. 631.35.214.

.3 Recessed Electrical Power Unit (provided by Electrical Division): Pop-up electrical grommet with one touch latch cover that opens to two

receptacles. Gleinbeigh Mini 2.0, contemporary style in metallic silver finish.

Keying:

.1 All locks in a room to be keyed alike.

.2 Provide 6 extractor keys.

2.3 FABRICATION – GENERAL

Check job dimensions and conditions and notify the Consultant in writing of unacceptable conditions. Do not proceed until remedial instructions are received.





As far as practical, assemble work at the shop and deliver to the job ready for installation.

Leave ample allowance for fitting and scribing on the job.

Fabricate work square and to the required lines. Recess and conceal fasteners and anchor heads. Fill with matching wood plugs. All fixed elements must be glued and screwed or dowelled to ensure rigid construction.

Comply with glue manufacturer's recommendations for lumber moisture content, glue life,

pot life, working life, mixing spreading, assembly time, time under pressure and ambient temperature.

Provide exposed end grain of solid members and edges of exposed plywood and particleboard with matching solid hardwood edging at least 6.4mm thick.

Make all necessary cut-outs in the furniture for electrical switch and outlet boxes and pre-

drill all mounting holes for fittings and outlet boxes. Refer to electrical drawings and specifications.

Provide and install electrical covers, pipe covers, scribing pieces, top, bottom and/or and

closures and filler panels where necessary, including wherever units require furring out or blocking to existing conduits, pipes, etc.

Service cover panels to be provided at all kneehole drawer units, kneehole front rails and

knee drawer table assemblies. End closing panels to be provided at all exposed ends of service strips and island/peninsula assemblies. Front filler panels to be provided where called for on Drawings and as required by field conditions.

Resilient base around all toe spaces where indicated on the drawings is specified in

Section 09 65 00.

2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION

All work shall be factory assembled in modular, unitized construction. Carefully machine with dovetailed mortised and tenoned or blind dado joints. Each unit shall be self supporting and designed to be bolted together with fasteners inside units with plastic plugs over fasteners. All joints to be securely glued. Fabricate units as per Drawings and as specified.

Except where noted otherwise, gables to be 19mm veneered particle board, tongue and grooved to solid framing members. Provide minimum 6.4mm thick solid wood edging at all exposed edges.

Provide top front, top back rails and posts of solid hardwood 19mm x 50mm framing members, tongue and grooved together and dadoed to gables.

Bottom to be 19mm maple veneered particle board.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Refer to detail Drawings.

Shelves - 19mm. minimum hardwood plywood with solid wood edging, front and back.

Sit all adjustable shelves on pilaster clips. Pilasters to be recessed into gables. 2.5 LIBRARY CASEWORK

Casework shall be plastic laminate veneer as indicated on the drawings, and shall be

generally as specified for wood veneer casework. Plastic laminate work shall conform to Section 06 41 19.

All panels and shelving in open shelving units, shall be high pressure laminate. Pattern will be in colour to be selected by the Consultant.

Exposed edges of HPL laminated panels to have matching HPL edges.

All cabinet work shall be factory assembled in modular, unitized construction. Carefully machine with dovetailed mortised and tenoned or blind dado joints. Each unit shall be self-supporting and designed to be bolted together with fasteners inside units with plastic plugs over fasteners. All joints to be securely glued. Fabricate units as per Drawings and as specified.

Gables and panels to be 19mm thick panels, with PVC edging on all exposed edges.

Provide top front, top back rails and posts of solid hardwood 19mm x 50mm framing

members, tongue and grooved together and dadoed to gables.

Cable Access Tray Construction .1 Fronts - 19mm HPL panels with PVC edges on all four sides, secured to front of

drawer box with minimum 5 screw nails. Shelves to be 19mm HPL panels, finished both sides, with HPL edging on all four edges.

Shelving in cabinets with solid doors may be melamine panels, with PVC edging on all four edges.

Sit all adjustable shelves on pilaster clips. Pilasters to be recessed into gables and fastened with screws.

Provide extended top, bottom and exposed gables where furring out of upper cupboards is

required due to pipes, conduits, exhaust ducts, and the like behind to provide a flush face at walls. Extend enclosure to ceiling where necessary to conceal electrical, pipes, etc..

2.6 COUNTERTOPS

Provide and install counter tops and continuous side gables in solid polymer finish as noted on drawings and herein specified. Refer to Section 06 61 16.





2.7 FINISHING - WOOD CASEWORK

Carefully prepare all wood work to receive finish. Thoroughly sand all wood surfaces to remove machine marks and make dust-free before finishing.

Finish all exterior surfaces and interior of exposed cases with one coat of selected stain, one coat of sealer, sanded smooth, and three coats of finish as specified. Apply finish in accordance with best practice; the resultant finish must be of highest quality for furniture use.

Finish unexposed surfaces with two coats of tinted sealer. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Set and place all materials and components in place, rigid, plumb and secure.

Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinets.

Install all shelving, counter tops and sliding doors.

Use draw bolts in countertop joints.

At junction of plastic laminate counter, back splash and adjacent wall finish, apply small

bead of sealant.

Apply water resistant building paper over wood framing members in contact with masonry or cementitious construction.

After installation, fit and adjust operating hardware for doors and shelves.

END OF SECTION



06 41 16 - PLASTIC LAMINATE WORK


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

Provide all plastic laminate work indicated on the drawings. Coordinate with millwork

subtrade.

For counters, refer to solid polymer fabrications, Section 06 61 16.

1.2 RELATED WORK

1. Finish Carpentry Section 06 10 00 2. Architectural Wood Casework Section 06 41 19 3. Solid Surface Fabrications Section 06 61 16 4. Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 5. Electrical Work Division 26, 27, 28

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Refer to Section 01 33 23.

Submit two 300 x 300mm samples of all materials to the Consultant for approval. The samples shall be identified by the project number, date and the name of the contractor the samples shall show colours and details of edging, forming and construction. The materials used in the building shall correspond to the approved samples.

Shop Drawings:

.1 Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices and other components.

.2 Show full-size details, edge details, attachments, etc.

.3 Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement required.

.4 Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for grommets, outlet boxes and other items installed in countertops.

Submit data sheets for particle board, plywood, adhesives, joint sealants, and sealers.

Maintenance Data and Materials: .1 Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning

instructions. Include in project closeout documents. .2 Provide maintenance kit for finishes.

1.4 PROTECTION

Refer to General Instructions Section 01 10 00.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Handle and store countertops in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

Countertop surfaces shall be covered with heavy kraft paper, or tops shall be put in cartons for protection during shipment.

If protective film is provided, do not remove until counters have been installed.

Remove any stickers immediately after installation

Protect installed countertop surfaces with heavy kraft paper secured in position with masking tape. Do not remove until final inspection.

Comply with the printed directions, issued by the material manufacturers. 1.5 WARRANTY

Plastic laminate work shall be warranted against warping or delamination for a period of

two (2) years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Contract.

Work showing defects during the warranty periods shall be replaced or made good without delay and at no expense to the Owner.

PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.1 MATERIALS - PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

Plastic laminate:

.1 Conforming to CAN3-A172; by Formica and Nevamar as indicated below.

.2 1.6mm (.062") thick, general purpose grade for flatwork and 1.25mm (.050") thick standard postforming grade for shaped profiles and bends; finishes to be sued, solid and wood grain colours as later selected by the Consultant from the manufacturers standard range of colours. Balancing sheet shall be the same thickness as surface sheet and shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.

.3 Plastic Laminate selections are as follows: PL1 - Nevamar, Silver Alu Metalx, MXT003T. PL2, PL3, PL4 and PL5 – Colours to be selected by Consultant.

Cores .1 Wood products shall be FSC certified, manufactured with no added urea

formaldehyde. .2 Particle board shall be NuGreen 2 NAUF particle board, as manufactured by

Uniboard, meeting the requirements of ANSI A208.1 Grade M-2. Surface shall be smooth, dense, and free from loose particles, or defects which will telegraph through the laminate.





.3 Plywood core - fir core, poplar faced, 3, 5, or 7 ply, exterior grade veneer plywood, urea-formaldehyde free. Faces and second ply shall be without voids, or fir plywood conforming to CSA 0121, graded solid faces, 3, 5, or 7 ply.

.4 Provide waterproof cores in countertops with sinks and in all other areas where moisture is possible.

Adhesives:

.1 Formulated for use in decorative laminate fabrication and to suit the conditions of

application without failure. .2 Adhesive conforming to CSA 0112 Series, no added urea formaldehyde;

Greenguard Children & Schools certified low emitting products. .3 Adhesive for countertops where sinks will be installed is to be water resistant. .4 Adhesive shall be acceptable to the laminate manufacturer. .5 Plastic Laminate adhesives applied onsite and used within the weatherproofing

system must have a VOC content equal to or less than 20 g/L as per section 01 67 00.

Sealant - approved water-resistant sealer or glue, low VOC.

Draw bolts - mechanical devices of approved manufacture which can be recessed into

the core of decorative laminated panels and used to draw two parts together for permanently tight joints. Fixing clips - 1.6mm. (16 ga.) steel, galvanized (or prime painted), as detailed.

2.2 FINISH SCHEDULES

Refer to room finish schedule and drawings for details of countertop work.

2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATE WORK

All units shall be shop fabricated. Plastic laminate shall be applied to an approved underlayment with a thermosetting adhesive.

Build work plumb, true and square. Arrange adjacent parts of continuous laminate work to match in colour and pattern.

Obtain the governing dimensions before fabricating items which are to accommodate or

abut appliances or equipment.

Veneering of plastic laminate to core material shall be done according to the laminate manufacturer's directions. All veneered work shall be backed with a balancing sheet except where exposed in the finished work, then face veneer to be applied to all exposed surfaces.

Where fabrication is done at the site, laminate and core materials shall be stored in the

work area for not less than 48 hours for preconditioning before bonding together.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Form shaped profiles and bends as detailed, using postforming or bending grade according to manufacturer's recommendations. Core and laminate profiles shall coincide to provide continuous support and bond over the entire surface.

Self Edging.

.1 Straight self edging shall be decorative laminate 1.6mm thick.

.2 Curved self edging shall be postformed material or bending grade.

.3 Chamfer exposed edges of laminate uniformly, at approximately 15mm.

.4 Do not mitre the decorative laminate sheet at edges.

Joints: .1 Locate joints where indicated, where not indicated at approximately 2440 or

3660mm centres also include joints at corners, and changes in superficial area.

.2 Accurately fit decorative laminate together to provide tight, flush, butt joints. Joints in cored. panels shall be made with 6mm blind splines and draw bolts, one draw bolt for widths up to 150mm, two or more draw bolts at maximum 450mm o.c. for widths exceeding 150mm.

.3 Seal the core at joints with sealer. 2.4 CUTOUTS

Provide cutouts as required for inserts, outlet boxes, and other fixtures. Radius the

internal corners, chamfer the edges, and seal the core.

Provide face finish, to match countertop material, at cutouts for under counter cable trays.

2.5 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES AND CONDITIONS

Refer to General Instructions 01 10 00.

Surface and ambient temperatures shall be minimum of 20oC at a relative humidity

between 20 to 80%. PART 3 - EXECUTION


Install all work plumb, true and square, neatly scribed to adjoining surfaces.

Make allowances around periphery and where fixed objects pass through or project into

countertops, to permit normal movement without restriction.





Secure work by concealed means in an approved manner (or as detailed). Fasteners shall not be more than 600mm o.c. and 150mm from edges and ends. Where concealed fastening is not possible use stainless steel trim threaded screws with matching cup washers or other approved means.

Sand or chamfer site cut edges of the laminate free from chips. Radius any internal angle

cuts. Seal core edges.

Isolate decorative laminate panels from direct contact with exterior metal frames.

Upon completion of installation remove identification marks and clean surfaces. Protect as specified in 1.4 above.

At junction of counter back splash and adjacent wall finishes, apply small bead of sealant.

3.2 TRIM

Decorative laminate trim shall be as detailed. Joints shall be kept to the minimum, with

none occurring in lengths under 3000mm. Slightly bevel the laminate edges of joints. Secure trim with adhesive.

END OF SECTION



06 61 16 - SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

Provide solid polymer counters and vertical panels, as detailed on drawings.

1.2 RELATED WORK

1. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 2. Finish Carpentry Section 06 20 00 3. Architectural Casework Section 06 41 13 4. Plastic Laminate Work Section 06 41 19

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Refer to Section 01 33 23.

Submit samples of solid surfacing materials to the Consultant for colour selection. The materials used in the building shall correspond to the approved samples.

Shop Drawings: .1 Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale

details, attachment devices and other components. .2 Show full-size details, edge details, attachments, etc. .3 Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and

reinforcement required. .4 Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for grommets, outlet boxes and

other items installed in solid surface.

Maintenance Data and Materials: .1 Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning

instructions. Include in project closeout documents. .2 Provide maintenance kit for finishes.

1.4 PROTECTION

Refer to General Instructions Section 01 10 00.

Countertop surfaces shall be covered with heavy kraft paper, or tops shall be put in cartons for protection during shipment.

Protect installed countertop with heavy kraft paper secured in position with masking tape. Do not remove until final inspection.

Comply with the printed directions, issued by surface manufacturers.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.5 WARRANTY

Solid surface countertops and gables work shall be warranted against warpage or manufacturing defects for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work. Work showing defects during this period shall be replaced or made good without delay and at no expense to the Owner.


Solid surfacing material shall be cast, nonporous, filled polymer, with through body

colours, Greenguard certified; Corian as manufactured by DuPont. .1 Thickness: 12.7mm .2 Finish: Semi-gloss .3 Edge: as detailed .4 Colours as follows:

SP1 DuPont, Corian, Private Collection, “Stardust”

Joint adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard one- or two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, nonporous joints.

Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard mildew-resistant, FDA-compliant, NSF 51-compliant, ULC or cUL listed silicone sealant in colours matching components.

Conductive tape: Manufacturer’s standard aluminum foil tape, with required thickness, for use with cutouts near heat sources.

Insulating felt tape: Manufacturer’s standard for use with conductive tape in insulating

solid surface material from adjacent heat source.

2.2 SHOP ASSEMBLY

Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s printed instructions and technical bulletins. Provide products in the largest pieces available.

Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joints. Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, 50mm wide.

Provide factory cutouts for cable access holes and grommets, electrical pop-up receptacles and other accessories as indicated on the drawings.

Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.





.1 Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. .2 Smooth edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES AND CONDITIONS

Refer to “Examination of Work in Place” in Section 01 10 00, General Instructions.

Surface and ambient temperatures shall be minimum of 20oC at a relative humidity

between 20 to 80%, for a minimum of 72 hours prior to installation and continually following installation.


Install work plumb, true and square, neatly scribed to adjoining surfaces.

Make allowances around periphery and where fixed objects pass through or project into

countertops to permit normal movement without restriction.

Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed.

Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 25mm on either

side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top.

Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.

Rout radii and contours to template.

Anchor countertops and fascia securely to base cabinets or other supports.

Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations using adhesive in colour to match countertop.

Install vertical panels as indicated, anchored securely to casework and columns, as

applicable.

Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface.

Install countertops with no more than 3 mm sag, bow or other variation from a straight line.

At junction of counter back and side splashes and adjacent wall finishes, apply small

bead of sealant.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Upon completion of installation remove identification marks and clean all surfaces. Protect as specified above.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 16 – BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION


PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDED

Batt Insulation. Acoustical Batt Insulation.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Division 1 - General Requirements. 2. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 10 3. Sheet Vapour Retarders Section 07 26 00 4. Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals Section 07 84 00 5. Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 09 22 00

1.3 REFERENCES

CAN/ULC-S702-1997, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

INSULATION

Batt Insulation: .1 Mineral fibre to CAN/ULC-S702, Type 1-unfaced, thickness as indicated. .2 Thermal Resistance: RSI value of 2.1 per 89mm thickness. .3 Acceptable Products:

.1 CertainTeed Insulation Canada Inc.: Sustainable Insulation Fibre Glass Building Insulation.

.2 Owens Corning Canada Inc.: EcoTouch Pink Fiberglas Insulation.

Acoustical Batt Insulation: .1 Mineral fibre to CAN/ULC-S702, thickness as indicated. .2 Acceptable Products:

.1 CGC: Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets.

.2 CertainTeed Insulation Canada Inc.: Sustainable Insulation Noise Reducer Sound Attenuation Batts.

.3 Owens Corning Canada Inc.: EcoTouch Quiet Zone Pink Fibreglas Acoustic Insulation.

.4 Roxul Inc.: Acoustical Fire Batt (AFB).





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

ACCESSORIES

Insulation Clips: Impale type, perforated 50mm by 50mm cold rolled galvanized carbon steel 0.8mm thick, spindle of 2.5mm diameter annealed steel, length to suit insulation, 25mm diameter washers of self-locking type.

Retaining Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

Verify that substrate surfaces, adjacent materials and installation conditions are rec1dy to

accept the work of this section. Ensure insulation materials and surfaces are dry.

Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate and conditions.

3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION

Supply insulation to Section 06 10 10 -Rough Carpentry as required for building-in to work of that section.

Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection and acoustical separation of building elements and spaces.

Fit insulation closely around electrical boxes, pipes, ducts, frames and other objects in or

passing through insulation. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.

Do not compress insulation to fit into spaces. Install in spaces without gaps or voids.

Install friction fit insulation tight to framing members.

On sloping surfaces or in ceiling applications retain insulation in place with impale type fastener spaced at 600mm on centre. Adhere fastener to substrate with adhesive compatible with fastener and substrate.

In unfinished unexposed applications retain insulation in place with wire mesh secured to

framing members with fasteners appropriate for framing material.

Keep insulation minimum 75mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures.

Notify the Consultant upon completion of insulation installation to allow for inspection

before work is enclosed and obscured. 3.3 PROTECTION

Protect insulation under provisions of Section 01 56 00 -Temporary Controls.





Protect insulation from harmful weather exposures and physical abuse.

Provide temporary coverings or enclosures when insulation will be subject to damage

and cannot be protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION



07 26 00 – SHEET VAPOUR RETARDERS


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDED

Sheet vapour retarders. Vapour retarder accessories.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1. Division 1-General Requirements. 2. Batt and Blanket Insulation Section 07 21 23 3. Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 09 22 00 4. Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00

1.3 REFERENCES

CAN/CGSB-19.21-M87, Sealing and Bedding Compound, Acoustical. CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet, for Use in Building

Construction.

1.4 JOB MOCKUP

Provide mockup in accordance with Section 01 43 00 -Quality Assurance.

Construct mockup of sheet vapour retarder installation including one lap joint, one inside corner and at one electric box. Mock-up may be part of finished work.

Allow 48 hours for inspection of mock-up by the consultant before proceeding with vapour

retarder work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET VAPOUR RETARDER

Polyethylene Film: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, 0.15mm thick.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

Joint Sealing Tape: air resistant pressure sensitive adhesive tape, type recommended by

vapour retarder manufacturer, 50mm wide for lap joints and perimeter seals, 25mm wide elsewhere.




INTERIOR RENVOATIONS TO

WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Sealants: Non-drying, non-hardening synthetic rubber to CAN/CGSB-19.21. Acceptable

Product: Tremo Ltd., Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

Staples: minimum 6mm leg.

Moulded Box Vapour Barrier: factory-moulded polyethylene box for use with recessed electric switch and outlet device boxes.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALATION

Ensure services are installed and inspected prior to installation of retarder.

Install sheet vapour retarder where indicated on warm side of exterior wall, ceiling and

floor assemblies prior to installation of wall finish to form a continuous vapour retarder.

Use sheets of largest practical size to minimize joints.

Inspect for continuity. Repair punctures and tears with sealing tape before work is concealed.

3.2 EXTERIOR SURFACE OPENINGS

Cut sheet vapour retarder to form openings and ensure material is lapped and sealed to frame.

3.3 PERIMETER SEALS

Seal perimeter of sheet vapour retarder as follows: .1 Apply continuous bead of sealant to substrate at perimeter of sheets. .2 At metal stud substrate apply bead of sealant at each stud. Lap sheet over

sealant and press into sealant bead. Affix sheet temporarily with joint sealing tape.

.3 At wood substrate install staples through lapped sheets at sealant bead into substrate.

.4 Use only enough fasteners to ensure sheet remains in place until wall finish is installed.

.5 Ensure that no gaps exist in sealant bead. Smooth out folds and ripples occurring in sheet over sealant.

3.4 LAP JOINT SEALS

Seal lap joints of sheet vapour barrier as follows:





.1 Attach first sheet to substrate. .2 Apply continuous bead of sealant over solid backing at joint. .3 Lap adjoining sheet minimum 150mm and press into sealant bead. .4 At metal stud substrate install joint sealing tape to cover joint completely. .5 At wood substrate install staples through lapped sheets at sealant bead into

substrate. .6 Ensure that no gaps exist in sealant bead. Smooth out folds and ripples occurring

in sheet over sealant.

3.5 ELECTRICAL BOXES

Seal electrical switch and outlet device boxes that penetrate vapour retarder.

Install moulded box vapour retarder.

Apply sealant to seal edges of flange to main vapour retarder and seal wiring penetrations through box cover.

END OF SECTION



07 27 00 – AIR BARRIERS


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDED

Membrane air seal materials and installation methods. Air seal materials to bridge and seal openings and penetrations of window frames and

door frames.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Division 1-General Requirements. .2 Sealants Section 07 92 00 .3 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls Section 08 44 13

1.3 REFERENCES .1 CAN/CGSB-19.13M-M87 Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric

Chemical Curing.

.2 CGSB-19-GP-14M-84 Sealing Compound, One Component, Butyl-Polyisobutylene Polymer Base, Solvent Curing

.3 CAN/CGSB-19.18M-M87 Sealing Compound, One Component, Silicone Base, Solvent Curing

.4 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90 Multi-Component, Chemical Curing Sealing Compound.

.5 Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Submit samples of air barrier material in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit indicating preparation, installation

requirements and techniques, product storage and handling criteria.

Inspection Company Reports: Submit reports on air barrier membrane installation as it progresses.


Perform Work in accordance with Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.

Air barrier applicators shall be licensed or approved by the membrane material manufacturer.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Air barrier materials and accessory materials shall be from the Product line of one manufacturer.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section approved and trained

by materials' manufacturers.

The applicator shall have proven experience in the work of this section for jobs of similar size.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Do not install solvent curing sealants or vapour. release adhesive materials in enclosed

spaces without ventilation. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by materials manufacturers before,

during and after installation. Ensure materials are stored at a minimum temperature of 5C.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION

Sequence work to permit installation of materials in conjunction with related materials and

seals.

Coordinate work of this section with all sections referencing this section. 1.9 WARRANTY

Provide a warranty in accordance with the Contract Requirements, but for a period of two

(2) years.

The warranty shall cover defects in material, installation, and workmanship.

Warranties shall be issued to the Owner within two (2) Working Days following the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS

Membrane Air Barrier - Typical: Self-adhesive, rubberized asphalt bonded to sheet

polyethylene, nominal total thickness of 1mm to 1.5mm. .1 Henry Company Canada: Blueskin SA.





.2 Soprema Inc.: Sopraseal Stick 1100T. .3 W.R. Grace & Co. of Canada Ltd.: Perm-A-Barrier. .4 W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd.: Sealtight Air-Shield.

Vapour Permeable Air Barrier: Fluid-applied vapour permeable air barrier membrane.

.1 BASF Corporation: Enershield-1.

.2 Henry Company Canada: Air-Bloc 31.

.3 Tremco Incorporated: ExoAir 220.

.4 W.R. Grace & Co. of Canada Ltd.: Perm-A-Barrier VP.

.5 W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd.: Air-Shield LMP.

Sheet Steel Air Barrier: Galvanized steel, 2275 zinc coating, 1.5mm core steel thickness. 2.2 SEALANTS

Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

Sealant Primer: Recommended by sealant manufacturers.

Substrate Cleaner: Non-corrosive, type recommended by sealant manufacturer,

compatible with adjacent materials. 2.3 MASTIC AND PRIMER

Mastic: Compatible with membrane air barrier and substrate, thick mastic of uniform

consistency. .1 Henry Company Canada: Blueskin Sealant. .2 Soprema Inc.: Sopramastic 200. .3 W.R. Grace & Co. of Canada Ltd.: Bituthene Mastic. .4 W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd.: Sealtight Pointing Mastic.

Primer: Compatible with membrane air barrier and substrate.

.1 Henry Company Canada: Bakor Blueskin Primer.

.2 Soprema Inc.: Elastocol 700 Primer.

.3 W.R. Grace & Co. of Canada Ltd.: Perm-A-Barrier Primer.

.4 W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd.: Sealtight Mel-Prime. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

Verify that substrate surfaces are dry and clean and conditions are ready to accept the

work of this section.

Commencement of work implies the acceptance of substrate surfaces.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

3.2 PREPARATION

Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion of materials.

Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive air barrier membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Prime only substrate surface that can be covered with membrane the same day.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER

Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Seal joints and perimeter edges of sheet steel air barrier.

Co-operate with other trades to ensure continuity of air barrier membrane at junctions of different components and constructions.

Stagger end laps to avoid four-way joints in air barrier membrane.

Apply a bead of mastic to end laps, application terminations, and around all penetrations

of the membrane.

Ensure air barrier membrane js lapped and sealed onto curtain wall frames.

At the end of each day ensure that the work of this section is protected from adverse weather and other mechanical damage.

3.4 APPLICATION OF VAPOUR PERMEABLE AIR BARRIER

Mix air barrier material until thoroughly blended in conformance with the manufacturer's

printed instructions.

Spot all fasteners and sheathing joints, terminations, inside and outside corners with mixed air barrier material.

Place and centre the manufacturer's recommended sheathing fabric at all sheathing

joints, terminations, inside and outside corners. Ensure sheathing fabric extends evenly on both sides of sheathing joint.

Lap sheathing fabric 65mm minimum at intersections.

Allow to dry to the touch before applying the air barrier membrane to the entire wall

surface.

Apply air barrier membrane to wall surface with. roller, brush, or spray gun to a consistent even coating that is free of voids and pin holes. Follow the manufacturer's printed application recommendations.





Thickness of membrane shall be sufficient to achieve the required air barrier performance

requirements. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Do not permit adjacent work to damage work of this section.


Inspection: An inspection and testing company selected by the Owner will inspect and report on the installation of the air barrier system.

The cost of inspection services will be paid from the cash allowance specified in Section 01 21 00 -Allowances.

3.7 SCHEDULE

Curtain Wall Perimeter: Lap and seal air barrier membrane onto curtain wall and fill space

between frames and wall with air barrier foam sealant and elastomeric sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 -sealants.

Junctions between dissimilar materials: Where shown on Drawings install sheet steel air

barriers to configuration shown. Lap and seal air barrier membranes over sheet steel air barrier providing a minimum of 100mm contact.

END OF SECTION



07 92 00 – SEALANTS



Architectural Wood Casework Section 06 41 13 Plastic Laminate Section 08 41 19 Aluminum Curtain Walls Section 08 44 13 Automatic Entrance Doors Section 08 42 29

1.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

The products of the following manufacturers are approved for use subject to meeting the specifications for the particular type of sealants listed below. However, this is not an approval to substitute another type of sealant for those specified unless the material manufacturer requests change in his product in writing to the Consultant. .1 Canadian General Electric Company Ltd. .2 Dow Corning Canada Inc. .3 Tremco

Material manufacturers must be willing to review Shop Drawings and drawing details, visit

the site to review sealant installation and provide written reports to the Consultant.

1.3 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

Sealants and caulking shall be installed by a specialized Subcontractor, having skilled mechanics thoroughly trained and competent in all aspects of caulking work, with minimum 5 years’ experience.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Submit samples of each sealant, in conformance with Section 01 33 23.

Provide colour cards for Consultants selection.

Submit written adhesion and compatibility approval from the sealant manufacturer for all materials to be sealed.

1.5 WARRANTY

Extend Contractor’s warranty to five (5) years, in writing. Warranty shall commence on

the date of Substantial Performance.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Defective work shall include, but not be restricted to, joint leakage, cracking, crumbling, melting, running, loss of adhesion, loss of cohesion, or staining of adjacent surfaces.

Provide manufacturer’s project-specific 20 year non-staining warranty and 10 year weather seal warranty for “Type A” sealant listed below.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

Sealant Type A: For exterior locations. Non-Staining, primer less, silicone weather-

proofing sealant: .1 SilPruf SCS9000 NB, manufactured by Canadian General Electric Company

Limited, Dow Corning 756 SMS, manufactured by Dow Corning Canada Inc., or .2 Spectrem 3, manufactured by Tremco Ltd., and .3 conforming to the product properties published.

Sealant Type B: For interior locations. Non-staining, primer less, silicone hybrid sealant:

.1 SCS7000, manufactured by Canadian General Electric Company Limited.

.2 Dow Corning 756 SMS, manufactured by Dow Corning Canada Inc., or

.3 Spectrem 3, manufactured by Tremco Ltd., and

Sealant Type C: For interior locations. Paintable, non-staining, primer less, silicone hybrid sealant: .1 SCS7000, manufactured by Canadian General Electric Company Limited.

Sealant Type D:

.1 Multi-component, epoxidized polyurethane sealant conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.24, Type 2, Class B, SWRI Certified.

.2 Dymeric 240, manufactured by Tremco Ltd.

.3 [Contractors Weatherproofing Sealant (CWS) Contractors Concrete Sealant by Dow Corning.]

Colours of sealants and caulking when exposed in the finished work to later selection by the Consultant. Allow different colours for different situations and materials. Allow for custom colours for exterior sealants.

Primers for sealing: As manufactured or recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing materials for the specific applications.

Joint backing material:

.1 circular foam strips, of approved manufacture, compatible with sealant and 50% greater width than joint width;

.2 Vertical Surfaces: extruded polyolefin foam, Sof Rod by Tremco Ltd.

.3 Horizontal Surfaces: closed cell polyethylene foam, Standard Backer Rod by Tremco.





Bond Breaker: pressure sensitive plastic tape backing material, which will not bond to sealant; 3M #226 or #481, or Valley Industries #40.

Cleaning material for surfaces to receive sealant to be as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 LOCATIONS

Seal all exterior junctions and joints wherever required to close gap and wherever sealant

is essential to maintain the continuity of air barrier, water barrier, or non-rated smoke separation of wall with Sealant Type A. Areas to be caulked include: .1 Concrete to metal, masonry, concrete and precast concrete. .2 Masonry to metal, concrete, precast concrete, and masonry. .3 Metal to metal, masonry, concrete, and precast concrete. .4 Around pipes and conduit through foundation walls. .5 Between hollow metal frames and screens and adjacent materials. .6 Between metal siding and metal panels and adjacent materials. .7 Between window, louvre, and skylight frames and sills and adjacent materials. .8 At all control and expansion joints.

Seal all interior junctions and joints wherever required to close gap and wherever sealant

is essential to maintain the continuity of air barrier, water barrier, or non-rated smoke separation of wall with Sealant Type B. Areas to be caulked include: .1 Concrete to metal, masonry, concrete and precast concrete. .2 Masonry to metal, concrete, precast concrete, and masonry. .3 Metal to metal, masonry, concrete, and precast concrete. .4 Around pipes and conduit through walls. .5 Between hollow metal frames and screens and adjacent materials. .6 Between window, louvre, and skylight frames and sills and adjacent materials. .7 At all joints between millwork and masonry, to provide neat junction. .8 At junction between all counters and/or splashbacks and adjacent substrate with

neat 3mm bead. .9 At all control and expansion joints.

Seal with Sealant Type C at all interior non-moving joints to be painted.

Seal at all other vertical and horizontal joint locations with Sealant Type D.

Refer to Section 07 84 00, Firestopping and Smoke Seal, for location of fire stopping and

fire resistant caulking.

Refer to Section 09 29 00, Gypsum Board, for acoustic sealant work.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

3.2 SUPERVISION

Unless specified otherwise herein comply with the recommendations and directions of the manufacturer whose materials are being used on the work.

Arrange for the sealant manufacturer's technical representatives to visit the site prior to the commencement of the sealing to meet with the Contractor and the Consultant.

Sealant manufacturer to visit site periodically and to provide written reports to Consultant ensuring sealant is in accordance with good trade practice, the manufacturer's recommendations and the intent of this Specification.

3.3 PREPARATION

Install sealants only when surfaces and ambient temperatures are suitable for the

material used, as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

Clean all joints and spaces to be sealed.

Ensure that surfaces are structurally sound, free from grease, chalk or other contaminants which may adversely affect the adhesion of the sealing materials. Use dry oil free clean compressed air stream if necessary to clean out the joint.

Clean surfaces with a solvent or cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the

sealant materials.

Remove chalk lines completely. Do not place clear sealant over coloured chalk lines.

Test materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion before any sealing is commenced.

Submit colour chart to Consultant and obtain his written instructions for colours and

locations of colours.

3.4 PRIMING

If recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing materials, prime joints to prevent staining, or to assist the bond, or to stabilize porous surfaces.

Apply primer with a brush which will permit the priming of all joint surfaces.

3.5 MASKING

Where necessary to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces, mask the areas adjacent to the joints with masking tape.





3.6 INSTALLATION

Install joint backing materials at all locations as detailed or where required by sealant manufacturer's printed directions.

Install a bond breaker tape or packing over asphalt impregnated fibre board as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

Ensure that the correct sealant depth is maintained.

Finished joints shall be free of wrinkles, sags, air pockets, ridges and embedded impurities.

Tool all sealant surfaces to produce a smooth surface.

Remove droppings and excess sealant as work progresses and before material sets.

Sealing materials shall be gun grade or tool grade consistency to suit the joint conditions.

Commence sealing only after all adjacent surfaces have been painted under Painting

Section. 3.7 CLEANING

Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work neat and clean. Remove excess

sealant and droppings using recommended cleaners as work progresses. Remove masking after joint tooling.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 11 13 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES



Sealants Section 07 92 00 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 Glazing Section 08 80 00 Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 Painting and Coating Section 09 90 00 Electrical Division 26, 27, 28

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

Supply and install all hollow metal products including doors, frames, transom frames, screens, sidelight and window assemblies with provision for glazed, paneled or louvered openings, fire labelled and non-labelled, as scheduled or shown on the Drawings.

Work shall include the following: .1 Door cutouts, complete with reinforcing, stops and closers required for glazing. .2 Reinforcing for Finishing Hardware. .3 Supply all necessary fastening and anchoring devices for above items. .4 Steel closure pieces at metal panels, steel columns, horizontal members, and

hollow metal frames and screens. Refer to Drawings. .5 Supply and install HSS and channel reinforcing members where shown at

screens and door frames/sidelights. .6 Supply and install door silencers on metal frames.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 CAN4-S104 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies .2 CAN4-S105 Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting

the Performance Required by CAN4-S104 .3 CAN4-S106 Standard Method for Fire Tests of Window and Glass

Block Assemblies .4 Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association (CSDMA)

.1 Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames

.2 Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames

.3 Recommended Specifications for Sound Retardant Steel Doors and Frames

.4 Canadian Fire Labelling Guide for Commercial Steel Door and Frame Products

.5 Guide Specification for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .5 CGSB 82.5 Insulated Steel Doors .6 CSA A101 Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation for Buildings .7 CSA W59 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) .8 ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.9 ANSI A250.4 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors Frames and Frame Anchors

.10 ANSI A115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware

.11 ANSI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames

1.4 PERFORMANCE

Doors and frames covered by this specification shall be certified as meeting Level “A” acceptance criteria when tested in strict conformance with ANSI-A250.4-2011. Swing Test duration shall be 1,000,000 cycles. For door twist tests maximum deflection is not to exceed 32mm (1¼”) when loaded to 136kg (300 lbs), and permanent deflection is not to exceed 3.2mm (1/8"). Tests shall be conducted by an independent nationally recognized accredited laboratory.

Product quality shall meet standards set by the Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association.


.1 Handle and install product in strict compliance with CSDMA 08 11 13, DHI A115.IG and NFPA 60.

1.6 SUBMITTALS .1 Prepare and submit shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 23, and show the

following: .1 Door and frame schedules, identifying each unit, with door numbers referencing

the numbering in the contract documents. .2 Provide columns for Stock Code Numbers for both doors and frames. .3 Typical and special details; including mortises, reinforcements, anchorages,

locations of exposed fasteners, openings (glazed) and arrangement of hardware. .4 Materials and finishes; including steel, core, material thickness. .5 Hardware preparation. .6 Frame anchorage details. .7 Submit manufacturer's standard catalogue data for specified products

demonstrating compliance with referenced standards. .8 Other pertinent information

Submit information on standard shop drawing sheets as approved by the Canadian Steel

Door and Frame Manufacturers Association.

Shop drawings for hollow metal screens over 8m2 in size, and for all screens which are required by code to be designed as guards at variations in floor level, must be sealed by a professional engineer, registered in the Province of Ontario.

Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions.





Operation and Maintenance Data: Include methods for maintaining installed products

and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING

Matchmark doors, panels, frames and windows with Stock Code Numbers as shown on

the Door Schedule. If Stock Code Numbers are not shown on the Schedule, matchmark with Door Numbers.

Deliver, store and handle components so as to prevent damage, distortion and corrosion.

Store Steel Frames under cover, raised on wood skids at least 100mm above grade, and as required to prevent damage and rusting. Store assembled frames in an upright position. Stack frames to prevent twisting; maximum 5 units per stack. Provide minimum 6mm airspace between frames to permit air circulation. Covers must be vented so as to avoid a build-up of humidity within.

Doors to be delivered to site immediately prior to installation. Store doors protected at corners to prevent damage or marring of finish. Store in upright position, in enclosed, dry space, in a manner to prevent rust and damage. Use vented covers.

1.8 TESTING

Three doors will be selected at random by the Consultant and shall be subjected to

destructive testing by an Inspection Company appointed by the Consultant, to verify conformance to the specifications. Replace the doors at no additional cost to the Contract.

1.9 WARRANTY

Provide an extended warranty of three (3) years from date of Substantial Performance against defects of workmanship including failure of welded seams or of reinforced hinge anchorage plates. Work showing defects during this period shall be repaired or replaced without cost to the owner.


General: All materials shall be new and suitable for their various purposes and shall be

free from flaws and imperfections.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

All doors, frames, and screens shall be from one manufacturer. Only the following manufacturers will be accepted: .1 Manufacturers:

.1 Fleming Baron Door Products (Assa Abloy)

.2 Daybar Industries Ltd.

.3 All Steel Doors

.4 Gensteel Doors

.5 Trillium Steel Doors

.6 Vision Hollow Metal

.2 Sheet Steel: .1 General: cold rolled, carbon steel, stretcher levelled. Steel to have

hardness of Rockwell 'B' maximum 65 (ASTM E103) suitable for forming and bending without metal or coating fracture.

.2 ASTM A65 3/A653M commercial grade tension levelled hot-dipped galvannealed steel sheet, coating designation Z275

.3 Steel Thicknesses: .1 Doors:

.1 1.3mm (18 ga) for interior doors .2 Panels: 1.3mm (18 ga) .3 Frames: 1.6mm (16 ga) .4 Hinge Reinforcement: 3.5mm (10 ga)

.4 Door Materials: .1 Interior doors and panels up to 3m2 and maximum width of 1200mm or

maximum length of 3000mm: .1 Doors to be Fleming D-Series, 18 gauge. .2 Interior Doors to be reinforced with continuous interlocking steel

ribs.

.5 Frame reinforcement: .1 Reinforce frames for high frequency hinge preparation. .2 Stiffen all mullions and hinge jambs with continuous 3.5mm channel

where continuous hinges are required. .3 Reinforce and provide cut outs and boxes for security devices. .4 Reinforce for overhead stops.

.6 Zinc Rich Coating: ZRC 221 Cold Galvanizing Compound by ZRC Worldwide,

low VOC coating, or equivalent approved by the Consultant. .7 Metal Filler: Two component epoxy type. .8 Primer: Rust inhibitive primer .9 Glass Stop Screws: Oval head, cadium plated, self-tapping steel screws. Other

mechanical locking methods may be used but shall be detailed on Shop Drawings for review.

.10 Door Silencers: Rubber - Ives SR64 or approved equal.





2.2 FABRICATION

General .1 Dissimilar metals in contact, or metals which will be in contact with concrete or

masonry when installed, shall be insulated one from another by methods and materials required for such results, as approved by the Consultant.

.2 Components shall be the types and sizes shown on the Drawings.

.3 Reinforce components, where required, for the installation of Finishing Hardware. Drill and tap to suit templates.

.4 Prepare doors and frames for the installation of the security system. Confirm requirements with Consultant.

.5 Ensure adequacy of anchoring devices.

.6 No patching, plugging, skimming or other such means of overcoming defects, discrepancies or errors shall be resorted to without written permission of the Consultant.

.7 Fabricate components from clean steel, free of rust and scale, which has been thoroughly degreased.

.8 The dimensions shown on the Drawings are the full rebate size of the frame.

.9 All areas where shop applied zinc-rich coating has been damaged on site shall immediately be cleaned and touched up with the same zinc-rich coating product.

.10 Steel framed doors, screens and windows are to be glazed as specified in Section 08 81 00. Exterior and acoustic doors and screens are to be prepared for double glazed units.

Edge Clearances

.1 Unless otherwise specified, allow edge clearances in accordance with Canadian Manufacturing Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers Association.

.1 Where hardware items are to be attached to, or mortised into, bottom edges of doors, provide proper clearance between door and floor or threshold to accommodate such hardware.

Hardware Preparation .1 Refer to Hardware Schedule, included in Section 08 71 00, and prepare doors for

hardware listed. .2 Templated hardware: prepare work in accordance with templates supplied in

Section 08 71 00. Prepare doors for mortice locksets according to Hardware Schedule Reinforce doors and frames for concealed, mortised and surface mounted hardware in accordance to "Thickness of Steel for Component Parts" in the "Canadian Manufacturing Standards for Steel Doors and Frames", published by the Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association.

.3 Prepare doors and frames for security system where noted.

Hollow Metal Doors and Panels .1 Doors and panels shall be of seamless, continuously welded construction with no

visible seams or joints on faces. Doors to be 44.4mm minimum thickness. .2 Secure edge seams with suitable continuously welded seams to the approval of

the Consultant. .3 Interlocking seams for doors shall be fully seam welded, for full length of door. All

welding to be ground smooth.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.4 Core construction: .1 All interior doors shall have steel reinforcing. .2 Temperature Rise Rated (TRR): Solid slab core of non-combustible,

inorganic composite to limit temperature rise on the “unexposed” side of door to 250(C at 30 or 60 minutes, as required by governing building code requirements and determined and scheduled by the Consultant

.5 Welds shall be ground, filled, and dressed smooth to provide an invisible joint and smooth flush surface.

.6 Fully reinforce doors as required for specified hardware.

.7 Close top and bottom edges of doors with a continuous, recessed, minimum 1.5mm thick steel channel, extending full width of door and welded to both faces. At exterior doors, provide an additional flush closing channel at top edge and, where required for attachment of weather stripping, a flush closure at bottom edge. Provide similar closure channel at all stair doors.

.8 Surround openings in doors with minimum 1.5mm thick steel edge channels, welded to both face sheets.

.9 Vertical edge profile for single acting swing doors: bevelled 3mm in 50mm.

.10 Glazing Stops: .1 Equip glazed doors with minimum 0.9mm steel glazing stops, mitred and

welded at corners. Where least dimension of stop is less than 12mm, make stop from solid square bar.

.2 Glazing stops at outside of exterior doors and at secure side of interior doors shall be rendered non-removable by welding to door. Secure removable stops with screws.

.3 Glazing stops may be mechanically locked in place, providing details have been reviewed on Shop Drawings.

.4 Glazing stops at fire rated doors and screens shall conform to the requirements of the tested assemblies.

.11 Doors for installation in channel frames shall be double-depth mortised to accommodate both butt flanges.

.12 Construct fire rated doors to meet fire test requirements and provide U.L.C. labels.

Steel Frames .1 Frames shall be of sheet steel, formed profiles shown on the Drawings. Fleming

D Series for interior, Fleming H Series for exterior. .2 Fabricate frames in sections as large as practicable to minimize field jointing.

Internally reinforce all mullions and hinge jambs with 1.3mm channel. .3 Steel thickness: 1.6mm (16 ga.) galvanized steel. .4 Glazing stops shall be as specified for doors above. .5 Sidelight framing shall be of same metal and thickness as adjacent door frame. .6 Assemble components with accurately cut joints. Mitre outside corner joints of

frames. Continuously weld joints on inside of profile; grind welds flush and sand to smooth uniform surface. Provide semi-rigid insulation to exterior frames.

.7 Tack weld two (2) removable 1.2mm steel spreader channels to inside faces of door frames at base, for protection during shipping.

.8 Provide adjustable base clips at bottom of each door jamb for anchorage to floor.

.9 Provide button type rubber silencers; three per strike jamb of single doors: two per head member of double door frames.

.10 Prepare door frames for ANSI strike, where doors to be fitted with latchsets or lockets.





.11 Provide removable mullions where noted. Reinforce removable mullions with 3.5mm channel to prevent forcing of latching hardware.

.12 Masonry Anchors: .1 At interior frames, provide masonry anchors of 1.5mm galvanized

corrugated tee anchors or 3mm diameter galvanized wire anchors - supplied loose, at rate of 3 per jamb up to 2.2m high; one additional per jamb for each 0.6m over 2.2m high. Frames for observation windows shall be provided with 2 anchors per jamb.

.2 At exterior frames, provide galvanized tee anchors fabricated from 3mm steel plates, installed at rate of 3 per jamb up to 2.2m high; one additional per jamb for each 0.6m over 2.2m high

.13 Provide two 38mm by 38mm by 4.8mm thick steel stiffening angles in the head member of frames for two or more doors totalling over 1980mm, wide. Provide necessary vertical stiffeners where required and carry to structure above. Provide stiffener angles in all exterior door jamb with sidelights and in all centre mullions between doors.

.14 Mounting bars for sidelights shall be as detailed on the Drawings and shall be completely filled with glass fibre insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

Store doors and frames as specified under item 1.7, Product Handling, above.

When installing frames during cold weather, installer to coat inside of frames with a corrosion inhibiting bituminous product, prior to installation, to protect against cold weather additives in masonry grout.

Silencers, gaskets, etc., are to be installed in holes in frames prior to installation of frames; so to avoid filling these holes with grout during installation.

Keep steel surfaces free of grout, tar, other bonding materials, and sealers; clean

surfaces immediately following installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Frame and Screen Installation .1 Remove all steel spreaders, which are provided to avoid damage during

shipping. Provide wood spreaders at base and midpoint of frames. Wood spreaders to be min. 38 x 89mm lumber, notched to clear frame stops; width to be equal to opening between jambs at header level. Wood spreaders to remain in place until frames are set permanently in walls.

.2 Set frames and screens plumb, square, aligned, without twist and at correct elevation. Maximum allowable limits of distortion shall be as follows: .1 Plumbness: Not more than 1.6 mm out of plumb, measured using a line

from the intersection of vertical members and the head to the floor.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.2 Squareness: Not more than 1.6 mm difference between diagonal measurements between corners.

.3 Alignment: Not more than 1.6 mm, measured on jambs, through a horizontal line parallel to the plane of the wall.

.4 Twist: Not more than 1.6 mm, measured at face corners of jambs, on parallel lines perpendicular to the plane of the wall.

.3 At gypsum board finished steel stud partitions, build in frames using the anchors for steel stud framing. Brace frames solidly in position while being built in, with wood spreaders as noted above. Provide vertical support at centre of head for openings exceeding 1200 mm in width.

.4 After installation, fill countersunk screw heads flush with frame and sand smooth ready for painting. Fill exterior frames with glass fibre batt insulation. Cooperate with masonry trade to fill interior frames with mortar.

.5 Where large screens are assembled on site, they must be joined by continuously welded seams, ground smooth. Provide formed covers for structural columns built into screens.

Door Installation .1 Install hollow metal doors plumb and true. .2 Co-ordinate installation of hardware. .3 Adjust operable parts to ensure proper operation. Lubricate using a suitable

lubricant compatible with door and frame coatings. .4 Install hollow metal panels with concealed fastenings.

3.3 TOUCH UP

Remove rust, clean and touch up any damaged galvanizing with "ZRC 221" coating.

Remove rust, clean and touch up any damaged paint with approved rust inhibitive primer.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before Owner's acceptance.

Remove construction debris associated with this work from project site, and dispose of in accordance with applicable laws.

Protect installed products and finished surfaces from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION



08 42 29 – AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

This section includes automatic entrance door systems comprising the following: .1 Sliding doors, frames and adjoining screens. .2 Glass and glazing. .3 Door hardware. .4 Operator equipment. .5 Control system. .6 Perimeter sealant.


General Requirements Sealants Electrical

Division 01 Section 07 92 00 Refer to Electrical.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Automatic Door Equipment: Electro-Mechanically operated with motion detector, presence sensor and integral sensing device.

Type of Door Operations: Fully automatic sliding doors with emergency release hardware allowing active leaves to swing in the direction of egress.

Door: Bi-parting sliding.

Traffic Movement: Two-way traffic.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Design automatic entrance doors as emergency egress and to comply with the OBC.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Automatic door equipment to accommodate high frequency pedestrian traffic and weight of doors.

Operator Equipment: CSA approved.

Operating Hardware: ULC listed and labeled.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Design framing members to withstand their own weight, weight of glass, and loads imposed by motion of operable elements.

Provide expansion joints to accommodate movement in door, door frame and screen

framing system, and between system and building structure, caused by structural movements, and dynamic loading and release of loads, without permanent distortion, damage to infills, racking of joints, or breakage of seals.

Provide for dimensional distortion of components during operation.

Provide manual operation for opening and closing of doors during electrical power failure

and when power is manually switched off.

Provide fully adjustable operators for opening and closing speeds.

Provide framing members and finished metal sheets with uniform appearance and colour. 1.6 SUBMITIALS

Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit Shop Drawings under provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

.2 Indicate on Shop Drawings, layout, dimensions, elevations, detail sections of members and sill conditions, materials, finishes, recesses, hardware including mounting heights, anchors and reinforcements, provisions for expansion and contraction, methods of joining sheet metal and joint locations, glass types and glass thicknesses, glazing details, types of sealants, details of other pertinent components of the work, and adjacent construction to which work of this section is attached. Identify installation tolerances required, assembly conditions, routing of service lines, locations of operating components, controls and boxes. Indicate door signs.

.3 Provide manufacturer's technical Product data for door units, framing systems and operators for each type of entrance required. Include fabrication methods, finishing, hardware and operator sizes, roughing-in and wiring diagrams, parts lists, accessories and other components. Include data substantiating that system will perform as specified.

Samples: .1 Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. .2 Submit two samples of each required aluminum finish on 300 mm long sections

of extrusions and 150 mm by 150 mm sheet/plate. Where colour and texture variations are anticipated, include two or more units in each set of samples indicating limits of variations.

.3 Submit two 300 mm by 300 mm samples of each type of glass.

Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's templates, diagrams and installation instructions under

provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Furnish accepted data to fabricators and installers of related work, as necessary for coordination of the installation.





1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01

78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

Include manufacturer's parts lists, servicing frequencies, instructions for adjustment and operation applicable to each type of component or hardware, and name, address and telephone number of nearest authorized service representative.


Drawings indicate sizes, spacings of members, profiles and dimensions required. Minor

deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard Products when deviations do not materially detract from the design concept or intended performance, as instructed by the Consultant.

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS

Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of automatic entrance door operating equipment and framing assemblies.

Installer: Company which is an authorized representative of the automatic entrance door manufacturer for both the installation and maintenance of the type of units specified and with three years documented servicing and installing experience.

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Conform to OBC requirements for automatic release of control drive unit to permit manual operation of emergency exit doors.

1.11 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

Convene a pre-installation conference one week prior to commencing work of this section.

Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.

Review conditions of installation, installation procedures, and coordination with related work.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Deliver doors and related components to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Cover exposed metal surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or strippable plastic coating. Do not use materials of the type which will become bonded when exposed to the sun, or leave residue. Use padded blankets or other approved protective wrapping for decorative metal work and other similarly finished exposed elements.

Do not deliver door units until work is ready for their installation.

Store and protect doors and related components under provisions of Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements.

Store inside building in dry protected area away from construction activity.

Protect finish surfaces from damage during handling, erection and at point of installation.

1.13 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

Field measure openings and clearances before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of

work; show measurements on final Shop Drawings.

Coordinate fabrication with construction progress to avoid delay.

If necessary, proceed with fabrication of non-critical items until measurements can be taken.

1.14 WARRANTY

Provide a warranty for automatic entrance doors in conformance with the General

Conditions, but for period of five years.

Warranty: Include coverage of repair or replacement of components or entire units which fail in materials or workmanship. Failures include but are not necessarily limited to, structural failures including excessive deflection, faulty operation of operators and hardware, deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

1.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Furnish complete service and maintenance of operating equipment for one year from date of Substantial Performance of the Work.





1.16 EXTRA MATERIALS

Provide under provisions of Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

Provide wrenches and tools required for maintenance of equipment. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

.1 Bi Acceptable Manufacturer: DORMA Automatics, Inc.; 924 Sherwood Drive, Lake Bluff,

Illinois 60044. ASD. Toll Free: 1-877-367-621.1 Fax: 1-877-423-7999. Web: www.dorma-usa.com. E-Mail: [email protected].

.2 Substitutions: Not permitted. .3 Acceptable Dorma Model Type: IET ESA 300-13.

2.2 MATERIALS

Components are as follows: i. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper typical, 6061 alloy, T6

temper for extruded structural members.

ii. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209, 5005 alloy, H15 or H34 temper.

iii. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 924/A 924M; galvanized to minimum G90.

iv. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A3 6M; shaped to suit mullion sections, galvanized.

v. Glass: Glass shall be in accordance with Safety Glazing standard ANSI-Z97.1.2. 1. Sealed double pane units, consisting of fully tempered select glazing

quality clear float glass, safety glass, total thickness 1 inch (25 mm), conforming with requirements in Section 08800 - Glazing.

vi. Glazing Materials: Entrance manufacturer’s standard types to suit application and

conforming with requirements specified in Section 08800.

vii. Weatherstripping: Entrance manufacturer’s standard types to suit application.

viii. Fasteners: Stainless steel or corrosion resistant steel. .2 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM

i. Automatic Sliding Door System: DORMA ESA300 (full breakout design) consists of aluminum door(s) with sidelite(s). Refer to architectural drawing for size of door system. Door opening restrictor arms shall be provided for all panels to control and limit the opening angle of the door(s) as they swing in the direction of egress. Provide to dimension heights and widths indicated on the Drawings.

http://www.dorma-usa.com/






WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1. Sliding Aluminum Doors: a. Narrow stile. b. Medium stile. c. Glazing 1 inch (25 mm) tempered glass. d. Intermediate muntin 3.25 inches (83 mm) including glass stops. e. Bottom rail 7.5 inches (190.5 mm) including glass stops. f. Bi-part sliding door system includes a two-point lock: one secured

at the lead edge(s) of the door panel(s) and the other to the carrier assembly above the locking stile.

g. Door package includes interlock clips that latch the sliding panel(s) to the sidelite panel(s) when the door system is in the fully closed position.

h. Active sliding door provided with a maximum security hookbolt lock, with provisions for a key cylinder on the exterior and a thumb turn on the interior in accordance with NFPA 101.

i. Exit Device: Adams Rite Model 8600 narrow stile concealed vertical rod exit device.

j. Autolock: Conceal carrier lock, head mounted. 2. Door Operation: Slide panel(s) shall slide open and position to provide

egress at any point in the door’s movement or position in compliance with NFPA 101.

a. Bi-part slide. b. Slide panel(s) allow “breakout” to the full and open position

providing egress at any point in the door’s movement or position. Automatic operation is discontinued when any panel is in the “breakout” mode by way of a non-contact cut-off switch, or self-closing device.

c. Size door(s) and sidelite(s) and positioned to provide a minimum 0.75 inch (19 mm) finger protection to prevent pinch points at the meeting stiles when fully opened.

d. Battery Back-Up: Provide emergency exit devices, automatic locking system, DORMA ITS-96 hydraulic door closers, with battery back-up system.

3. Aluminum Frame and Extrusions: a. Door panels 1.75 inches (44 mm) deep. b. Framing materials including jambs and header shall be 4.5 inches

(114mm) deep. c. Structural sections shall be .125 inches thickness. d. Bi-part transom packages contain one vertical transom tube

centered in the opening. 4. Sidelites:

a. Provide sidelite door panel(s) to dimension height(s) and width(s) as indicated on the Drawings with corresponding glazing.

b. Sidelites provided with standard intermediate 3.25 inch (82.5 mm) overall muntin.

c. Sidelites shall swing out and allow the sliding doors to break away to the full open position for egress at any point in the door’s movement per NFPA 101.

5. Header: 4.5 inches wide by 7.5 inches high (114 mm wide by 190.5 mm high) with a minimal wall thickness of .125 inch (32 mm), capable of supporting door panels of 220 lbs. (100 kg) single slide or 190 lbs. (86 kg) bi-part slide.





a. Header contains the door operator and door mounting components.

b. Provide header cover with a continuous self-locking hinge design and open flush with the top of the header.

c. Roller track shall be a separate extrusion from the header and sound dampened by separating the track from the header with an extruded EPDM rubber gasket.

d. Operator components are factory assembled within the header. Minimal field wiring is required. Door functions provided in accordance with ANSI A156.10.

6. Door Hanger Wheels: 1.5 inches (38 mm) diameter Delrin wheels with self lubricating sealed ball bearing cores. Sliding door(s) stabilized on the track by 1.4 inches (36 mm) diameter anti-riser wheels. Assembly shall allow the sliding doors to freely swing outward for emergency egress. Door height shall have an upward or downward adjustment of 3/16 inches plus or minus (5 mm).

7. Threshold Track: a. Track is required adjacent to the Sidelites and panels. b. Provide with continuous threshold is available.

8. Door Operator and Controller: DORMA ESA system with an electro-mechanical operator and microprocessor controller. Components consist of a DC permanent magnet motor, a self lubricating drive system and a wear-free digital rotary encoder all linked to a fully integrated digital microprocessor controller.

9. Microprocessor Controller: DORMA microprocessor controller is a fully integrated digital design that is self-learning and self-monitoring.

a. Performance parameters shall not exceed applicable ANSI A156.10 and/or UL standards.

b. Controller shall continuously monitor all critical door functions and safety sensors.

c. All door functions such as opening speed, closing speed, check locations, partial open dimensions, etc., shall be fully programmable without the use of limit switches by utilizing a portable hand terminal connected to the microprocessor controller.

10. Threshold Sensors: Self-monitored active infrared safety sensors. Sensors shall be self-contained and fully functioning during the opening and closing cycle of the door.

11. Activation Sensor: Motion sensor utilizes K-band frequency (24.125 GHz) for improved detection of slow-moving pedestrian traffic, and shall be switchable between bi-directional and uni-directional operation. Circuitry is included to eliminate Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI). Relay hold time is adjustable from 0.5 seconds to 9 seconds.

a. Mount motion sensor to the header at 120 inches (3,048 mm) maximum above the finished floor. Using the adjustable antenna the detection pattern is semi-circular.

b. When installed at a height of 96 inches (2,438mm) and set at the highest sensitivity, the sensor can provide a “wide pattern set-up “ of approximately 12 feet wide by 6 feet 6 inches deep (3,658 by 1,981 mm) or a “narrow pattern set-up“ of approximately 6 feet 6 inches wide by 8 feet deep (1,981 by 2,438 mm).





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

c. Location of the detection zone shall be adjustable by moving the antenna. Vertical antenna adjustments are possible from 0 degrees to 90 degrees in 15 degrees increments and lateral adjustment from 30 degrees left to 30 degrees right and anywhere in between.

d. Power is provided by the microprocessor control. Electrical adjustments can be made with a universal coded infrared remote control.

12. Accessories: ESA 300 automatic sliding door system shall include the following accessories to reduce energy loss:

a. Track-in pile weather-stripping on the bottom of sliding door(s). b. Track-in double pile weather-stripping on the sliding door lead

edges. c. Track-in single pile weather-stripping between the carrier and the

header on the sliding door(s). d. Track-in double pile weather-stripping at the interlock rails

between sliding door(s) and sidelite door(s). e. Track-in neoprene weather-stripping between sidelite door(s) and

jamb(s). f. Track-in vinyl weatherstripping: For clean room applications,

weather-stripping shall be Sanoprene. g. Interior side jamb mounted program switches consisting of:

i. Main Switch = AUTO- CLOSE -OPEN (operates door in fully automatic mode or turns it off or keeps it fully open).

ii. Exit Only Switch = OFF – ON (only the exit side motion detector will initiate door opening).

iii. Partial Open Switch = OFF – ON (reduces the opening width according to weather and traffic conditions).

c. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

i. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Requirements for electrical characteristics.

ii. Electrical: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 5 Amp service.

iii. Section 16225 - Motors: Requirements for motors, NEMA MG1.

iv. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor

quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

d. FACTORY FINISH

i. Provide aluminum finishes in accordance with Aluminum Association Standard

AA DAF-45.

ii. Clear Anodized Aluminum Surfaces: 204-R1 Class-II anodized aluminum coating.





2.3 ACCESSORIES

Door Signs: .1 Sign Material: Self-adhesive type for mounting on glass. .2 . 2 Provide "IN EMERGENCY PUSH TO OPEN" sign on power operated sliding

doors with breakaway swinging leaves; red background with contrasting letters. .3 Provide "AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR" sign on each side of power operated

sliding door leaves; red horizontal background strip with minimum 25mm high contrasting letters, each end of horizontal strip with arrow pointing toward nearest door stile. Locate sign centrally on door leaf900mm to 1.5 m above floor.

2.4 FABRICATION

Prefabricate automatic entrance doors as packaged units complete with doors, sidelights, frames, transoms where indicated, door operators and related components, hardware, and accessories. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications and other work before shipment to project site.

Construct doors, transom panels, frames and screens to profiles and maximum face sizes indicated.

Provide reinforcement for strength, stiffness and connections. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with non-metallic separators to prevent lock-up of joints. Use structural steel channel sections within void space of framing sections as required.

Fit intersecting members to flush hairline joints and mechanically fasten or weld together, except where indicated otherwise. Grind welds smooth, flush and finish to match adjacent surfaces. Reinforce mechanically joined corners of doors by welding and spigotting or by one piece cast aluminum angle to produce sturdy door unit.

Conceal fastenings from view. Exposed fastenings where specified or indicated.

Form cut-outs, recesses, mortising or milling for finishing hardware and operators. Reinforce with aluminum or galvanized steel.

Field apply isolation coating to aluminum, galvanized steel or prime coated steel in

contact with dissimilar metals, and cementitious materials. Touch-up damaged or scratched surfaces or steel with appropriate primer.

Manufacturer's nameplates on doors, frames, screens are not permitted. Place

manufacturer's name plates in semi-concealed locations.

Fabricate doors, frames and screens by same manufacturer.

Provide interlocking snap-in type glazing stops for dry glazing.

Shop install hardware, except surface mounted hardware. Remove only as required for final finishing operations, and for delivery and installation of work at project site.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

Verify surfaces, openings, and recesses are ready to receive work, and opening

dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings.

Verify power supply is available and rouged-in to power operated devices.

Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION

Install doors, frames, and screens in accordance with Shop Drawings and manufacturer's

instructions.

Coordinate installation of components with related and adjacent work.

Set work plumb, square, level, free from warp, twist and superimposed loads.

Securely anchor work in required position.

Brace frames rigidly for building-in. Provide temporary horizontal spreaders at third points of door openings to maintain frame width. Vertically support at centre, heads of openings over 1.2 m wide. Remove temporary bracing after framing is set.

Apply isolation coating to separate aluminum and primed or galvanized steel surfaces at

points of contact with cementitious materials.

Maintain clearances between head members and structure to ensure that structural loads are not transmitted to frames.

Install hardware using templates provided by hardware supplier.

Install door operator system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including controls and control wiring.

Set tracks, header assemblies, operating brackets, rails and guides level and true to

location, with adequate anchorage for permanent support.

Install glass using dry glazing method.





3.3 SEALANT APPLICATION

Install perimeter sealant and backup materials, in compliance with requirements of Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

3.4 ADJUSTING

After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days of use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles), readjust door operators and controls for optimum, smooth operating condition and safety. Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts.

3.5 CLEANING

Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Exercise care to avoid damage to coatings.

Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces.

Wash exposed surfaces with mild solution of detergent and warm water, using soft, clean wiping cloths. Remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.

Remove excess sealant by moderate use of solvent, of type acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication requirements to Owner under provisions of Manufacturers Demonstration and Training.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Controls.

END OF SECTION



08 44 13 – GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

Aluminum curtain wall framing. Spandrel panels. Curtain wall glazing. Curtain wall sealants.


Division 1 - General Requirements. Sealants Section 07 92 00 Glazing Section 08 80 00 Painting Section 09 90 00

1.3 REFERENCES

.1 AAMA-CW-DG-1 Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual.

.2 AAMA-CW-10 Curtain Wall Manual #10 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site.

.3 AAMA-MCWM-1 Metal Curtain Wall Manual.

.4 AAMA-611-98 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

.5 ASTM-A653/A653M-11 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.6 ASTM-A924/A924M-10a Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.7 ASTM-A1008/A1008M-12a Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

.8 ASTM-B209M-95 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric].

.9 ASTM-B221M-96 Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.





WHITE OAKS

.10 ASTM-E283-04(2012) Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

.11 ASTM-E331-96 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

.12 ASTM-E413-87 (1994) el Standard Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

.13 CAN/CGSB-l.108-M89 Bituminous Solvent Type Paint.

.14 CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89 Structural Design of Glass for Buildings.

.15 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87 Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric Chemical Curing.

.16 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90 Multi-Component, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound.

.17 CAN/CGSB-51.10-92 Mineral Fibre Board Thermal Insulation.

.18 CAN/CSA-A440.2-09 Fenestration Energy Performance.

.19 CAN/CSA-G40.21-M92 Structural Quality Steels

.20 CAN/CSA-G164-M92 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.

.21 CSA-S136-94 Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.

.22 CAN3-S157-M83, Strength Design in Aluminum.

.23 CSA-W59.2-M1991, Welded Aluminum Construction.

.24 NFRC-100-2010 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors.

.25 NFRC-200-2010, Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence.

.26 NFRC-400-2010 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Air Leakage.

.27 SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council)

Paint 20 Zinc Rich Coating

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Vertical glazed aluminum curtain wall system includes thermally broken tubular aluminum sections with self-supporting framing, shop fabricated, factory prefinished, vision glass, insulated metal panel spandrel infill and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.

Assembled system to permit re-glazing of individual glass (and infill panel} units without requiring removal of structural mullion sections.






Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind, acting normal to plane of system as calculated in accordance with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Limit mullion deflection to L/175 in accordance with CAN3-S157.

Size glass units and glass dimensions to limits established in CAN/CGSB-12.20.

Provide system to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals: .1 Movement within system. .2 Movement between system and perimeter framing components. .3 Dynamic loading and release of loads. .4 Deflection of structural support framing.

Sound attenuation through wall system (exterior to interior): STC 45, measured in accordance with ASTM-E413.

Maximum air leakage rate for glazed aluminum curtain wall assemblies shall not exceed 0.3 L/s·m2 at a pressure of 75Pa as determined in accordance with ASTM-E283 or NFRC-400.

Maximum overall U-factor for glazed areas of aluminum curtain wall assemblies shall not exceed 2.04 W/m2•K as determined in accordance with CAN/CSA-A440.2.

Maximum overall U-factor for insulated spandrel areas of aluminum curtain wall assemblies shall not exceed 0.64 W/m2 ·K as determined in accordance with CAN/CSA-A440.2.

Vapour seal with interior atmospheric pressure of 2 5mm sp, 22°c, 40% RH: No failure.

Water leakage: none, when measured in accordance with ASTM-E331 with a pressure differential of 720Pa.

The system shall provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 95°C over a 12-hour period without causing detrimental effects to system components.

Drain water entering joints to the exterior by a weep drainage network, for condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system.

Maintain a continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout the assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. Position thermal insulation on exterior surface of air barrier and vapour retarder.

Ensure no vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system occur.





WHITE OAKS

1.6 SUBMITTALS

Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

Certification: .1 Submit signed report and documentation, prepared by an independent CSA

accredited agency, certifying compliance with specified thermal, optical, and air leakage requirements.

.2 Documentation shall include the following parameters for each glazed aluminum curtain wall system configuration: .1 Air leakage rate. .2 Overall coefficient of heat transfer (U-factor). .3 Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC). .4 Overall visible transmittance (VT). .5 Condensation resistance expressed as a Temperature Index (I).

.3 Certification shall be based on full size sample testing and measurement or computer simulation and calculation in accordance with referenced standards.

.4 Submit specified certification documentation together with Shop Drawings.

Shop Drawings: .1 Submit Shop Drawings for the work of this section. .2 Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,

adjacent construction, anticipated deflection under load, affected related Work, weep drainage network, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.

.3 Shop Drawings shall bear the seal and signature of a qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.

Samples: .1 Submit samples of spandrel glass colours for selection by the Consultant. .2 Submit two (2) 150 mm by 150 mm samples of spandrel glass as selected by the

Consultant. .3 Submit samples in sufficient size, illustrating prefinished aluminum surface,

specified glass units, insulated infill panels and glazing materials illustrating edge and corner conditions.

Product Data: .1 Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,

anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details. .2 Provide the manufacturers transmittance, reflectance, and thermal performance

data for insulating glass units.

Design Data: .1 Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, dimensional

limitations, special installation requirements. Structural calculations shall bear the seal and signature of qualified Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.





1.7 INSPECTION

Submit inspection company reports in accordance with Section 01 43 00 - Quality Assurance.

Submit reports on glazed aluminum curtain wall installation as it progresses.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

Convene one week before starting work of this section.


Handle work of this section in accordance with AAMA-CW-10.

Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Do not install sealants when ambient and surface temperature is less than 5C.

Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation until sealants cure.

1.11 SEQUENCING

Coordinate the work of this section with installation of fire stopping, air barrier placement and flashing placement.

1.12 QUALITY CONTROL

The curtain wall Subcontractor shall be an approved installer of the curtain wall manufacturers products and shall have a minimum of five years proven experience of satisfactory installation of comparable structures.

Submit, if requested, written list of successfully completed projects.

Installation shall be by competent tradesmen under the full-time experienced supervision of the curtain wall Subcontractor.

The curtain wall manufacturer shall provide on-site inspection and certification of the curtain wall installation accordance with Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.





WHITE OAKS

Provide for three site visits: at commencement, 35% completion, and 75% completion of the work of this section.

1.13 WARRANTY

Provide a warranty for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall in accordance with the Contract Requirements but for a period of five years.

The warranty shall cover materials and workmanship and shall include leakage and complete system failure.

The warranty shall cover the replacement of factory sealed insulating window units should cracking of glass or other breakdown or failure of glass units occur or should obstruction of vision develop due to dust or film forming on inner glass surfaces.

Warranties shall be issued to the Owner within two (2) Working Days following the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

Aluminum Curtain Wall - Exterior: manufactured and assembled by one of the companies listed below. .1 Alumicor Limited: ThermaWall 2600 Series Curtain Wall System. .2 Commdoor Aluminum: Series 58000 Curtain Wall System. .3 Oldcastle Building Envelope: Reliance-TC Curtain Wall.

2.2 MATERIALS

Extruded Aluminum: ASTM-B221M, AA6063T54 alloy.

Sheet Aluminum: ASTM-B209M.

Steel Sheet: .1 Cold rolled, commercial quality to ASTM-A1008/A1008M, matte finish. .2 Hot dip coating to ASTM-A924/ A924M, coating designation 2275 in accordance

with ASTM-A653/ A653M.

Steel Sections: CAN/CSA-G40.21 shaped to suit mullion sections.

Fasteners: stainless steel.

Bituminous Paint: CAN/CGSB-1.108, without thinner.

Glass: Refer to Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.





Sealants: .1 Perimeter Sealant:

.1 Three part epoxidized polyurethane to CAN/CGSB-19.24. .1 Tremco Construction Products: Dymeric. Colour selected by the

Consultant from the manufacturer's special colour range. .2 One-part neutral cure silicone to CAN/CGSB-19.13.

.1 Dow Corning Corporation: 795 Silicone Building Sealant.

.2 . 2 General Electric Canada Inc.: Silpruf Sealant. .2 Air Barrier Foam Sealant: Refer to Section 07 92 00 - Sealants. .3 Infill Panel Sealant: One-part neutral cure silicone to CAN/CGSB-19.13, custom

colour selected by the Consultant. .1 Dow Corning Corporation: 795 Silicone Building Sealant. .2 General Electric Canada Inc.: Silpruf Sealant.

2.3 COMPONENTS

Mullion Profile: 65mm nominal mullion width for vertical members and horizontal members; back unit minimum size of 102mm; thermally broken with interior tubular section insulated from exterior pressure plate; matching stops and pressure plate of sufficient size and strength to provide adequate bite on glass and infill panels; drainage holes, deflector plates and internal flashings to accommodate internal weep drainage system; internal mullion baffles to eliminate "stack effect" air movement within internal spaces.

Reinforced Mullion: 65 mm nominal mullion width of extruded aluminum cladding with internal reinforcement of shaped steel structural section.

Mullion Caps: extruded aluminum, 19 mm deep.

Spandrel Panels:

.1 Internally reinforced, permitting internal air movement to glazing space, outside air barrier line.

.2 Backpan: .1 Typical: 0.9mm galvanized sheet steel. .2 Exposed: 1.0mm prefinished aluminum to match mullion finish. Install

where backpan is exposed to view. .3 Insulation:

.1 Semi-rigid mineral fibre to CAN/CGSB-51.10, Type 1, Class 1, thickness as indicated.

.2 Thermal Resistance: RSI value of 0.65 per 25mm thickness.

.3 Acceptable Product: Roxul Inc., CavityRock MD. .4 Spandrel Glass: Refer to Section 08 80 00 – Glazing.

Insulated Aluminum Panels (IAP): Factory-laminated, comprised of exterior face and substrate, core, and interior face and substrate. .1 Exterior face: 1.3 mm thick aluminum. .2 Exterior substrate: 2.5 mm hardboard.





WHITE OAKS

.3 Core: rigid polyisocyanurate foam insulation, thickness as indicated.

.4 Interior substrate: 2.5 mm hardboard.

.5 Interior face: 1.3 mm thick aluminum.

Flashings: 0.7 mm thick aluminum, to match curtain wall mullion sections where exposed, secured with concealed fastening method.

Air Barrier: Refer to Section 07 27 00- Air Barriers.

2.4 FABRICATION

Site measure to confirm exact dimensions prior to fabrication of curtain wall.

Fabricate system components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.

Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Install anchors.

Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.

Prepare system components to receive exterior doors where shown, specified in Section 08120 - Aluminum Doors and Frames.

Reinforce framing members for external imposed loads.

Visible manufacturer's identification labels not permitted.

2.5 FINISHES

Finish: conform to AAMA-611.

Exterior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: clear anodic finish, designation AA-A41.

Exterior Exposed Insulated Metal Panel Surfaces: clear anodic finish, designation AA-A41.

Interior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: clear anodic finish, designation AA-A41.

Interior Surface of Insulated Metal Panel Surfaces: clear anodic finish, designation AA-A3.

Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20, zinc rich coating.

Concealed Steel Items: galvanized in accordance with CAN/CSA-G16 4 to 600 gm/m5.





2.6 QUALITY CONTROL- FABRICATION

Perform work in accordance with AAMA-MCWM-1 and AAMA-CW-DG-1.

Manufacturer Qualifications: company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with a minimum of five years documented experience.

Design structural support framing components to CAN3-S157 under the direct supervision of a qualified Professional Engineer experienced in the design of this work and licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.

Perform welding work in accordance with CSA-W59.2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.

Verify that wall openings and adjoining air barrier and vapour retarder materials are ready to receive the work of this section.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Install curtain wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten the system to the building structure. Clean weld surfaces; apply a protective primer to field welds and adjacent surfaces.

Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances and align with adjacent work.

Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.

Install flashings.

Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapour retarder materials.

Seal shim spaces at perimeter of assembly with air barrier foam sealant to maintain continuity of air barrier.

Install glazing using the curtain wall manufacturer’s standard exterior dry (gasket and gasket) glazing method specified in Section 08 80 00 - Glazing, as required to achieve performance criteria and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.





WHITE OAKS

Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria and in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

3.3 SITE TOLERANCES

Maximum variation from plumb: l.5mm/lm non-cumulative or 12mm/30m, whichever is less.

Maximum misalignment of two adjoining members abutting in plane: 0.8 mm.

Maximum sealant space between curtain wall and adjacent construction: 13 mm.

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

Curtain wall and glass product manufacturers shall provide field surveillance of the installation of their Products.

Monitor and report installation procedures, unacceptable conditions and deficiencies to the Consultant.

Refer to Quality Control article in Part 1 of this section. 3.5 CLEANING

Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces.

Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,

clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.

Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.6 PROTECTION

Protect finished work from damage in accordance with Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.


Inspection: An inspection and testing company selected by the Owner will inspect and report on the installation of the glazed aluminum curtain wall system.





The cost of inspection services will be paid from the cash allowance specified in Section

01 10 00 – General Instructions.

END OF SECTION



08 80 00 – GLAZING


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

Sealants Section 07 92 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13 Automatic Entrance Doors Section 08 42 29

1.2 REFERNCES .1 ASTM-D2240-97, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. .2 ASTM-E84-98, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. .3 ASTM-E330-97, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .4 CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass. .5 CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, Flat, Clear Float Glass. .6 CAN/CGSB-12.8-M90, Insulating Glass Units. .7 CAN/CGSB-12.9-M91, Spandrel Glass. .8 CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90, Wired Safety Glass. .9 CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89, Structural Design of Glass for Buildings. .10 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric Chemical Curing. .11 CAN/CSA-A440.2-09, Fenestration Energy Performance. .12 Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA), Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating

Glass Units, 1997. .13 Glass Association of North America (GANA), Glazing Manual, 2005. .14 NFRC-100-2010, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors. .15 NFRC-200-2010, Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible

Transmittance at Normal Incidence. .16 NFRC-400-2010, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Air Leakage.


Glass and glazing work of this section shall conform to good glazing practice as

described in the IGMA-North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use and the GANA Glazing Manual.

Submit all documentation specified to show that all Products used meet or exceed the

requirements of these Specifications.

All glass shall bear manufacturer's labels identifying glass type and thickness. Labels shall remain on glass until final cleaning.

Insulating glass manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of IGMA, and be

prepared to submit evidence of current membership to the Consultant on demand.



08 80 00 – GLAZING


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Glazing Subcontractor shall be member in good standing of the Architectural Glass & Metal Contractors Association or the Ontario Glass & Metal Association, and have a minimum of five years uninterrupted experience in successfully carrying out projects of similar size.

Energy performance calculations shall be prepared by qualified practitioners who are

prepared to submit evidence of their training and qualifications on demand.

Engage a Registered Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario to:

.1 Design the glass and glazing to meet the specified structural performance criteria in addition to the minimum requirements of the Ontario Building Code.

.2 Supervise the preparation of Shop Drawings and erection drawings.

.3 Carry out shop and field reviews to ensure the work complies with those drawings and with the structural performance criteria.

.4 The cost of the above engineering, inspections and letters shall be included as part of the cost for work under this section.


Structural Design of Glass: .1 Glass thickness: .1 Specified glass thicknesses are minimums. .2 Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service

conditions. .3 Provide glass lights in the thicknesses required to meet or exceed these

requirements, but not less than the minimum thickness specified. .2 Size glass units and glass thickness in accordance with CAN/CGSB-

12.20. .3 Size glass to withstand wind loads, dead loads and positive and negative

live loads as measured in accordance with ASTM-E330. .4 Limit glass deflection to 1/175 of span to a maximum of 15mm with full

recovery of glazing materials. .5 Probability of Breakage: .1 Vertical glazing – typical: 8 lights per 1000 for lights set vertically or not

more than 15 degrees off vertical. .2 Sloped glazing: 1 light per 1000 for lights set greater than 15 degrees off

vertical. .3 Glazing acting as guard: 1 light per 1000.

Thermal and Optical Performance: .1 Maximum centre-of-glass U-factor values for glazing Products shall be

as specified in Part 2 of this section and shall be determined in conformance with CAN/CSA-A440.2 and NFRC-100.

.2 Maximum solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) and minimum visible transmittance (VT) for glazing Products shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section and shall be determined in conformance with CAN/CSA-A440.2 and NFRC-200.



08 80 00 – GLAZING


1.5 SUBMITTALS

Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23.

Submit all documentation and samples for review by Consultants at one time, prior to ordering glass products.

Certification: .1 Submit signed report and documentation, prepared by an independent

CSA accredited agency, certifying compliance with specified thermal, optical, and air leakage requirements.

.2 Documentation shall include the following parameters for each exterior glazing system configuration:

.1 Centre-of-glass coefficient of heat transfer (U-factor).

.2 Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC).

.3 Visible transmittance (VT).

.3 Certification shall be based on full size sample testing and measurement or computer simulation and calculation in accordance with referenced standards.

.4 Submit specified certification documentation together with Shop Drawings.

Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit Shop Drawings for the work of this section.

.2 Shop Drawings shall include glass type, thicknesses, sizes, shapes, accessories, locations, and glazing methods.

.3 Shop Drawings shall include a glazing schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

.4 Shop Drawings shall identify the insulating glass unit (IGU) supplier.

.5 Shop Drawings shall bear the seal and signature of the Professional Engineer providing glazing design for the Glazing Subcontractor.

.6 Submit a General Review Commitment Certificate for the work of this section as may be required by the municipality or any authority having jurisdiction.

.7 Letter of Compliance: Submit the necessary documentation indicating compliance with the requirements of the Building Code and the approved drawings which formed the basis of the General Review Commitment Certificate.

Samples:

.1 Submit samples of spandrel glass colours for selection by the Consultant. Submit 300mm by 300mm size samples of each type of glass specified.

Product Data:

.1 Submit Product data for the work of this section.

.2 Provide the manufacturer’s transmittance, reflectance, and thermal performance data for insulating glass units.



08 80 00 – GLAZING


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.3 Submit letter from insulating glass fabricator stating current IGMA compliance number and identifying the types of edge construction covered by that number.

.4 Manufacturers’ certification: .1 The respective manufacturers of specified glass products shall

submit with the window and curtain wall assembly Shop Drawings, written certification stating that all glass and glazing materials and requirements as detailed and specified on the Shop Drawings have been reviewed and approved for use relative to their specific application, dimensional design and profile parameters, and conformance to all requirements as detailed and as specified in the Drawings and Specifications.

.2 Certification shall indicate the Shop Drawings reviewed by enumerating sheet number, dates and revisions.

.3 Identify any specified requirements that are in error or cannot legitimately be met, and provide alternates that meet the intent of the Specifications for the Consultant’s approval.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION

Do not install any glazing until all nearby welding, grinding, sandblasting, waterproofing, mortar work and acid etching are complete.

Schedule activities such as welding, sandblasting and grinding of steel or concrete, mortar work, acid etching and any other work harmful to glass, to be completed before start of glass installation. When such activities must be carried out in the vicinity of stored or installed glass, provide hoarding or other suitable protection recommended by Glazing Subcontractor.

Report to the Consultant in writing any defects in existing work, or unsatisfactory site conditions. Start no work until conditions are satisfactory. Starting work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions and surfaces.

Glaze with compounds, sealants, or tapes only when glazing surfaces are at

temperatures recommended by the tape or sealant manufacturer, and when the substrates are free of moisture.

When temperature of glazing surfaces is below that recommended by sealant

manufacturer, obtain Consultant’s approval for glazing methods and protective measures which are to be used under these conditions.

Cooperate with other Subcontractors and with framing Supplier(s) to ensure the work of

this section is completed as specified.



08 80 00 – GLAZING


1.7 WARRANTY

Warranty all glass to be free from defects in workmanship and materials of any kind for a period of ten (10) years.

Replace (including removal and installation) all glass found to be defective.


Float Glass:

.1 Conform to CAN/CGSB-12.3

.2 6mm thick unless specified or indicated otherwise.

Tempered Safety Glass (TGL): to CAN/CGSB-12.1, thickness as shown on Drawings and details, 6mm minimum thickness.

1. Type 2 - tempered. 2. Class B - Float glass. 3. Category 1.

Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM-D2240, to suit

glazing method, glass light weight and area.

Spacer Shims: Neoprene 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM-D2240, 75mm long by one half height of glazing stop by thickness to suit application. Self-adhesive on one face.

Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device,

10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM-D2240; coiled on release paper; size to suit glazing method, black colour.

Sealant: One-part neutral cure silicone to CAN/CGSB-19.13, custom colour selected by

the Consultant. .1 Dow Corning Corporation: 795 Silicone Building Sealant. .2 General Electric Canada Inc.: Silpruf Sealant.

.7 Spandrel Glass (SP): to CAN/CGSB-12.9, 6mm minimum thickness. 1. Type: 1-tempered. 2. Class: A-float. 3. Style: 3 - organic coated, and scrim backed. Allow for three colours to be

selected by the Consultant. 4. Glass:

a. AGC Flat Glass North America, Ltd.: Kristal Klear Low-Iron Glass. b. Cardinal Glass Industries: Low-Iron Float Glass. c. Guardian Industries: UltraWhite Low-Iron Glass. d. Pilkington Building Products: Optiwhite Low Iron Glass. e. PPG Canada Inc.: Starphire.



08 80 00 – GLAZING


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

5. Paint colour of back painted spandrel glass panel to be selected by the Consultant.

.8 Provide 6 tempered glass (inner and outer) in total 25mm thickness total as indicated in Section 08 42 29 for Automatic Entrance Doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Ensure fabricated glass will fit openings and that all required clearances to framing will be maintained.

Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. Ensure surfaces are free of moisture and frost.

Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect materials, before and after installation, from lime, mortar, water run-off from concrete or copper, careless handling of tools, weld spatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners, and other items that could damage the glass surfaces. Do not rely on use of protective plastic films to protect materials.


Install all materials according to manufacturers’ instructions and reviewed Shop Drawings

and best practices as described in IGMA and GANA glazing manuals. Ensure each material used is compatible with the material which it contacts.

Adjust operating sash before glazing. Glaze operating sash in the closed position. Sash to remain closed, and not be opened by any trade, until glazing materials have properly cured.

Provide specified edge and face clearances and glass bite.

Follow sealant manufacturer's recommendations for proper joint design, including use of

joint fillers, primers, and bond breakers, as required to suit jobsite conditions.

Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances from glass and adjacent surfaces at completion of glazing work.

Provide safety markings to installed glass by attaching streamers or tape to face of sash. Do not apply tape directly to the glass. Do not mark glass with paint or any other substance that is hard to remove or could leave permanent stains.



08 80 00 – GLAZING


Replace all defective glass products and glass damaged during installation at no cost to the Owner.

3.3 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)

Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.5mm above sight line.

Place setting blocks at 1/3 points, with edge block maximum 150mm from corners.

Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of light or unit.

Cut glazing tape to length and place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing, projecting 1.5 mm above sight line.

Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact.

Knife trim protruding tape.

3.4 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND GASKET)

.1 Glaze in accordance with window manufacturer's standard methods and as specified here. .1 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 6mm below sight line. .2 Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with sealant.

.3 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150mm from corners. .4 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape with sufficient pressure to

attain full contact at perimeter of glass unit. .5 Install removable stops with gasket inserted between glazing and applied stops.

3.5 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR - WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)

.1 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 6 mm below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with sealant.

.2 Apply heel bead of sealant along the intersection of the permanent stop with the frame ensuring full perimeter seal between the glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapour seal.

.3 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block a maximum of 150mm from corners. .4 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient

pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit. .5 Install removable stops with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops 6 mm

below sight line. .6 Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing and

6 mm below sight line. .7 Apply cap bead of sealant along void between stop and glazing, to uniform line, flush with

sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.6 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR - DRY METHOD (GASKET AND GASKET)

.1 Glaze in accordance with aluminum door, entry screen, and curtain wall, manufacturer's standard methods.

3.7 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)



08 80 00 – GLAZING


WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.1 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.5mm above sight line.

.2 Place setting blocks at 1/3 points, with edge block maximum 150mm from corners. .3 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of light or

unit. .4 Cut glazing tape to length and place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing, projecting 1.5

mm above sight line. .5 Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous

contact. .6 Knife trim protruding tape.

3.8 PROTECTION

Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect stored glass and installed

glass, from lime, mortar, water run-off from concrete or copper, weld spatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners, careless handling of tools, and any other activities by building trades that could permanently damage the glass surfaces.

Install protective cover to glazing where there is a high risk of damage. Use plywood, heavy Kraft paper or non-staining transparent plastic sheet. Do not let protective materials contact surface of glass. Consult with Glazing Subcontractor to determine appropriate protective measures.

Do not rely on use of adhesive plastic films to protect installed glass. When plastic sheeting is used, it must be transparent, suspended away from the surface of the glass, and be provided with adequate ventilation holes to prevent heat build-up.

3.9 GLAZING SCHEDULE

Hollow Metal Frames, Screens, and Windows: .1 Specified in Section 08 11 13.

.2 Glazed by this section. .3 Method (interior): Interior Dry (tape and tape).

.2 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls:

1. Specified in Section 08 44 13. 2. Glazed by Section 08 80 00, in accordance with curtain wall

manufacturer’s details. 3. Method: Exterior Dry (gasket and gasket).

.3 Aluminum Automatic Entrance Doors:

.1 Specified in Section 08 42 29. .2 Glazed by Section 08 80 00, in accordance with manufacturer's details.

.3 Method: Exterior Dry (gasket and gasket).

3.10 CLEANING

As work progresses clean all glass, including fittings. Remove all setting and glazing compounds from adjacent surfaces. Remove all finger and hand prints and other soil.

Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances during construction.



08 80 00 – GLAZING


Clean and wash glass by methods recommended by glass manufacturers.

All glass shall be cleaned immediately prior to the Consultant’s review for Substantial

Performance and again immediately prior to occupancy of the building by the Owner.

Remove all protective materials, glazing materials, and other deposits from finished surfaces.

Remove labels after work is complete.

Do not use vigorous cleaning methods. Avoid scratching glass.

Clean and restore stained or damaged surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. Replace glass if cleaning is impossible.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 22 00 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING



Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13 Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 Acoustic Ceilings Section 09 51 00

1.2 REFERENCES

.1 CSA S136 North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

.2 CAN/ULC-S101 Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials

.3 AISI North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Product Data

ASTM International .1 A653/A653M

Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

.2 A641/A641M Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

.3 A792/A792M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

.4 A1003 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members

.5 C645 Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members

.6 C754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products

.7 C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board

.8 C841 Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring

.9 C844 Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Base to Receive Gypsum Veneer Plaster

.10 C1002 Standard Specification for Steel-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs

.11 ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements

.12 ASTM E413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation

.13 E488 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.14 E1190 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members

Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI:

.1 Lightweight Steel Framing Technical Bulletin Volume 7, Number 1, Maximum Height Tables for Interior Non-Loadbearing Partitions.


Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: .1 For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-loadbearing interior

steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to CAN/ULS-S101.

.2 STC-Rated Assemblies: .1 For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413.


Handle and store materials carefully to prevent damage.

Obtain approval of proposed locations for stockpiling material. Provide any necessary temporary covers, skids and the like.

Do not install damaged or deteriorated material but remove from Site. 1.5 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES

Coordinate with other trades for the locations of items to be framed in and framed

around.

Co-ordinate with mechanical and electrical Trades to ensure that all services are installed prior to application of wall board.

Coordinate with mechanical and electrical trades for locations of access panels. Install access doors and panels supplied by those trades.

Co-ordinate with forces installing insulation and vapour barrier in exterior soffits.






Metal framing shall be as manufactured by Bailey Metal Products or approved alternate;

to ASTM C645.

Metal Studs and Track: minimum 0.455mm (18 mils) galvanized steel; depths as indicated on drawings, [41mm] [64mm] [92mm] [152mm].

Metal Furring Channels: minimum 0.455 (18 mils) sheet galvanized steel channel and

accessories as manufactured by Bailey Metal Products, or approved alternate; to ASTM C645.

Cold Rolled Furring Channel: 20mm, x 12.7mm zinc coated channel weighing minimum

0.446 kg per m.

Cold Rolled Carrying Channel: 38mm x 15mm zinc coated channel weighing min 0.707 kg per m.

Hanger wire: minimum 3.77mm (9ga) galvanized steel wire.

Tie Wire: minimum 1.5mm (16 ga) galvanized soft annealed steel.

CGC Brand Screws (or approved equal) of type recommended by the board

manufacturer.

Thermal Break: Permanent adhesive faced rubberized cork, 3 mm thick by width of stud on channel to be used between masonry in exterior wall and metal furring channels.

Ceiling Anchors: Self drilling tie wire anchors, Phillips "Red Head" T-32 or approved

equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERALS

Provide plumb, straight, level, rigid, and secure installation. Failing to achieve this result shall be cause for rejection and reinstallation of this work.

Where walls run parallel and under steel joists, the joists shall be framed both sides and enclosed with gypsum board to provide sound barrier between rooms.

3.2 CEILING SUSPENSION

Do not regard grillage system indicated on drawings as exact or complete. The Specification for metal framing contained in CGC Gypsum Construction Handbook and





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

ASTM C840 shall govern installation conditions not covered by this Specification. The more stringent specifications shall apply.

Hangers: .1 Install hangers for suspended wallboard ceilings to support the grillage

independent of walls, columns, pipes, ducts and the like. Erect plumb and securely anchor to the structure. Submit details of proposed method to the Consultant for approval. If so requested, test hangers to prove that anchorage is adequate to support the proposed loading. Erect hangers plumb and securely anchor to structural steel or support channels fastened to structural steel (DO NOT FASTEN TO STEEL DECK).

.2 Space hangers at 1200mm maximum o.c. along the carrying channels and not more than 150mm from ends (or as required to conform with fire tested assemblies where applicable).

Carrying Channels:

.1 Space channels at 1200mm maximum o.c. (or as required to conform with fire tested assemblies where applicable).

.2 Run channels transversely to structural framing members.

.3 Where splices are necessary, lap members at least 200mm and wire each end with two laps; avoid clustering or lining up splices.

.4 Attach to hangers by bending hanger under runner and securely wire in place with a saddle tie.

.5 Provide 25mm clearance between channels and abutting walls and partitions.

Cross Furring .1 Install drywall screw channels transversely across runner channels, joists or

other supports. .2 Space drywall screw channels at 600mm o.c. and not more than 150mm from

perimeter walls. Provide 25mm clearance between channels and abutting walls and partitions. Use closer spacing if so noted on drawings.

.3 Secure drywall screw channels to each support with approved clip or attachment; splice joints by messing minimum 200mm and tying channels together with double strand 16 gauge tie wire.

.4 Level drywall screw channels to a maximum tolerance of 4mm over 3600mm.

.5 Drywall shall not be fixed directly to open web steel joists and the like. Provide cross furring as specified.

Openings .1 Frame openings with suitable channels; check clearances with respective

Trades. Provide support for edges of boards at all cut-outs and openings in ceilings.

.2 Provide all additional hangers and supports for fixtures as required.

.3 Provide additional hangers and framing for enclosure of radiant heating panels.

Bulkheads .1 Fur out bulkheads in areas indicated and as required to conceal mechanical,

electrical or other services in rooms where drywall finishes are scheduled, and elsewhere if called for on drawings.

.2 Use methods and materials as previously specified in this section.





3.3 STEEL STUD SYSTEM (PARTITION) INSTALLATION

Conform to the guidelines for metal framing contained in The Gypsum Construction Handbook, CSA A.82.31, and these specifications. The most stringent requirements shall apply.

Attach metal runners at floor and ceiling to structural elements with suitable fasteners located 50mm from each end and spaced 600 mm. o.c. with toggle or molly bolts spaced 400mm o.c.

Position studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling runners, and spaced 400mm o.c.,

unless otherwise noted on drawings. When necessary, splice studs with 200mm nested lap and one positive attachment per stud flange. Place studs in direct contact with door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition corners and existing construction elements.

Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls install rubberized cork stip

between studs and wall surfaces to provide thermal break.

Anchor studs for shelf-walls and those adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections and corners to ceiling and floor runner flanges with an approved crimping tool. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door or borrowed-light frames by bolt or screw attachment. Over metal door and borrowed-light frames, place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner, with a web-flange bent at each end, and secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header.

Stiffen partitions exceeding 3m long or 2.7m high with 19mm. cold rolled channels. Fix

horizontally and provide the number of rows necessary to ensure a rigid installation. Provide other partition reinforcing necessary to support wall hung components, cupboards, closets and the like. Use 2 studs at jambs of openings and corners.

Where horizontal runs of service lines are to be installed within the partition, erect studs

with web openings aligned.

Provide reinforcing and necessary stiffeners to support hollow metal frames and screens. Reinforcing to be capable of supporting screens rigidly and solid without deflection.

3.4 CHASE WALL INSTALLATION

Align two parallel rows of floor and ceiling runners spaced apart as indicated. Attach to

concrete slabs with concrete stub nails or power driven anchors 600 mm o.c. Attach to suspended ceilings with toggle or molly bolts 400mm o.c. Attach to wood framing with suitable fasteners 600mm o.c.

Align metal studs vertically in runners, 200mm o.c. with flanges in the same direction and with studs on opposite sides of chase directly across from each other. Anchor studs to floor and ceiling runner flanges with an approved metal crimping tool.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Cut cross bracing to be placed between rows of studs from gypsum panels, 400mm high by chase wall width. Space braces at quarter points not to exceed 600mm o.c. vertically and attach to stud webs with six 25mm screws 200mm o.c. maximum on each side.

Bracing with 64mm metal studs may be used in place of gypsum panels. Anchor web at

each end of metal brace to stud web with two 10mm pan head screws. When chase wall studs are not opposite, install metal stud cross braces 400mm o.c. horizontally and securely anchor each end to a continuous horizontal 64mm runner screw-attached to chase wall studs with the cavity.

Adapt cross bracing as necessary to avoid interference with service.

3.5 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION

Direct Furring Channel Attachment - Attach metal furring channels, vertically or

horizontally spaced 400mm o.c. to masonry or concrete surfaces with hammer-set ro power-driven fasteners or concrete stub nails staggered 600mm o.c. on opposite flanges. Nest channels 200mm at splices and anchor with two fasteners in each wing. Where furring channel is installed directly to exterior wall, install thermal break strip between furring channel and wall. For horizontally placed channels attach maximum 100mm from floor and ceiling.

Bracketed Furring Channel Attachment: .1 Attach adjustable wall furring brackets with serrated edges up, 900mm o.c.

horizontally, 1200mm o.c. vertically, within 100mm of columns or other abutting construction, within 150mm of floor and ceiling, and as required above and below openings. Use 50mm cut nails in mortar joints of brick or clay tile or concrete block, or in field of lightweight aggregate blocks; use 16mm concrete stub nails or power driven nails or other suitable fasteners in monolithic concrete. Place fastener in top hole of bracket.

.2 Lay cold-rolled channels horizontally with flanges down, on furring brackets, plumb with other channels, and tie with double strand 16 ga. or triple strand 18 ga. wire at each junction with cold rolled channel.

Free Standing Furring - In locations where wall furring is indicated as self-supporting, use steel studs and furring channels installed to provide a rigid frame to receive wall board.

3.6 CONSTRUCTION OF SOUND ATTENUATED PARTITIONS

Where sound insulated drywall partitions are indicated on the drawings, provide double stud wall, offsetting studs and wrapping acoustic insulation between studs.





3.7 CONSTRUCTION OF SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

Apply gypsum panels of maximum practical length with long dimension at right angles to drywall furring channels. Position end joints over furring channel web and staggered in adjacent rows.

Fasten panels to drywall furring channels with screws spaced a maximum of 300mm o.c. in field of panels and along abutting ends and edges.

Provide framing and drywall finish in stairwells, where required to enclose underside of stairs and landings.

Where noted on plans, provide bulkheads with steel framing and drywall finish.

END OF SECTION



09 29 00 – GYPSUM BOARD



Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13 Acoustic Ceilings Section 09 51 00 Painting and Coating Section 09 90 00

1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM International:

.1 ASTM C1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board

.2 ASTM C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum board

.3 ASTM C1629 Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fibre-Reinforced Cement Panels

CAN/ULC-S101 Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building

Construction and Materials

Gypsum Association: .1 GA-214 Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish .2 GA-216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products

The Gypsum Construction Handbook - CGC Inc.


Handle and store materials carefully to prevent damage. Materials must be delivered to site in their original, unopened packages.

Obtain approval of proposed locations for stockpiling material. Materials must be stored in an enclosed shelter providing protection from exposure to the elements. Provide any necessary temporary covers, skids and the like.

Store all panels flat.

Do not install damaged or deteriorated material but remove from Site.

Materials as delivered shall bear manufacturer's name, brand name of material and where applicable, ULC designation.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Do not apply gypsum board or joint filler to surfaces that are damp or contain frost.

During gypsum panel application and joint finishing, temperatures within work areas shall be within the range 12oC. to 25oC.

Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture 1.5 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES

Co-ordinate with mechanical and electrical Trades to ensure that all services are installed

prior to application of wall board.

Coordinate with mechanical and electrical trades for locations of access panels. Install access doors and panels supplied by those trades.

Co-ordinate with forces installing insulation and vapour barrier in exterior soffits. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

All materials to conform to ASTM C1396 unless specified otherwise. Except where noted

otherwise, products listed herein are produced by Canadian Gypsum Company (CGC). Equivalent products from Georgia Pacific (GP) and Certainteed will be accepted, subject to acceptance of equivalency by the Consultant.

Gypsum panels: .1 Typical panels to be 16mm thick abuse resistant and mould resistant, to ASTM

C1629. Sheetrock Mold Tough Abuse Resistant Firecode Core gypsum panels or GP ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard Abuse Resistant gypsum board.

.2 Panels in gypsum board ceilings at high ceilings may be 13mm thick mould resistant panels; CGC Sheetrock Mold Tough or GP ToughRock Mold-Guard.

Cement board: "Durock" Next Generation cement board, by CGC

Exterior Sheathing: 16 mm, Type X, CGC “Securock” glass-mat exterior sheathing, DensGlass by Georgia Pacific, or GlasRoc Sheathing by CertainTeed Gypsum Canada Inc.

Metal Studs and Channels: minimum 0.455mm (26 ga) galvanized steel as

manufactured by Bailey Metal Products or approved alternate; to ASTM C645.

Metal Furring Channels: minimum 0.455 (26ga) sheet galvanized steel channel and accessories as manufactured by Bailey Metal Products, or approved alternate; to ASTM C645.





Cold Rolled Furring Channel: 20mm, x 12.7mm zinc coated channel weighing minimum

0.446 kg per m.

Cold Rolled Carrying Channel: 38mm x 15mm zinc coated channel weighing min 0.707 kg per m.

Cold Rolled Carrying Channel: 28 ga. galvanized steel with perforated flanges; one piece

per location.

Control Joint: CGC No. 093.

Hanger wire: minimum 3.77mm (9ga) galvanized steel wire.

Tie Wire: minimum 1.5mm (16 ga) galvanized soft annealed steel.

Screws: CGC Brand Screws (or approved equal) of type recommended by the board manufacturer.

Thermal Break: Permanent adhesive faced rubberized cork, 3 mm thick by width of stud

on channel to be used between masonry in exterior wall and metal furring channels. Joint Treatment Material:

.1 Joint compound, topping compound, laminating compound; to ASTM C474 and C475.

.2 Use material recommended by board and tape manufacturer for the proposed use.

.3 CGC Sheetrock or Durabond Setting-Type, for use with CGC fibreglass drywall tape.

Reinforcing Tape: .1 Paper or fibreglass mesh tape, as recommended by the panel manufacturer for

the panel type.

Finish materials .1 Over surface of glass mat faced boards, use level 5 finisher such as CGC Tuff

Hide.

Acoustic sealant: Quietseal Pro as manufactured by Quietrock, or equivaltent as manufactured by CGC, Tremco or Presstite Division of Interchemical Corporation for acoustic partitions.

Acoustic Insulation: AFB acoustic fire batt by Roxul or Thermafiber SAFB Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets (unfaced) from Owens Corning, to thickness shown on drawings, and as required to obtain required S.T.C. rating.

Ceiling Anchors: Self drilling tie wire anchors, Phillips "Red Head" T-32 or approved equal.

Drywall Pre-finished Reveal Mouldings: Fry Reglet, reveal mouldings and “F” reveal

mouldings, 13mm wide, with baked on finish, as follows:





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.1 DRM-625-50 and DRM-50-50

.2 DRMF-625-50 and DRMF-50-50

.3 Aluminum alloy 6063 T5 with chemical conversion coating.

.4 Colour to be selected by the Consultant.

Access Panels: Refer to mechanical and electrical.

Stainless Steel Corner Guards: 16 gauge stainless steel wall guards in satin finish. Size: flange width of 25mm, height to be minimum 1525mm. Provide concealed fastening only. Adhere corner guard to wall. Acceptable product: wallguard.com or equivalent product. Supply and install 20 corner guards minimum with locations to be confirmed by the Consultant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

Provide plumb, straight, level, rigid, and secure installation. Failing to achieve this result shall be cause for rejection and reinstallation of this work.

Conform to The Gypsum Construction Handbook, ASTM C840, and these specifications. The most stringent requirements shall apply.

Where walls run parallel and under steel joists, the joists shall be enclosed both sides with gypsum board to provide sound barrier between rooms. Fill with minimum 100 mm acoustic batt insulation.

Install access panels supplied by mechanical and electrical contractors. Rigidly secure

panel frames to furring or framing systems. 3.2 CEILING SUSPENSION

Do not regard grillage system indicated on drawings as exact or complete. The

Specification for metal framing contained in CGC Gypsum Construction Handbook and ASTM C840 shall govern installation conditions not covered by this Specification. The more stringent specifications shall apply.

Hangers .1 Install hangers for suspended wallboard ceilings to support the grillage

independent of walls, columns, pipes, ducts and the like. Erect plumb and securely anchor to the structure. Submit details of proposed method to the Consultant for approval. If so requested, test hangers to prove that anchorage is adequate to support the proposed loading. Erect hangers plumb and securely anchor to structural steel or support channels fastened to structural steel (DO NOT FASTEN TO STEEL DECK).

.2 Space hangers at 1200mm maximum o.c. along the carrying channels and not more than 150mm from ends (or as required to conform with fire tested assemblies where applicable.





Carrying Channels

.1 Space channels at 1200mm maximum o.c. (or as required to conform with fire tested assemblies where applicable).

.2 Run channels transversely to structural framing members.

.3 Where splices are necessary, lap members at least 200mm and wire each end with two laps; avoid clustering or lining up splices.

.4 Attach to hangers by bending hanger under runner and securely wire in place with a saddle tie.

.5 Provide 25mm clearance between channels and abutting walls and partitions.

Cross Furring .1 Install drywall screw channels transversely across runner channels, joists or

other supports. .2 Space drywall screw channels at 600mm o.c. and not more than 150mm from

perimeter walls. Provide 25mm clearance between channels and abutting walls and partitions. Use closer spacing if so noted on drawings.

.3 Secure drywall screw channels to each support with approved clip or attachment; splice joints by messing minimum 200mm and tying channels together with double strand 16 gauge tie wire.

.4 Level drywall screw channels to a maximum tolerance of 4mm over 3600mm.

.5 Drywall shall not be fixed directly to open web steel joists and the like. Provide cross furring as specified.

Opening .1 Frame openings with suitable channels; check clearances with respective

Trades. Provide support for edges of boards at all cut-outs and openings in ceilings.

.2 Provide all additional hangers and supports for fixtures as required.

.3 Provide additional hangers and framing for enclosure of radiant heating panels.

Bulkheads .1 Furr out bulkheads in areas indicated and as required to conceal mechanical,

electrical or other services in rooms where drywall finishes are scheduled, and elsewhere if called for on drawings.

.2 Use methods and materials as previously specified in this section. Drywall panels at bulkheads shall be as specified for walls.

3.3 STEEL STUD SYSTEM (PARTITION) INSTALLATION

Conform to the guidelines for metal framing contained in The Gypsum Construction Handbook, CSA A.82.31, and these specifications. The most stringent requirements shall apply.

Attach metal runners at floor and ceiling to structural elements with suitable fasteners located 50mm from each end and spaced 600 mm. o.c. with toggle or molly bolts spaced 400mm o.c.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Position studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling runners, and spaced 400mm o.c., unless otherwise noted on drawings. When necessary, splice studs with 200mm nested lap and one positive attachment per stud flange. Place studs in direct contact with door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition corners and existing construction elements. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls install rubberized cork stip between studs and wall surfaces to provide thermal break.

Anchor studs for shelf-walls and those adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections and corners to ceiling and floor runner flanges with an approved crimping tool. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door or borrowed-light frames by bolt or screw attachment. Over metal door and borrowed-light frames, place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner, with a web-flange bent at each end, and secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header.

Stiffen partitions exceeding 3m long or 2.7m high with 19mm. cold rolled channels. Fix horizontally and provide the number of rows necessary to ensure a rigid installation. Provide other partition reinforcing necessary to support wall hung components, cupboards, closets and the like. Use 2 studs at jambs of openings and corners.

Where horizontal runs of service lines are to be installed within the partition, erect studs with web openings aligned.

Provide reinforcing and necessary stiffeners to support hollow metal frames and screens. Reinforcing to be capable of supporting screens rigidly and solid without deflection.

3.4 CHASE WALL INSTALLATION

Align two parallel rows of floor and ceiling runners spaced apart as indicated. Attach to

concrete slabs with concrete stub nails or power driven anchors 600 mm o.c. Attach to suspended ceilings with toggle or molly bolts 400mm o.c. Attach to wood framing with suitable fasteners 600mm o.c.

Align metal studs vertically in runners, 200mm o.c. with flanges in the same direction and with studs on opposite sides of chase directly across from each other. Anchor studs to floor and ceiling runner flanges with an approved metal crimping tool.

Cut cross bracing to be placed between rows of studs from gypsum panels, 400mm high by chase wall width. Space braces at quarter points not to exceed 600mm o.c. vertically and attach to stud webs with six 25mm screws 200mm o.c. maximum on each side.

Bracing with 64mm metal studs may be used in place of gypsum panels. Anchor web at each end of metal brace to stud web with two 10mm pan head screws. When chase wall studs are not opposite, install metal stud cross braces 400mm o.c. horizontally and securely anchor each end to a continuous horizontal 64mm runner screw-attached to chase wall studs with the cavity.

Adapt cross bracing as necessary to avoid interference with service.





3.5 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION

Direct Furring Channel Attachment - Attach metal furring channels, vertically or horizontally spaced 400mm o.c. to masonry or concrete surfaces with hammer-set ro power-driven fasteners or concrete stub nails staggered 600mm o.c. on opposite flanges. Nest channels 200mm at splices and anchor with two fasteners in each wing. Where furring channel is installed directly to exterior wall, install thermal break strip between furring channel and wall. For horizontally placed channels attach maximum 100mm from floor and ceiling.

Bracketed Furring Channel Attachment

.1 Attach adjustable wall furring brackets with serrated edges up, 900mm o.c. horizontally, 1200mm o.c. vertically, within 100mm of columns or other abutting construction, within 150mm of floor and ceiling, and as required above and below openings. Use 50mm cut nails in mortar joints of brick or clay tile or concrete block, or in field of lightweight aggregate blocks; use 16mm concrete stub nails or power driven nails or other suitable fasteners in monolithic concrete. Place fastener in top hole of bracket.

.2 Lay cold-rolled channels horizontally with flanges down, on furring brackets, plumb with other channels, and tie with double strand 16 ga. or triple strand 18 ga. wire at each junction with cold rolled channel.

Free Standing Furring - In locations where wall furring is indicated as self-supporting, use steel studs and furring channels installed to provide a rigid frame to receive wall board.

3.6 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD

Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work are approved.

Apply all gypsum board parallel to framing. Position all ends over studs. Use maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together.

Stagger joints on opposite sides of partition.

Apply single, double or triple layers of gypsum board to metal furring as indicated using screw fasteners.

Maximum screw spacing for single-ply gypsum board and face ply of 2-ply gypsum board

to be 300mm o.c.

Maximum spacing of screws for base-ply of 2-ply gypsum board over steel framing to be 300mm o.c. along edges of the gypsum board and 600mm o.c. into stud or furring channel in the field of the gypsum board.

Use cement board as backer board wherever tile is to be installed to walls of shower

partitions.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

3.7 ADHESIVE APPLICATION

Where gypsum board is called to be laminated to masonry walls, application shall conform to Gypsum Association Publication GA-216-2013, Section 11, “Adhesive Application of Gypsum Panel Products to Interior Masonry, Concrete, or Brick Walls”.

Do taping and filling, as specified below, for paint finish.

3.8 CONSTRUCTION OF SOUND ATTENUATED PARTITIONS

Where sound insulated drywall partitions are indicated on the drawings, provide double stud wall, offsetting studs and wrapping acoustic insulation between studs. Apply one layer of specified soundproof wallboard, on both faces of wall.

Install sound attenuation batts to completely fill void between studs.

A 6mm continuous bead of acoustical sealant around perimeter of wall at web of top and bottom tracks and end studs. Lay gypsum board into position forcing caulking bead to fill space between gypsum board and structure.

Seal full perimeter for cut-outs around electrical boxes and ducts with acoustical sealant.

3.9 CONSTRUCTION OF SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

Apply gypsum panels of maximum practical length with long dimension at right angles to

drywall furring channels. Position end joints over furring channel web and staggered in adjacent rows.

Closely fit together, ends and edges but not forced together.

Fasten panels to drywall furring channels with screws spaced a maximum of 300mm o.c. in field of panels and along abutting ends and edges.

Provide control joints in ceilings as noted but maximum 7500 mm o.c. each way or at change in direction.

Provide framing and drywall finish in stairwells, where required to enclose underside of stairs and landings.

Where noted on plans, provide bulkheads with steel framing and drywall finish.

3.10 WALL FURRING

Apply gypsum panels parallel to framing. Position all edges over drywall furring channels

with joints staggered in successive courses.

Use maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together.





Fasten panels to channels with screws spaced a maximum 300mm oc.

3.11 APPLICATION OF ACCESSORIES

Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length

pieces where practical. Joints shall be made tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured.

Reinforce all vertical and horizontal exterior corners with cornerbead fastened with screws 200mm oc on both flanges along entire length of bead.

Where assembly terminates against masonry or other dissimilar material, apply ledge trim over panel edge and fasten with screws or staples spaced 300 mm. oc.

Power drive screws at least 9mm. from edges or ends of panel to provide uniform dimple

0.8mm deep. Where recessed reglets are noted on drawings, built into drywall assembly to provide

edges flush with drywall. 3.12 TAPING AND FILLING

Finish in accordance with GA-214, as follows:

.1 Exposed gypsum board to Level 5 finish, suitable for finish painting with semi-glass and gloss coatings. Use full skim coat of joint compound over entire surface to achieve smooth and uniform appearance.

.2 Concealed gypsum board to minimum Level 1 finish. Where a fire-resistance rating is required, finishing level must conform to ULC rated assembly design.

Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of self-adhering cross-fibre fibreglass joint tape and joint compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out into panel faces. Note: If self-adhering joint tape is not used, taping compound will be required.

Be sure drywall surface is dry and clean.

Center and apply CGC Fiberglass Drywall Tape directly over joint, pressing firmly to ensure even adherence to surface. Eliminate wrinkles by pressing entire length of tape with drywall knife. Avoid overlapping tape at intersections. Cut tape with drywall knife.

Cover taped joint with a layer of setting-type joint compound, forcing compound through the tape with a drywall knife or trowel to completely fill and level the joint. Allow joint to dry, and sand lightly. Apply second coat of setting-type or drying-type joint compound, feathering approximately 50mm beyond first coat. Let dry and sand lightly as required.

To finish inside corners, bend tape with to form a “U” shape. Apply tape along one side

only. Press tape into corner for approximately 30mm, then apply the other side. Work downward, alternating sides in this manner until tape is pressed firmly in place. Apply setting-type joint compound as specified above, first on one side for the length of the corner and then repeating the process on the second side.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Finish fastener heads, corner bead and trim as required with two to three coats of joint

compound, feathered out onto panel faces and sanded to a smooth surface.

Provide skim coat over entire face of boards to ensure smooth surface for painting.

Fill screw head depressions to bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after painting is completed.

Sand dried taping compound lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections.

Avoid sanding adjacent surface of board.

Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects and ready for painting.

Painting shall be done in accordance with Section 09 90 00

END OF SECTION



09 30 13 – CERAMIC TILING


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

Substrate preparation Grouting control joints in tiling substrate Crack-Isolation membrane system (CIM) Cement mortar-bed, screed and levelling coats Thin-Set Mortar Bond Coat Installation Systems, adhesives, mortars and grouts Sealing tiling movement joints and accessory contours Sealing penetrations All tiling work indicated on drawings and schedules.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00

1.3 REFERENCES

ISO 13006 Ceramic tiles- Definitions, Classification, Characteristics and Marking

American National Standards Institute .1 ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 American National Specifications for the Installation of

Ceramic Tile (Compilation). .2 ANSI A137.1 Specifications for Ceramic Tile

ASTM International .1 ASTM C 50 Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .2 ASTM C 847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath.

Canadian General Standards Board .1 CGSB 71-GP-22M: Tile, Ceramic .2 CGSB 71-GP-30M: Adhesive, Organic, for Installation of Ceramic Wall Tile .3 CAN/CGSB-75.1M: Adhesive, Epoxy and Modified Mortar Systems, for

Installation of Quarry Tiles

Canadian Standards Association .1 CAN/CSA A-3000 Cementitious Materials Compendium

Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC): .1 Specification Guide 09 30 00/ Tile Installation Manual 2012-2014 .2 TTMAC Hard Surface Maintenance Guide





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00

Submittal Procedures Submit manufacturer's product data sheets on each product to be used, including: .1 Storage and handling instructions .2 Preparation instructions .3 Installation instructions and recommendations

Submit 4 random samples of each colour of ceramic tile to be used on this project; clearly identify with manufacturer's name, colour number and project number. Do not proceed with work until samples have been approved by Consultant.

Closeout Submittals: .1 Submit three (3) copies of TTMAC Hard Surface Maintenance Guide, for

inclusion in maintenance manuals. .2 Provide document listing specific warnings of any maintenance products or

practises that could possible damage the finished work.

Spare Materials: Provide approximately 4.5m2 (50 sq.ft.) of each floor tile for maintenance purposes; confirm quantities with Consultant. Tiles shall be boxed, labelled, and stored where directed by the Owner.

1.5 PROTECTION

Protect Work of this Section against damage by other trades for minimum 72 hours after application by prohibiting passage of traffic over tile.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

Installer to have membership in good standing with the TTMAC; must have 10 years experience in the Work of this Section. Employ skilled mechanics trained and experienced in tile work. If requested, submit references detailing experience in at least three projects of similar scope.


Coordinate delivery of materials. Ensure materials are delivered in manufacturer's unopened containers, fully identified with name, brand, type, and grade.

Protect materials from contamination, dampness, freezing, or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Broken, cracked, chipped, stained, or damaged tile will be rejected, whether built-in or not. Protect mortar and grout materials against moisture, soiling, or staining.





Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Comply with manufacturer's requirements for environmental conditions before, during, and after installation.

Do not begin installation until building is completely enclosed and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity conditions consistent with "after occupancy" conditions for a minimum of 2 weeks.

Maintain continuous and uniform building temperatures of not less than 12(C or more than 38(C during installation and for at least 7 days after completion of installation.

Ventilate spaces receiving tile in accordance with material manufacturer's' instructions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE MATERIALS

Porcelain Floor Tile (POR OR NEW POR): meeting requirements of ANSI-A137.1 or ISO-13006, 300mm by 600mm, square edges, slip resistant surface.

.1 Acceptable product: .1 POR or POR1 – Regal Series. .2 Supplied by Olympia Tile/Stone International Inc. .3 Colour: Charcoal Black Flamed. .4 Size: 300mm by 600mm. .5 Installation: Staggered. .6 Base: Matching straight 100mm by 300mm base with

bullnosed top edge.

2.2 INSTALLATION SYSTEM MATERIALS

Installation system materials and sealers to be the products of one manufacturer, who shall warrant the system against failure.

Thin-set Mortar: .1 At tile sizes 305 x 305mm and smaller:

.1 single component, polymer-modified premium tile mortar, conforming to ANSI-A118.4 and A118.11, ISO 13077 class C2ES; Ultraflex 3 by Mapei Canada Inc., Laticrete 254 Platinum by Laticrete International Inc., or Ardex X5 by Ardex Engineered Cements.

.2 At tile sizes over 305mm in any dimension:





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.1 Non-slump, polymer-modified premium large format tile mortar, conforming to ANSI-A118.4 and A118.11, ISO 13077 class C2TES1P1; Ultraflex LFT by Mapei Canada Inc., Laticrete 4-XLT by Laticrete International Inc., or Ardex X77 by Ardex Engineered Cements.

Dry-Set Setting Mortar: .1 Premium floor and wall dry-set mortar, complying with ANSI A118.1 and ISO

13007 C1; Mapei "Kerabond", or Ardex X77 Microtec. .2 For installations over young concrete.

Grout:

.1 At ceramic tile: Conforming to ANSI A118.6, polymer-modified grout, “Ultracolor Plus” with “BioBlock”, by Mapei Canada Inc., or 1500 Sanded Grout with Microban, by Laticrete, or Ardex FL. Grout to be fast setting, polymer modified cementitious grout.

Grout Additives: To be supplied by grout supplier, Plasti-joint by Mapei or 1776 Grout

Enhancer by Laticrete, or approved equal.

Dry Cure Grout: L & M Dry Cure, by D.A. White & Co. Ltd., or Dry-Mix Blended by Gum-It Products Co. Ltd., or Joint Filler by H.B. Fuller or Flextile Wall Grout. Coloured acid resistant grout. Grout colour to match tile.

Levelling coat: Self-curing liquid latex, Portland cement based floor levelling product by

Mapei, Laticrete, or Ardex. Levelling coat must be compatible with mortar being used, and approved by the manufacturer for the specific application.

Sealants: Conform to Section 07 92 00.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

Accessory products must be compatible with all other products used in tile installation

system. Confirm compatibility with product manufacturers.

Anti-Fracture Membrane: .1 Laticrete two component anti-fracture membrane “Blue 92”, or Mapei Mapeguard

2 with Mapei SM Primer , or Ardex 8+9.

Waterproofing: .1 seamless, load-bearing 2 component, trowel-applied Acrylic/Cement mortar and

fiber-mesh reinforcement waterproofing system, to ANSI A118.10 .2 Laticrete 9235 waterproofing membrane, Mapei “Mapelastic 315”, or Ardex 8+9

with Ardex SK Mesh.

Junction Strips: .1 Schluter Systems products, for junctions with other floor coverings. Finish: Satin

finish anodized aluminum .2 Profiles as follows:

.1 Reno-TK: Sloped transition to 6mm flooring; i.e. Tile/Carpet

.2 Reno-V: Sloped transition to low flooring





.3 Schiene: Tile edge at surface of equal height

.4 Deco: Transition at tile and hard surface of equal height

.5 Reno-ramp: Ramped transition at Tile/Concrete

Control Joints: Schluter Systems “Dilex-AKWS” movement joint, 6mm wide, with aluminum anchors perforated for bonding into mortar and PVC movement material forming joint surface. Colour to be selected by Consultant, to match grout as closely as possible.

Joint Sealants: Conform to Section 07 92 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION AND EXAMINATION

Coordinate locations and depths of any slab depressions required for the work of this section. If any discrepancies exist between the drawings and the recommended installation methods of the TTMAC, the manufacturers, or these specifications, notify the Consultant immediately, in writing.

Examine surfaces prepared to receive installation of tiling. If conditions are not acceptable, report to Consultant, in writing. Commencement of installation of any part of the Work of this section will be construed as acceptance of existing conditions.

Ensure concrete substrate is fully cured prior to commencing tile installation; wait a minimum of 60 days after placement of concrete floor slab.

Substrate must be structurally sound, solid, stable, level, plumb and true to a tolerance in

plane of 6 mm in 3000 mm.

Substrate shall be dry, clean and free of dust, oil, grease, paint, tar, wax, curing agent, primer, sealer, form release agent or any deleterious substances which could inhibit adhesion.

Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive

manufacturer's instructions.

Ensure compatibility of substrate materials with materials supplied under this Section.

Mechanically sand or scarify the substrate as required to completely remove all paint, adhesives, sealers, loosely bonded topping, loose particles and contaminants. Surface etching or contaminant removal by chemical means is not permitted.

Apply levelling coat to level floors and where required to build up concrete floors slabs to elevations as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Consultant. Levelling coat to be used to correct substrate irregularities up to 8 mm thickness. Above 8 mm, use mortar bed method to correct irregularities.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Review setting out point with consultant for each location; verify patterns and edge conditions.

Verify that substrate expansion joints have been installed properly.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Regard recommendations, installation methods and materials specified and illustrated in Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association Manual, latest issue, and applicable manufacturer's instructions as minimum acceptable standards. Provide additional work and materials as required to meet the contract specifications and the drawing details.

Lay tile to pattern indicated on drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centred on each wall and that no tile less than ½ width is used. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

Install floor tile by thin-set method, to TTMAC Detail 311F; .1 use“detail A” with crack isolation membrane, unless otherwise noted. .2 use “detail C1” over cracked existing concrete .3 use “detail D” over young concrete

Where slab depression is required, install floor tile by mortar bed method, to TTMAC

detail 310F-A.

Install tile on masonry walls by thin-set method, to TTMAC detail 303W.

Install tile over backer board by thin-set method to TTMAC detail 305W.

Do not cover expansion and control joints in substrate with mortar or tiles.

Apply anti-fracture membrane over substrate before applying thin-set mortar.

Before commencing installation, wipe all dust from back of tile with a damp sponge.

Use tile setting method specified hereinafter. All tile must be fully bedded using suitable notched trowels to ensure full, even bedding.

Apply mortar using notched trowel, of type recommended by mortar manufacturer for

specific installation. Do not spread more material than can be covered before it begins to skin over.

Set tiles before skinning occurs. Back butter each tile immediately before laying, to

achieve full mortar contact.

Set tiles firmly over wet mortar; shifting tile in the direction of the mortar ridges to ensure full mortar contact. Beat in tile to flatten ridges into a continuous bed. Between 25% and 33%of the tile is to be imbedded in the mortar. Adjust tile for correct alignment.

Make joints of tiles 3mm in width. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in

tolerance allowed in tile size. Do not use gauges, string or plastic spacers. Make joints





watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. Provide minimum 85%mortar coverage.

Using a damp sponge, clean all joints and wipe all mortar smudges from the face of the

tile before mortar hardens.

Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout.

Place tile snugly around piping, fixtures and other items built in or passing through tile work. Form external angles with round edge tile extending over edge of square edge adjacent tile. Internal angles shall be formed square, carrying 1 flat tile past edge of other.

Drill holes for fixing accessories of other trades.

Finish surfaces flat and level or sloped and graded as required.

Provide stringers, caps, coves, corners, angles and other molded pieces to suit requirements of job. Ensure that striping and joints are in alignment.

Lay out borders and defined lines, wherever they occur, prior to setting of adjacent tile.

Keep inner edges of borders against fields or wall panels straight.

Cut tiles to conform to irregularities in wall lines and vertical planes along outer edges. Smooth cut edges with carborundum block or by other means to provide clean straight edges.

Install wall base free of sharp corners or exposed edges. Form internal angles square

and external angles bullnosed.

Wait at least 24 hours after tile installation before grouting. Grout joints, leave to set for 45 minutes, then rub with “scrubby” brush to break surface, make one pass with clean sponge to leave grout joint flush with tile.

Install control joints at a maximum spacing of 4m in both directions in large rooms, one

direction in corridors. Conform to shop drawing showing pattern of control and expansion joints, as approved by the Consultant.

Install thresholds and edge trim at junctions with other floor finishes, at doorways, and

where indicated on drawings.

Repoint joints after cleaning to eliminate imperfections. Avoid scratching tile surfaces.

Finished tile to be clean and free of tiles which are pitted, chipped, cracked or scratched. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Clean tile work progressively as work proceeds. Do not allow mortar to stain absorbent tile. Do not use acids for cleaning.

Conform to Section 07 92 00 for Joint Sealants.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Protect finished areas from traffic until setting materials have cured. Protect grouted areas from foot traffic for72 hours after completion of grouting.

Provide protective covering in traffic areas until building is ready for occupancy.

END OF SECTION



09 51 00 – ACOUSTIC CEILINGS



Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 Mechanical Equipment Refer to Mechanical Specifications. Electrical Equipment Refer to Electrical Specifications.

1.2 CEILING SYSTEMS

This Specification includes the ceiling systems listed below, noted in schedules and shown on reflected ceiling plans.

Ceiling systems shall be 610mm x 1220mm lay in exposed Tee system, rated and non- rated. Rated ceiling systems to conform to U.L.C. details.


.1 ASTM C635 Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical

Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. .2 ASTM C636 Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems

for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. .3 CAN/CGSB 92.1 Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units

1.4 DESIGN .1 N.R.C. Range: Unless otherwise noted under description of ceiling system

the N.R.C. Range shall be 60-65 (Table 1 of CAN/CGSB 92.1).

.2 Ceiling S.T.C.: Unless otherwise noted under description of ceiling system the S.T.C. rating shall be 35 or better.

.3 Light Reflectance: Unless otherwise noted under description of ceiling system, panels shall have a light reflectance co-efficient designation of L.R.1 (0.75 minimum). Table 3 of CAN/CGSB 92.1 refers.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

Reflected ceiling plans indicate proposed layout but this shall not relieve Contractor of

responsibility for co-ordination of the work and provision of Shop Drawings where field conditions call for variation from proposed layout.

Accurately locate lighting fixtures, ventilating grilles, exit lights and other ceiling fittings.

Conform to Section 01 33 23.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.6 SAMPLES

Upon award of the Contract submit full size sample panels proposed for installation in the

project. All panels subsequently used on the job shall match the approved sample. Submit samples of suspension system members for approval prior to commencement of

installation.


Transport, handle and store material in manner to prevent warp, twist and damage to tile and board edges and surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Any warped and/or damaged boards, tile and trim shall be rejected and be replaced by new, straight, undamaged and acceptable materials at no cost to the Owner.

Store material in warm, dry place away from water and the elements. Protect against undue loading stresses and shock.

All packaged material shall be delivered in original manufacturers' wrappers and

containers with labels and seals intact. 1.8 PROTECTION

Exercise care in the execution of work under this Section to prevent damage to finished

surfaces and adjacent work, and mechanical and electrical installations.

1.9 EXTRA PANELS

Provide 2% typical acoustic panels of each type specified for use in maintenance work. Obtain receipt from the Consultant or Owner’s representative on site.

Do not use panels supplied to Owner for maintenance work to make good any damaged or removed tile required by Contract.

1.10 SPECIAL CLEANING

Clean, repair or replace dirty, discoloured or defective units or exposed suspension members to Consultant's satisfaction.

1.11 ENVIRONMENT

Commence installation after building enclosed and dust- generating activities completed.





Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.

Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15 deg. C. and humidity of 20% to 40% prior

to, during and after installation.

1.12 WARRANTY

The Warranty stipulated in the General Conditions of the Contract shall be deemed to include the following definition in reference to Work specified in this Section. The following will be considered defects without being limited thereto: .1 Failure of the suspended ceiling to remain water level. .2 Lifting or sagging of tile and board between supports. .3 Staining and discolouration of factory finishes. .4 Development of corrosion of galvanized ferrous metal. .5 Development of cracks, splits and other surface deterioration in acoustic panels. .6 Failure of hanging wire anchorage.

The warranty period shall be two (2) years, commencing on the date of Substantial

Performance of the Work. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - LAY-IN SYSTEM

Acoustic Ceiling Panels (ACT):

.1 Typical non-fire rated ceilings, to CAN/CGSB-92.1

.2 Type: Mineral composition acoustical units, sag resistant.

.3 Pattern: non-directional fissured.

.4 Edge type: square.

.5 Colour: white.

.6 Size: 610mm by 1220mm.

.7 Thickness: 16mm minimum.

.8 Shape: Flat

.9 Flame spread rating of 25 or less.

.10 Smoke developed class of 50 of less.

.11 Acceptable Products: Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd., Fine Fissured 1729 Certain Teed Ceilings, Vantage 10, VAN-197 CGC Interiors, Radar ClimaPlus 2410

Suspension

.1 Suspension system to be Donn “DX” 24mm wide faced T-bar by CGC. Equivalent grid by Chicago Metallic, or Armstrong will be accepted, contingent on its compatibility with the specified ceiling tiles.

.2 Exposed interlocking tee grid system, formed out of cold rolled zinc-bond steel 0.54mm thick. Provide fire rated grid where fire ratings noted.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.3 Main Tees: 38mm x 25.4mm double web rectangular bulb top with capping plate in precoat baked-on white paint finish and incorporating holes for hangers and slots for connecting pieces, and capable of supporting 12.5 kg per 1200mm. for continuous spans and 6.5 kg per 1200mm span for single span without exceeding a deflection of 1/360 of the span.

.4 Standard Cross-Tees: 25.4 x 25.4mm double web, bulb top, capping plate in precoated white baked-on finish, capable of supporting 11.3 kg per 600mm span without exceeding a deflection of 1/360 of span, and with positive interlock with main tees.

.5 Structural Cross-Tees as main tees, but with crimped ends for lapping bottom flange of main tees and interlocking tack ends to engage slots in main tees.

.6 Accessories: Splice plate, clips, screws, etc. as required to complete the installation.

All galvanized finish. .7 Concealed flat spline: 0.71mm flat steel spline. .8 Edge Trim:

0.635mm zinc bonded, cold rolled steel mould. Trim shall be minimum 22mm x 22mm angles. Provide 50mm wide shadowline trim at perimeter of corridor ceilings.

.9 Finish to tees and edge trim: flame resistant white baked enamel satin finish to match panel finish, 2 coats on exposed surfaces, 1 coat elsewhere.

.10 Carrying Channels: 38mm x 19mm cold rolled galv. weighing 1.042 kg per metre.

.11 Tie Wire: 1.6mm galvanized soft annealed steel

.12 Hangers: 2.6mm galvanized steel wire.

.13 Screws: Corrosion resistant, self-tapping Philips truss head, of length and gauge to suit installation.

.14 Ceiling Hanger Pins (for fixing to metal): capacitor discharge ceiling hanger pins, by Continental Studwelding Ltd., or approved equivalent, of type approved by Consultant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

Employ mechanics skilled in this Trade and install work in strict accordance with the system manufacturer's printed directions to produce a first class, true finish, free from dropping, warpage, soiled or damaged tile.

Make provisions for thermal movement.

Install hanger inserts in a manner approved by Consultant.

Locate hangers directly over Main Tees and as close to intersections as possible. Secure hangers firmly to concrete inserts, steel joists and beams, bracing, etc. Do not install hangers to metal deck, provide separate grid off joists if required.

Erect ceiling grid plumb and square with accurately fitted locked-in joints in true

alignment, secure and rigid and with provision for thermal movement. Water level ceiling to tolerance of 1mm in 1m and maximum deviation of 4mm. from mean level.





Frame around recesses fixtures, diffusers, grilles, and the like and provide heavier

section hangers and supports as necessary to support same. Provide hanger within 150mm. of each fixture corner.

Consult with Electrical and Mechanical Trades for requirements and provide access to

valves and switches.

Ensure that all hangers and carrying members are designed and spaced to support entire ceiling system including recessed lighting fixtures. Note, weight of fixtures is approximately 9-13.5 kg.

Install panels only after all mechanical and electrical equipment, conduits, piping,

telephone distribution, etc. are in place. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF LAY-IN SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Generally, hangers shall be spaced at not more than 1200mm o.c. directly above main

runner tees, except at fixtures, where they shall be 600mm o.c. or closer as required to adequately support fixtures. Locate hangers as close as possible to tee junctions. Locate first hanger within 300mm of perimeter wall.

Install main tee runners continuous at 1200mm o.c. with interlocking structural cross-tees each side of fixtures at right angles to main tees. Install standard cross-tees generally at 90 degrees to main tees and as required to achieve pattern shown on reflected ceiling plans. Secure joints by web of tees; snaplock into place forming rigid connections. Main tees shall be as long as possible with butt ends joined by means of splice plates locked into webs.

Frame up around light fixtures, grilles, diffusers, speakers, openings, etc. as required.

Secure edge moldings to walls, bulkheads and other vertical surfaces at perimeter edges of acoustic ceilings. Note special moldings required.

Securely fix hangers to tees by bending ends 90 degrees at the correct height and

inserting through holes in top of main tees, then wiring around open side at least 3 turns twisting ends together. Flats shall be bolted to tees. Secure to concrete inserts in similar manner.

3.3 LAY-IN PANEL INSTALLATION

End panels shall not be less than half full size and installation in each area shall be

symmetrical, with end tiles and abutting opposite vertical wall surface to be of the same width. Do all necessary cutting and fitting neatly and accurately to suit grid openings and accommodate fixtures, grilles, detectors, speakers and the like located on the ceiling panels.

Lay directionally patterned acoustic panels in one direction, parallel to the longest direction of the grid concerned.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Place panels between tees so that edges bear evenly on flanges.

Confirm with reflected ceiling plans.

Provide fire rated enclosures as required around light fixtures and mechanical equipment

in fire rated ceilings, according to applicable ULC Design Criteria. Where mechanical equipment is located above the ceiling, panels shall be suitably and

inconspicuously marked by the use of small colour-coded stickers. Mechanical equipment to be located shall include valves, dampers, heat exchangers, heat pumps, VAV boxes, electrical disconnects, as applicable, and other such equipment not visible from below.

3.4 CLEANING

Upon completion, clean acoustic tile of all finger marks and other defacements.

Remove all accumulated rubbish and excess materials from the site.

Clean acoustic tile and replace any damaged tiles immediately before occupation of

building by Owner.

END OF SECTION



09 65 00 – RESILIENT FLOORING



Ceramic Tile Section 09 30 13 Carpeting Section 09 68 00


ASTM Standards .1 F141 Resilient Floor Coverings .2 F386 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials

Having Flat Surfaces .3 F511 Quality of Cut (Joint Tightness) of Resilient Floor Tile .4 F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient

Flooring .5 F1344 Specification for Rubber Floor Tile .6 F1861 Specification for Resilient Wall Base .7 F2055 Size and Squareness of Resilient Floor Tile by Dial Gage Method .8 E662 Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid

Materials. .9 E1907 Methods of Evaluating Moisture Conditions of Concrete Floors to

Receive Resilient Floor Coverings .10 F970 Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit

CAN/ULC-S102.2 Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Flooring, Floor Covering and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies

RFCI .1 IP #1 Recommended Installation Practice for Homogeneous Sheet Flooring,

Fully-Adhered

.2 IP #2 Recommended Installation Practice for Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT)

.3 Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit samples as per Section 01 33 23.

Coordinate with supplier of custom marbleized rubber flooring and Consultant to arrange for colour selections and provision of “strike-off” sample well in advance of material order date (8-10 weeks before materials are required).





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

At completion of this Work hand over to Owner minimum 2% of each type and colour of flooring installed.

Material to be in wrapped packages or fully labelled as to produce and colour. 1.5 WARRANTY

Submit manufacturer’s warranty warranting material and performance for a period of five

(5) years following the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.


Adhesives:

.1 Solvent-free white acrylic, as recommended by manufacturers of vinyl composite tile, rubber flooring, and base.

.2 VCT adhesive: Mapei Ultrabond ECO 711, Roberts Consolidated Premium VCT Adhesive 2057, or Flextile Flextech 710.

.3 Rubber base adhesive: Mapei Ultrabond ECO 575 or equal. Adhesive must produce good and permanent waterproof bond between wall surfaces and cove base.

.4 Rubber Tile adhesive: Johnsonite #996 waterproof Two-Part Epoxy

Resilient Base (RB100, NEW RB100 or RB): to CAN/CSA-A126.5, Type 1, rubber. .1 Style A: straight at carpeted areas. .2 Style B: coved typical. .3 Minimum 1200mm length and 100mm high by 3mm thick, with grooved back. .4 Colour: to be confirmed. .5 Style A Straight base:

Johnsonite: TightLock Carpet TDC Wall Base. Roppe Corporation: Pinnacle Rubber No Toe Base.

.6 Style B Cove base: Johnsonite: Rubber Wall Base, DC. Roppe Corporation: Pinnacle Rubber Standard Toe Base.

Metal Edge Trim: Aluminum or brass alloy with lip of edge strip extending under and with

shoulder finishing flush with top of resilient floor.

Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): .1 To CSA-A126.1, Type A (Plain and Mottled Tile), 3mm thick, 300mm by 300mm

size. Colour will be selected by the Consultant from the standard range. .2 Acceptable Maufacturer’s:

.1 Amtico: ColourPlus, Fortress Elements.





.2 Armstrong Commercial Flooring: Excelon, Imperial Texture

.3 Azrock: ColourWorks .4 Flextile: Flex-Thru Architectural Collection .5 Mannington: Essentials and Designer Essentials .5 Rubber Nosing Strips at Existing Stairs: Johnsonite, Solid Colour Flexible Vinyl Stair Nosing, minimum 1.75” by 1.75”, code: VCD-XXX to accommodate carpet insert at tread and riser typical. Cut stair corners to suit with tight mitred corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION AND TESTING

Check floor surfaces for evidence of carbonation, dusting, excessive moisture or other

defects affecting bond of adhesive. Ascertain nature of curing and/or sealing compound used on concrete and its compatibility with flooring adhesive. Take all required remedial measures. Remove compounds if necessary to ensure that adhesive bonds to concrete.

Test concrete slab, using anhydrous calcium chloride test, in conformance with ASTM F1869. Do not proceed until moisture vapour emission rate is equal or less than 2.44kg/100m2/24hours (3lbs/1000sq.ft./24hours).

Confirm ph level of concrete is acceptable to manufacturers of adhesive and tile.

Generally, ph level is to be 9 or less.

Perform bond testing to confirm compatibility between concrete slab and adhesives.

Provide test results to manufacturers of products proposed for use, and obtain approval of conditions before commencing installation.


Do not start installation of resilient flooring until all other trades have completed their work and just prior to completion of building.

Obtain approval from manufacturers for all adhesives, caulking, patching and levelling agents, and installation methods, before proceeding with the work of this section.

Ensure flooring materials are clean of any contaminants which would interfere with proper bonding.

3.3 PREPARATION

On concrete floors, level depressions and cracks with non-shrinking latex joint filler. Patching and levelling products must be compatible with adhesives; obtain approval from manufacturer of adhesive. Do not use products containing gypsum.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Report large cracks to Consultant. Do not proceed until remedied. Prime surface with approved primer.

Thoroughly clean concrete floors of any substances deleterious to bond of adhesive.

Close off areas where tile work is in progress to prevent deposit of dust or grit on slabs where tile is being laid.

3.4 TILE APPLICATION

Use only adhesives recommended and approved by the flooring manufacturer.

Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel in accordance with flooring

manufacturer’s instructions. Do no spread more adhesive than can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place.

Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. Border tiles shall be a minimum half tile width.

Install flooring to square grid pattern with all joints aligned with continuous joints flowing with direction of mottle, with pattern grain parallel for all units and parallel to width of room.

As installation progresses, and after installation, roll flooring in 2 directions from centre area of work with 45 kg minimum three section roller to ensure full adhesion.

Cut tile and fit neatly around fixed objects. Continue flooring over areas which will be under built-in furniture and fitments, without interrupting floor pattern.

Install flooring in pan type floor access covers. Maintaing floor pattern.

Terminate flooring at centerline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar.

Coordinate installation of appropriate transition strips at junction with dissimilar floor materials with trades installing these materials and transition strips.

Resilient Transition Strips: .1 Install specified resilient transition strips at junction with dissimilar floor materials

and coordinate installation with trades installing these materials. .2 Install resilient transition strips fully bonded to floors using manufacturer

recommended adhesive.

Where resilient flooring meets carpet flooring coordinate installation of transition strips with carpet installation.

Install strips under doors at openings.





3.5 APPLICATION - COVE BASE

Fill cracks and level irregularities of surfaces to which base is to be applied with filler

approved by adhesive manufacturer so as to provide solid backing over entire area behind base.

Cement cove base to vertical surfaces so that gaps do not occur behind base, so that front lip of base cove bears firmly and uniformly on floor surface, and so that good and permanent bond is produced between base and surface to which it is applied.

For right angled external corners use preformed matching cove corner units. Make end joints flush with gap.

At wall ends and openings where ends of preformed corners come close together or

touch or overlap, cut each corner unit equally so that a neat, inconspicuous joint is formed in middle of wall end or opening or so that filled gap, if gap is necessary, is not less than 38mm wide and located in middle of wall or end of opening.

3.6 CLEANING

Remove surplus adhesive from face of tiles as work progresses.

Upon completion of work remove all markings and heel scuffs. Broom clean.

Prior to occupation by Owner, broom clean all resilient floors and remove all noticeable

stains and marks.

All wet mopping and waxing will be done by the school staff.

END OF SECTION



09 68 00 – CARPETING


PART 1 - GENERAL


Resilient Flooring Section 09 65 00

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit for approval two 1000mm full size x 1000mm samples of carpet.

Submit certification of conformance to CGSB 4-GP-155M.

Submit seaming diagrams as Shop Drawings showing dye lots, locations and lengths of seams, cross joints, open edges and other details required by Consultant to clarify the Work.

Submit samples of all carpet edge binding.

1.3 CERTIFICATION

Submit manufacturer's product data verifying compliance with Specification requirements for carpet, binder bar and adhesive material.

Submit evidence verifying compliance of carpet material with: .1 Flame resistance to CGSB 4-GP-155M by certification as conforming to

Hazardous Products Act, Carpet Regulations or a test report certified by approved independent testing laboratory.

.2 ULC flame spread and smoke developed classification by ULC listing or test report certified by nationally recognized fire test laboratory.

.3 Submit certification with submission of samples.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

Contractor to be an approved applicator of the material manufacturer.

1.5 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Provide triplicate set of printed maintenance instructions for inclusion in Maintenance Manuals as specified in Section 01 78 00.

Maintenance instructions shall contain specific warning against maintenance methods and materials harmful to the appearance and durability of installed carpet.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1.6 WARRANTY

Provide a Warranty for an extended period of five years from the date substantial performance of the Work. Warranty shall be signed by both manufacturer and installer. Defects shall include, without being limited to, the following: deterioration of backing, delaminations, failure of seams, stretching or wrinkling, loss of more than 5% of surface pile in any given area, excessive fading, unravelling. Decision of Consultant on loss of pile to be final and binding.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIAL

Supply, at completion, a three metre length (by full width of roll) of each colour and pattern of carpet installed.

Supply also large scraps of carpet which remain after installation.

Store where directed by Consultant.

Obtain receipt for extra materials, signed by the library’s head custodian, and forward to Consultant.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Carpet (CPT): .1 Tuffed Loop Carpet Tile: Commercial carpet grade suitable for heavy traffic area,

with anti-static quality and “no” zipper guarantee. .2 The following products are acceptable:

.1 CPT1 or CPT (field colour): .1 Manufacturer: Interface .2 Collection: Composure .3 Colour: 303016 Reserved

.4 Size: 500mm by 500mm .5 Installation: Non-directional

.2 CPT2 (accent colour): .1 Manufacturer: Interface .2 Collection: Flatiron Collection, 1st Avenue .3 Colour: 1st Avenue, 8157 Orange






.3 CPT3 (accent colour): .1 Manufacturer: Interface .2 Collection: Flatiron Collection, 1st Avenue .3 Colour: 1st Avenue, 8156 Red


Flame resistant: to meet or exceed CGSB standard 4-GP-155M.

Use carpet manufactured from yarns of the same dye lot for each colour. Select materials for colour and pattern consistency using matching pieces in each location.

Transition strips from carpet to concrete, threshold and Binder Edge: Heavy duty aluminum, colour anodized, to Consultant's selection.

Resilient Base: Refer to Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENVIRONMENT

Do not install carpet when air temperature of subfloor is below 10 deg. C.

3.2 PREPARATORY WORK

Surface to receive carpet shall be clear and free of grease, wax and other deleterious materials.

Concrete slab shall have cured for a minimum of 60 days and shall be dry. If requested by the Consultant, test concrete for moisture content and obtain acceptable result before commencing Work.

Ensure that sealer has been applied before commencing installation of carpet. Ensure sealer is compatible with carpet adhesive.


Install carpeting after finishing work is completed.

Finish installation to represent smooth wearing surface free from conspicuous seams, burring or other faults.

Ensure perfect colour, pattern and texture match with any one area.

After installation is complete, remove any spots with suitable spot remover, remove all cuttings, clean with an industrial vacuum cleaner and protect as specified.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

3.4 INSTALLATION - GLUE DOWN METHOD

Installation to be direct glue down method installed using best installation methods recognized for this type of carpet to approval of manufacturer.

Join seams with carpet seaming adhesive.

At columns and other penetrations, cut carpet with maximum possible overage. Position the seams made by these cuts first.

At junction of VCT and carpet, supply and install vinyl transition “adaptor” strip.

End seams are generally not acceptable. However, where such seams can be so located

that they are hidden from view or are otherwise inconspicuous, the Consultant may permit an exception to the above requirement, provided that written authorization is received.

Locate seams in light traffic areas where possible and match pile and pattern in making

seams. Make seams parallel to length of room where possible.

Carpet edges shall extend under wall or fitment bases. Edges of carpet in door reveals shall occur directly under door bottom.

Provide metal binder bars at thresholds and at junction with other flooring materials.

3.5 PROTECTION

Protect traffic areas of carpeted floors with 6 mil polyethylene drop sheets. Tape joints to

prevent shifting.

Do not remove without Consultant's written authorization.

END OF SECTION



09 91 00 – PAINTING


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Metal Fabrications Section 05 52 00

.2 Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00

.3 Finish Carpentry Section 06 20 00

.4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13

.5 Gypsum Board System Section 09 29 00

.6 Intumescent Painting Section 09 96 46

.7 Shop Priming Specified in various Sections of the Specification.

.8 Factory applied paint coatings unless otherwise specified.

.9 Mechanical Division 20, 22

.10 Electrical Division 26, 27, 28

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

With exceptions specified above or specifically called for in other Sections of the Specification, all paintwork is included in the scope of this Section of the Specification. Colours will be specified at a later date by the Consultant.

In locations where Drawings do not call for paint or similar finish on walls and/or ceilings, the intent of this Specification is that items, new work and existing surfaces in areas affected by the Work of this project, including miscellaneous metal work, shall be painted.

Work includes moisture testing and surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of paint, including cleaning, small crack repair, patching, caulking, and making good surfaces, and specific pre-treatments, sealing, and priming of surfaces.

Check conditions of all existing surfaces to be repainted before commencing new work, including assessing the level of degradation of the surface, the type of coating existing, and the thickness of the existing coating. Perform adhesion tests on all existing coatings to be repainted to ensure that surfaces are sound and well adhered before applying new coatings. It is expected that the Contractor will have visually assessed the existing conditions during the pre-tender site visit, and no contract extras will be considered for addressing conditions which were readily apparent at that time.

Paint all new exterior surfaces which normally require painting, including hollow metal doors, screens, galvanized steel lintels, ladders and hardware.

Perform interior painting called for in Room Schedule and Door Schedule and noted on drawings. Paint all new walls, ceilings, bulkheads, and all surfaces which normally receive a paint finish, whether noted on schedules, or not noted. Walls shall be completely painted before installation of tackboards, millwork, etc.

All heating units, recessed convectors, grilles, pipes, access panels, hangers and miscellaneous exposed metal work (other than stainless steel, anodized aluminum and baked enamel) to be painted to match the surfaces on which they occur, unless otherwise directed by Consultant.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

For special painted graphics, colour changes, accent stripes, etc. see drawings.

In all renovated areas, paint affected walls as specified for new construction. All other walls in the room are to be cleaned and painted with one coat. If more than one colour is used in the room, confirm colours with Consultant.

Paint exposed drywall and the like in locations where finish is not otherwise specified or noted. Do not paint such surfaces in mechanical shafts, unless specifically noted.

Paint all exposed structural steel and mechanical ducts in finished areas.

Paint pipes, conduit, ducts and related thermal insulation and all prime painted mechanical and electrical equipment and in all locations where Drawings call for paint or similar finish on walls and/or ceilings. Exposed pipes shall be painted to Owner’s Colour Coding/Piping schedule to suit use (i.e. hot water, etc.), included below.

Make good paint finish on shop coated work where damaged.

Paint visible portions of steel shelf angles, lintels and structural steel.

Paint entirely, including all top and bottom edges, of all wood doors.

Interior of ducts and diffusers visible from exterior on room side.

Painting, as referred to herein shall include paint, enamel, stain, varnish and other finishes herein specified and normally applied to the various materials by the painting Subcontractor.


Do painting and finishing to CAN/CGSB-85-GP series standards including Appendix A and to material manufacturer's instructions and to The Master Painters Institute (MPI) Architectural Painting Specification Manual and Maintenance Repainting Manual, except where specifically specified otherwise. The most stringent standards shall apply.

All coatings must conform to Regulation SOR/2009-264, Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Concentration Limits for Architectural Coatings Regulations, and the VOC limits set therein.

All paints and coatings used must conform to Green Seal Standard GS-11 for paints and coatings based on performance requirements and reduced use of hazardous substances and reduced volatile organic compounds:

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

The Painting Subcontractor must be a member in good standing of the Ontario Painting Contractors’ Association.





1.5 INSPECTION

A cash allowance has been included for independent painting inspections. The cost of

the painting inspection is to be paid from the Cash Allowance included in the Contract. Refer to Section 01 10 00.

Painting shall not commence until the inspection company has been notified and the Inspector makes the initial site visit.

Supply the Inspector with a schedule of materials intended for use on the job at the commencement of the painting.

The Inspector will issue Inspection Reports during the Project. On completion of the job, the final Inspection Report will be issued.

1.6 WORK ENVIRONMENT

Do not apply paint finish in areas where dust is being generated.

Maintain environmental conditions within limits recommended by manufacturer, for

optimum results. Do not apply coatings under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

Conform to requirements of MPI Architectural Specification Manual including recommendations for surface preparation.

1.7 ACCEPTANCE OF WORK IN PLACE

Submit written confirmation of acceptance of existing conditions, to the Consultant, prior

to commencing painting work. Painting may not commence without submission of this confirmation.

Receipt of this confirmation will be considered a prerequisite for certification of payment for this work.

Notify the Consultant, in writing, immediately if any existing condition is encountered that will prevent the attainment of satisfactory results in this work

1.8 SUBMITTALS

Samples:

.1 Submit triplicate samples consisting of 300mm x 200mm panels of each type of paint finish specified.

.2 Panels shall be of same material as that on which sample coatings are to be applied in the field where possible.

.3 Identify each sample as to job, name of paint manufacturer, finish, colour, name and number, sheen and gloss units and name of Contractor.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.4 Retain one set of approved samples on site until completion of the Work.

Submit manufacturer’s data sheets for each paint product, including: .1 Product characteristics .2 Surface preparation instructions and recommendations Primer requirements and

finish .3 specifications .4 Storage and handling recommendations .5 Application methods .6 Cautions .7 VOC data

Submit written confirmation of acceptance of existing conditions, as specified above.

1.9 STORAGE AND HANDLING

Store paint and painter's materials in clean, dry locations approved by the Consultant. Store materials in an area that is within the acceptable temperature range, per manufacturer’s instructions. Protect from freezing.

All paint shall be in unopened containers, labelled with: .1 manufacturer’s name, .2 product name, product type, .3 instructions for surface preparation and product application, .4 VOC content, .5 environmental issues, .6 batch date, and .7 colour name and number.

Provide C02 fire extinguisher minimum 9 kg capacity in paint storage area.

Dispose of materials in accordance with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.10 SIGNS

Provide legible signs throughout the Work reading "WET PAINT" in prominent positions during painting and while paint is drying.

Use 75mm high letters on white card or board.

1.11 TEMPORARY COVERS AND PROTECTION

Protect floors and other surfaces with temporary covers such as dust sheets, polyethelene film or tarpaulins. All to Consultant's approval.





Mask identification plates occurring on equipment, switch boxes, and fire rating labels,

etc. which require painting.

Protect, remove and replace hardware, accessories, lighting fixtures, and similar items as required except primed for paint door closers which shall be painted. Light switches and electrical communication outlet plates to be removed and reinstalled on completion of painting.

Keep oily rags, waste and other similar combustible materials in closed metal containers; take every precaution to avoid spontaneous combustion, remove waste and combustible materials daily.

Clean surfaces soiled by spillage of paint, paint spattering and the like. If such cleaning

operations damage the surface, repair and replace damaged work at no cost to the Owner.

1.12 RETOUCHING

Do all retouching, etc. to ensure that the building may be handed over to the Owner in

perfect condition, free of spatter, finger prints, rust, watermarks, scratches, blemishes of other disfiguration.

After fully decorating and retouching a room or other area, notify Consultant. After inspection and final approval by Consultant post sign 'DECORATING COMPLETE - NO ADMITTANCE WITHOUT PERMISSION'.

1.13 TEST AREAS

In areas to be repainted, test existing coatings for adhesion before applying new coatings, in accordance with the recommended practices in the MPI Repainting Specification Manual. Check for loose paint using a scraper and check for adhesion by cutting through the coatings and performing duct tape tests, or other acceptable means of testing adhesion. Once adequate adhesion is confirmed, apply a test section of the proposed new coating, allow to dry, and perform adhesion tests in area of new coating to confirm compatibility with existing coatings before proceeding with repainting work. Perform tests in all areas and on all surface types to ensure positive repainting results. Advise Consultant of any areas in which existing or new coatings fail adhesion tests. Do not proceed with the work until a recommended course of action is agreed upon by all parties. Commencement of work will signify acceptance of existing conditions.

In areas of new construction, A room or area in the building will be designated by the Consultant as a test area to establish standard of workmanship, texture, gloss and coverage.

Prior to any painting being started, request a meeting on Site between Consultant, Contractor, and Subcontractor and Inspector to review conditions, surfaces, anticipated problems and to clarify quality of workmanship acceptable to Consultant.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Apply finishes to each type of surface within room with correct material, coats, colour, texture and degree of gloss in sample area and have same approved prior to providing Work of this Section.

Retain test area until after completion of Work. Test area to be minimum standard for the

Work.

Failure to comply with the above will be cause for Consultant to request all Work previously painted to be repainted.

1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

Provide one sealed can, one litre capacity, of each product in each colour used in the

Work for Owner's use in maintenance Work.

Container to be new fully labelled with manufacturer's name, type of paint, and colour.

1.15 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE

Furnish a 100% Maintenance Bond, valid for three (3) years from date of Substantial Performance, or from date of completion of Work if work is not complete at date of Substantial Performance, will be required.

Subcontractor’s Maintenance Bond shall warrant that the work has been performed in accordance with the standards and requirements of the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, most recent edition.


Paint and finishing materials - highest grade, first line quality, low VOC products provided

by any of the following manufacturers: .1 Benjamin Moore & Co. .2 Dulux .3 General Paints .4 Sico Paints .5 PPG Canada .6 Para Paints.

Paints, enamels, fillers, primers, varnishes and stains - ready mixed products of one of

the manufacturers listed. Substitutes will not be allowed.





Thinners, cleaners - type and brand recommended by the paint manufacturer, or Inspector.

Only products manufactured by paint manufacturer stated at time of submission of

samples will be allowed on Site unless other materials specifically specified herein. No painting to be performed until paint manufacturer identified and acceptance received from the Consultant and Inspector.

Deliver materials to Site in original unbroken containers bearing brand and maker's

name. The presence of any unauthorized material or containers for such, on Site shall be of sufficient cause for rejection of ALL paint materials on Site at that time, and all previous painted work repainted with proper material.

2.2 COLOUR SCHEDULE

Consultant will provide detailed colour schedule at a later date. Conform to schedule including patterns, colours, and locations for all finishes.

A minimum of ten (10) paint colours may be selected by the Consultant.

In each room, the Consultant may select one wall where an accent colour may be applied.

Refer to room finishing notes for detailed application instructions.

2.3 FINISHING SYSTEMS

Interior Work:

.1 Drywall: INT 9.2M Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat Primer; MPI #149 Walls: 2 coats MPI #147 Ceilings: 2 coats of one of the following:

2 coats Dulux Lifemaster Interior Acrylic Ceiling Flat # 59170 Zero VOC

.2 2 coats Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Flat Finish K363

.3 or equal by one of the approved manufacturers. All drywall, whether requiring finish painting or not, must receive prime

coat.

.2 Concrete Block, paint: INT 4.2E (modified), Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss

finish, 4 coat system 2 coats latex blockfiller; MPI #4 2 coats finish; MPI #147 Provide gloss finish, MPI #148, where noted as “gloss” in Room Finish

Schedule.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.3 Concrete Block, glaze: INT 4.2J (modified), Epoxy-modified Latex Finish, 4 coat system 2 coats latex blockfiller; MPI #4 2 Coats Benjamine Moore Ultra Spec HP DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel

FP28, MPI #114 Provide in all hallways and washrooms, and where noted as “glazed” in

Room Finish Schedule.

.4 Concrete Block, wet areas: INT 4.2G (modified), Epoxy “Tile like” Finish, 4 coat system 2 coats latex blockfiller; MPI #116 2 Coats epoxy-modified latex finish; MPI #77 Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec HP DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel FP28 Provide in all hallways and washrooms, and where noted as “glazed” in

Room Finish Schedule.

.5 Cast in Place Concrete walls, ceilings: INT 3.1M Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat MPI #149 2 coats MPI #147

.6 Woodwork (Opaque Finish):

INT 6.4T Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat latex primer MPI #39 2 coats institutional low VOC latex finish; MPI #147

.7 Stain Finish:

LEED Complaint Stain Coats Varnish, Water Based, clear gloss; MPI #130

.8 Ferrous Metal:

INT 5.1S Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat MPI #107 2 coats MPI #147

.9 Shop Primed Ferrous Metal:

INT 5.1S Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish Confirm type of shop primer used with structural steel supplier. Confirm compatibility of all coatings with manufacturers. Touch up prime coat where damaged, with compatible primer, type

MPI#107. 2 coats interior latex, MPI #147

.10 Galvanized Metal:

Includes all hollow metal doors, frames and screens. INT 5.3N Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat galvanized Primer MPI #134





2 coats Acrylic Semi-Gloss MPI #147

.11 Insulation on Pipes & Ducts: INT 6.8F Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat Primer MPI #17 2 coats Acrylic Semi-Gloss MPI #147

.12 Mechanical Equipment:

Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish As specified for metal types.

.13 Piping, Conduit & Ductwork (uncoated):

INT 5.3N Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, semi-gloss finish 1 coat galvanized Primer MPI #134 2 coats Acrylic Semi-Gloss MPI #147

.14 Surfaces behind grilles, within 30mm of grille:

INT 5.3N Institutional Low Odour/ Low VOC, flat finish 1 coat galvanized Primer MPI #134 2 Coats Acrylic Flat, Black; MPI #143

.15 Concrete Floors:

1 Coat Waterborne Epoxy primer over uncoated cured concrete 2 Coats Water-Borne Epoxy MPI #115 VOC emissions of coating not to exceed 200 g/l.

.16 NOTE: Use heat resistant paint where required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following standards and to MPI Architectural

Specification Manual Chapters 2 and 3; the most stringent requirements shall apply. Preparation of surfaces must be reviewed with painting inspector. Prepared surfaces must be inspected before application of prime coat.

.1 Prepare wood surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-lM. Use CAN/CGSB 1.126 vinyl sealer

over knots and resinous areas. Use CGSB 1-GP -103M wood paste filler for nail holes. Tint filler to match.

.2 Touch up damaged spots of shop paint primer on steel with CAN/CGSB 1.40M to CGSB 85-GP-14M.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.3 Prepare galvanized steel and zinc coated surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-16M. This includes wiped coated steel surfaces.

.4 Prepare masonry and concrete surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-31M.

.5 Prepare wallboard surfaces to CGSB 85-GP-33M. Fill minor cracks with plaster

patching compound for stained woodwork.

.6 Prepare concrete floors to CGSB 85-GP-32M.

.7 Prepare copper piping and accessories to CGSB 85-GP-20M.

.8 Apply prime coat on wood scheduled for paint finish before installation.

.9 Back prime wood scheduled for transparent finish. Do not prime surfaces scheduled for transparent finish.

.10 Remove all surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale, dirt,

foreign matter, rust, mould, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers from existing surfaces to assure sound bonding to tightly adhering old paint.

.11 Scape peeling paint off existing masonry surfaces and apply a compatible

masonry sealer, approved for use by the paint manufacturer, before applying new coatings.

.12 Glossy surfaces must be clean and dull before repainting. Wash with abrasive

cleanser, or, wash thoroughly and dull by sanding.

.13 Spot prime any existing bare areas with an appropriate primer.

.14 Check for compatibility between existing and new coatings by applying a test patch of the recommended coating system, covering at least 2 to 3 square feet. Allow surface to dry one week before testing adhesion per ASTM D3359. If the coating system is incompatible, complete removal is required.

.15 NOTE: ABOVE NOTED SURFACES MAY NOT ALL BE APPLICABLE TO THIS

PROJECT. 3.2 APPLICATION

Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

Use suitable, clean equipment in good condition.

Maintain dust-free suitable conditions on the surfaces free from machine, tool or

sandpaper marks, insects, grease, or any other condition liable to impair finished work to prevent production or good results.





At all hollow metal doors and frames, prime coat must be inspected and signed off by painting inspector before painting work may proceed.

Apply evenly, uniform in sheen, colour and texture, free from brush or roller marks, well

brushed or rolled in and free of crawls, runs, join marks or other defects.

Permit paint to dry between coats. Touch up uneven spots after applying first coat. Tint various coats of multiple coat work in light shades of the final colour selected, to distinguish between coats.

Give Consultant and Inspector due notice and sufficient opportunity (minimum 48 hours)

to inspect each coat. Do not proceed with subsequent coat until preceding coat approved. Consultant reserves the right to order complete retreatment if this condition is not observed.

Painting coats are intended to cover surfaces perfectly; if in painter's opinion, formula

specified is inadequate to provide a first class finished surface, report to the Consultant and have formulas rectified before commencing work. Surfaces imperfectly covered shall receive additional coats at no additional cost. Provide additional coat where ever dark colours are used.

Use paint unadulterated. Use same brand of paint for primer, intermediate and finish

coats. Factory mix all paints.

Paint finish shall be applied by roller except in the case of wood trim, door frames, base board and similar work of small surface area which shall be painted by brush. Do not use roller for applying finish other than paint.

Spray painting will not be permitted unless specifically approved in writing by the

Consultant in each instance. Consultant may withdraw approval at any time and prohibit spray painting for reasons such as carelessness, poor masking or protection measures, drifting paint fog, disturbance to other Trades, or failure to obtain a dense, even, opaque finish. Spray painting shall be full double coat, i.e. at least two passes for each coat. Do not use spray or roller on wood or metal surfaces, brush only unless approved in writing by Consultant.

Paint entire surfaces, including areas where millwork or other items are to be installed.

Finish edges of doors with paint or stain treatment as required to match face of door.

Seal hidden edges of wood doors with one coat of shellac and one coat gloss varnish or two coats paint. Repaint tops and edges of wood doors after fitting.

Even up stained woodwork in colour as required by nature of wood and as directed by

Consultant. Apply same finish on trim, fitments cupboards and other protecting ledges as on surrounding work, disregard sight lines.

Carefully hand smooth and sandpaper wood between coats (including priming). Apply

one coat sealer before applying first coat paint filler to knots or sap blemishes on wood surfaces to receive paint or stain finish.

After first coat, fill nail holes, splits and scratches, using putty coloured to match finish.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Remove rust, oil, grease and loose shop paint from metal work by brushing or with wire brushes and make good shop coat before proceeding with final finish. Feather out edges to make touch up patches inconspicuous.

Clean castings with wire brush before application of first paint coat.

Do not etch galvanized metal. Use zinc rich primer. This includes metal door frames and

the like with wiped zinc coating.

Note that primer is required on all hollow metal doors, frames and screens. Three coat system is required. Sand between all coats.

Remove form oil or parting compounds from concrete surfaces. Use Xylol or approved

compound.

Paint interior of pipe spaces, ducts, etc. visible through grilles or through linear metal ceilings in black matt finish.

Conform with Consultant's colour schedule and exactly match approved samples.

Mechanical and Electrical Pipes, Ducts and Conduits:

.1 Commence Work when piping installation is complete in the area concerned.

.2 Do not paint plated or other prefinished surfaces, unless otherwise noted.

.3 Paint conduit in same colour as background paint.

.4 Apply formulae specified even though surface prime painted at shop prior to delivery. Touch up shop priming where damaged.

.5 Use heat resistant epoxy paint on pipes and surfaces where operating surface temperature exceeds 65 degrees C.

.6 Paint exposed pipes and ducts and their supports and related items in colours to suit colour coding included below; confirm with Consultant. Refer to Mechanical Division 15 for further instructions.

3.3 COLOUR CODING OF PIPING

The following is a preliminary list of painting requirements for piping. All colours are to be

confirmed by the Owner prior to commencing this work.

FUNCTION COLOUR

WHERE EXPOSED

WHERE CONCEALED

DIRECTION INDICATION

Natural Gas Yellow Solid Solid -

Stand Pipe System Red Solid Solid -

Heating Water Supply Dark Green Solid 12" Band Every 20' At minimum of





Heating Water Return Pale Green Solid 12” Band Every 20'

every 20', Direction Arrow 9" Long, 1" wide

Chilled Water Supply Orange Solid Solid

Chilled Water Return Orange Solid Solid

Cooling Water To Tower B Buff Solid Solid

Cooling Water From Tower Buff Solid

Solid

Domestic Hot Water Dark Blue Solid Band Every 20' At minimum of every 20', Direction Arrow 9" Long, 1" wide Domestic Cold Water Pale Blue Solid Band Every 20'

3.4 REPAIRS

Cracks occurring in walls or ceilings requiring patching during "Warranty Period" shall be repainted in such a way that the patch is not visible at a distance of 1m.

If patch painting is not acceptable, repaint entire wall, or ceiling.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 23 33 - EXCAVATING, TRENCHING & BACKFILLING



American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM), latest updates at time

of tender: .1 ASTM C117-04, Standard Test Method for Material Finer than 0.075mm

(No.200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. .2 ASTM C136-05, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates. .3 ASTM D422-63, Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. .4 ASTM D698-00ae1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft) (600 kN-m/m). .5 ASTM D1557-02e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft) (2,700 kN-m/m). .6 ASTM D4318-05, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

PlastiOwner Index of Soils.

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB), latest updates at time of tender: .1 CAN/CGSB-8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series. .2 CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric.

Canadian Green Building Council (CaGBC), latest updates at time of tender:

.1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0-December 2004, LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System For New Construction and Major Renovations.

Canadian Standards Association (CSA International), latest updates at time of tender: .1 CAN/CSA-A3000-03, Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001,

A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005). .1 CSA-A3001-03, Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete.

.2 CSA-A23.1/A23.2-04, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)/Office of Water .1 EPA 832R92005, Storm Water Management for Construction Activities:

Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and Best Management Practices.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

Excavation classes: Two (2) classes of excavation will be recognized; common excavation and rock excavation. .1 Rock: solid material in excess of 1.00 m and which cannot be removed by means

of heavy duty mechanical excavating equipment with 0.95 to 1.15m3 bucket. Frozen material is not classified as rock.

.2 Common excavation: excavation of materials of whatever nature, which are not included under definitions of rock excavation.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Unclassified excavation: excavation of deposits of whatever character encountered in

Work.

Topsoil: .1 Material capable of supporting good vegetative growth and suitable for use in top

dressing, landscaping and seeding. .2 Material reasonably free from subsoil, clay lumps, brush, objectionable weeds,

and other litter, and free from cobbles, stumps, roots, and other objectionable material larger than 25 millimeters in any dimension.

Waste material: excavated material unsuitable for use in Work or surplus to requirements.

Borrow material: material obtained from locations outside area to be graded, and required for construction of fill areas or for other portions of Work.

Recycled fill material: material, considered inert, obtained from alternate sources and

engineered to meet requirements of fill areas.

Unsuitable materials: .1 Weak, chemically unstable, and compressible materials. .2 Frost susceptible materials:

.1 Fine grained soils with plastiOwner index less than 10 when tested to ASTM D4318, and gradation within limits specified when tested to ASTM D422 and ASTM C136 : Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1 CAN/CGSB-8.2.

.2 Table: Sieve Designation % Passing 2.00mm 100 0.10mm 45-100 0.02mm 10-80 0.005mm 0-45

.3 Coarse grained soils containing more than 20 % by mass passing 0.075

mm sieve.

Unshrinkable fill: very weak mixture of cement, concrete aggregates and water that resists settlement when placed in utility trenches, and capable of being readily excavated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittals. .1 Submit for review to Owner proposed dewatering and heave prevention methods

as described in PART 3 of this Section. .2 Submit to Owner written notice when bottom of excavation is reached. .3 Submit to Owner testing inspection results and report as described in PART 3 of

this Section.





Preconstruction Submittals: .1 Submit construction equipment list for major equipment to be used in this section

prior to start of Work. .2 Submit records of underground utility locates, indicating: location plan of existing

utilities as found in field clearance record from utility authority location plan of relocated and abandoned services, as required.

Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .2 At least 4 weeks prior to beginning Work, inform Owner and testing Agency of

source of fly ash and submit samples to Testing Agency. .1 Do not change source of Fly Ash without written approval of Testing

Agency.

1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS

Testing of existing conditions to be performed under the cash allowance outlined in Section 01 10 00 – General Instructions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Type 1 and Type 2 fill:

.1 Crushed, pit run or screened stone, gravel or sand.

.2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1 CAN/CGSB-8.2.

.3 Table: Sieve Designation % Passing Type 1 Type 2 75mm - 100 50mm - - 37.5mm - - 25mm 100 - 19mm 75-100 - 12.5mm - - 9.5mm 50-100 - 4.75mm 30-70 22-85 2.00mm 20-45 - 0.425mm 10-25 5-30 0.180mm - - 0.075mm 3-8 0-10





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Type 3 fill: selected material from excavation or other sources, approved by Testing Agency for use intended, unfrozen and free from rocks larger than 75mm, cinders, ashes, sods, refuse or other deleterious materials.

Unshrinkable fill: proportioned and mixed to provide:

.1 Maximum compressive strength of 0.4MPa at 28 days.

.2 Maximum cement content of 25 kg/m ; with 40% by volume fly ash replacement: to CSA-A3001, Type GU.

.3 Minimum strength of 0.07MPa at 24 h.

.4 Concrete aggregates: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.5 Cement: Type GU.

.6 Slump: 160 to 200mm.

Shearmat: honeycomb type bio-degradable cardboard 100mm thick, treated to provide sufficient structural support for poured concrete until concrete cured.

Geotextiles: to Section 31 32 19 - Geotextiles. PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PREPARATION

Cut asphalt pavement neatly along limits of proposed excavation in order that surface

may break evenly and cleanly.

3.2 STOCKPILING

Stockpile fill materials in areas approved by Owner. .1 Stockpile granular materials in manner to prevent segregation.

Protect fill materials from contamination.

Implement sufficient erosion and sediment control measures to prevent sediment release off construction boundaries.

3.3 COFFERDAMS, SHORING, BRACING AND UNDERPINNING

Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition by appropriate methods and in

accordance with Health and Safety Requirements and Health and Safety Act for the Province of Ontario. .1 Where conditions are unstable, notify Owner.

Construct temporary Works to depths, heights and locations as indicated.

During backfill operation:





.1 Unless otherwise indicated or directed by Owner, remove sheeting and shoring from excavations.

.2 Do not remove bracing until backfilling has reached respective levels of such bracing.

.3 Pull sheeting in increments that will ensure compacted backfill is maintained at elevation at least 500mm above toe of sheeting.

When sheeting is required to remain in place, cut off tops at elevations as indicated.

Upon completion of substructure construction:

.1 Remove cofferdams, shoring and bracing.

.2 Remove excess materials from site and restore watercourses as indicated and as directed Owner.

3.4 DEWATERING AND HEAVE PREVENTION

Keep excavations free of clean, free of standing water, and loose soil.

Where soil is subject to significant volume change due to change in moisture content,

cover and protect to Owner approval.

Provide for Owner's review approval details of proposed dewatering or heave prevention methods, including dikes, well points, and sheet pile cut-offs.

Avoid excavation below groundwater table if quick condition or heave is likely to occur. .1 Prevent piping or bottom heave of excavations by groundwater lowering, sheet

pile cut-offs, or other means.

Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface run-off.

Dispose of water in approved collection runoff areas and in a manner not detrimental to public and private property, or portion of Work completed or under construction. .1 Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside of

excavation limits.

Provide flocculation tanks, settling basins, or other treatment facilities to remove suspended solids or other materials before discharging to storm sewers, watercourses or drainage areas.

3.5 EXCAVATION

Advise Owner at least 7 days in advance of excavation operations for initial cross sections to be taken.

Excavate to lines, grades, elevations and dimensions as indicated.

Remove concrete, masonry, paving, demolished foundations, rubble and other obstructions encountered during excavations.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Excavation must not interfere with bearing capacity of adjacent foundations.

Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs that are to remain.

.1 If excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe or saw.

For trench excavation, unless otherwise authorized by Owner in writing, do not excavate more than 30 m of trench in advance of installation operations and do not leave any portion of trench open at end of day's operation.

Keep excavated and stockpiled materials safe distance away from edge of trench as directed Owner.

Restrict vehicle operations directly adjacent to open trenches.

Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material in approved location on site off site.

Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage or natural watercourses.

Earth bottoms of excavations to be undisturbed soil, level, free from loose, soft or organic matter.

Notify Owner when bottom of excavation is reached.

Obtain Owner approval of completed excavation.

Remove unsuitable material from trench bottom including those that extend below required elevations to extent and depth as directed by Owner.

Correct unauthorized over-excavation as follows: .1 Fill under bearing surfaces and footings with concrete specified for footings fill

concrete Type 2 fill compacted to not less than 100% of Standard Proctor maximum dry density.

.2 Fill under other areas with Type 2 fill compacted to not less than 98 % of Standard Proctor maximum dry density.

Hand trim, make firm and remove loose material and debris from excavations. .1 Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed, compact foundation soil to

density at least equal to undisturbed soil. .2 Clean out rock seams and fill with concrete mortar or grout to approval of Owner.

Install geotextiles in accordance with Section 31 32 19 - Geotextiles.

3.6 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION

Use types of fill as indicated or specified below. Compaction densities are percentages of maximum densities obtained from ASTM D698 ASTM D1557.





.1 Exterior side of perimeter walls: use Type 3 fill to subgrade level. Compact to 98% of corrected maximum dry density.

.2 Within building area: use Type 2 to underside of base course for floor slabs. Compact to 100% of corrected maximum dry density.

.3 Under concrete slabs: provide 150mm compacted thickness base course of Type 1 fill topped with shearmat filler as indicated to underside of slab. Compact base course to 98%.

.4 Fill type and compaction values under pathways, play courts, curbs, parking lots, stairs, concrete pads, grassed areas, and utility trenches to be as indicated on drawings.

.5 Place unshrinkable fill in areas as indicated.

3.7 BEDDING AND SURROUND OF UNDERGROUND SERVICES

Place and compact granular material for bedding and surround of underground services as indicated and as specified in individual technical Specification Sections.

Place bedding and surround material in unfrozen condition.

3.8 BACKFILLING

Use vibratory compaction equipment.

Do not proceed with backfilling operations until completion of following: .1 Testing Agency and Owner has inspected and approved installations. .2 Testing Agency and Owner has inspected and approved of construction below

finish grade. .3 Inspection, testing, approval, and recording location of underground utilities. .4 Removal of concrete formwork. .5 Removal of shoring and bracing; backfilling of voids with satisfactory soil

material.

Areas to be backfilled to be free from debris, snow, ice, water and frozen ground.

Do not use backfill material which is frozen or contains ice, snow or debris.

Place backfill material in uniform layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness up to grades indicated. Compact each layer before placing succeeding layer.

Backfilling around installations:

.1 Place bedding and surround material as specified.

.2 Do not backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete within 24 hours after placing of concrete.

.3 Place layers simultaneously on both sides of installed Work to equalize loading.

.4 Where temporary unbalanced earth pressures are liable to develop on walls or other structures:





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.1 Permit concrete to cure for minimum 14 days or until it has sufficient strength to withstand earth and compaction pressure and approval obtained from testing Agency or:

.2 If approved by Testing Agency, erect bracing or shoring to counteract unbalance, and leave in place until removal is approved by testing Agency.

Place unshrinkable recycled fill in areas as indicated.

Consolidate and level unshrinkable fill with internal vibrators.

Install drainage filter system in backfill as indicated.

3.9 RESTORATION

Reinstate pavements and sidewalks disturbed by excavation to thickness, structure and elevation which existed before excavation.

Use temporary plating to support traffic loads over unshrinkable fill for initial 24 hours.

END OF SECTION



31 32 19 - GEOTEXTILES


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED

Section 33 46 16 – Subdrains

1.2 REFERENCES

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM), latest updates at time of tender: .1 ASTM D4491-99a, Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles

by Permittivity. .2 ASTM D4595-86, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by

the Wide-Width Strip Method. .3 ASTM D4716-01, Test Method for Determining the (In-Plane) Flow Rate Per Unit

Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a Geosynthetic Using a Constant Head. .4 ASTM D4751-99a, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening

Size of a Geotextile.

Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB), latest updates at time of tender: .1 CAN/CGSB-4.2 No. 11.2-M89, Textile Test Methods - Bursting Strength - Ball

Burst Test. .2 CAN/CGSB-148.1, Methods of Testing Geotextiles and Complete

Geomembranes. .1 No.2-M85, Methods of Testing Geosynthetics - Mass per Unit Area. .2 No.3-M85, Methods of Testing Geosynthetics - Thickness of Geotextiles. .3 No.6.1-93, Methods of Testing Geotextiles and Geomembranes -

Bursting Strength of Geotextiles Under No Compressive Load. .4 No.7.3-92, Methods of Testing Geotextiles and Geomembranes - Grab

Tensile Test for Geotextiles. .5 No. 10-94, Methods of Testing Geosynthetics - Geotextiles - Filtration

Opening Size.

Canadian Standards Association (CSA International), latest updates and time of tender: .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded

Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CAN/CSA-G164-M92, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS), latest update at time of tender: .1 OPSS 1860, Material Specification for Geotextiles.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

During delivery and storage, protect geotextiles from direct sunlight, ultraviolet rays, excessive heat, mud, dirt, dust, debris and rodents.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Geotextile: woven or non-woven synthetic fibre fabric, supplied in rolls.

.1 Type as indicated on drawings.

Physical properties .1 Thickness: to CAN/CGSB-148.1. .2 Mass per unit area: to CAN/CGSB-148.1. .3 Tensile strength and elongation (in any principal direction): to ASTM D4595. .4 Grab tensile strength and elongation: to CAN/CGSB-148.1, No.7.3. .5 Ball burst strength: to CAN/CGSB-4.2. .6 Bursting strength: to CAN/CGSB-148.1.

Hydraulic properties:

.1 Apparent opening size (AOS): to ASTM D4751.

.2 Filtration opening size (FOS): to CAN/CGSB-148.1 No.10 OPSS 1860.

.3 Transmissivity: to ASTM D4716.

.4 Permitivity: to ASTM D4491.

Securing pins and washers: to CAN/CSA-G40.21, Grade 300W, hot-dipped galvanized with minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2to CAN/CSA G164.

Factory seams: sewn in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Thread for sewn seams: equal or better resistance to chemical and biological degradation than geotextile.


3.1 INSTALLATION

Place geotextile material by unrolling onto graded surface in orientation, manner and

locations indicated.

Place geotextile material smooth and free of tension stress, folds, wrinkles and creases.

Overlap each successive strip of geotextile 600 mm over previously laid strip or as otherwise indicated.

Join successive strips of geotextile by sewing.

Protect installed geotextile material from displacement, damage or deterioration before, during and after placement of material layers.





After installation, cover with overlying layer within 4 hours of placement.

Replace damaged or deteriorated geotextile to approval of Owner.

3.2 PROTECTION

Vehicular traffic not permitted directly on geotextile.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 11 16 - GRANULAR SUB-BASE



American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest updates at time of tender:

.1 ASTM C117-95, Standard Test Methods for Material Finer Than 0.075 mm Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

.2 ASTM C131-96, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of

.3 Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

.4 ASTM C136-96a, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

.5 ASTM D422-63(1998), Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.

.6 ASTM D698-00a, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400ft-lbf/ft3) (600kN-m/m3).

.7 ASTM D1557-00, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000ft-lbf/ft3) (2,700kN-m/m3).

.8 ASTM D1883-99, Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory Compacted Soils.

.9 ASTM D4318-00, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and PlastiOwner Index of Soils.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Granular sub-base material:

.1 Crushed, pit run or screened stone, gravel or sand.

.2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1 CAN/CGSB-8.2.

.3 Table: Sieve Designation % Passing 100mm - - - - 75mm 100 100 100 - 50mm - - - 100 37.5mm - - - - 25mm 55-100 - - 60-100 19mm - - - - 12.5mm - - - 38-70 9.5mm - - - - 4.75mm 25-100 25-85 - 22-55





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

2.00mm 15-80 - - 13-42 0.425mm 4-50 5-30 0-30 5-28 0.180mm - - - - 0.075mm 0-8 0-10 0-8 2-10

.4 Other Properties as follows:

.1 Liquid Limit: to ASTM D4318, Maximum 25.

.2 PlastiOwner Index: to ASTM D4318, Maximum 6.

.3 Los Angeles degradation: to ASTM C131. Max% Loss by mass: 40 50.

.4 Particles smaller than 0.02 mm: to ASTM D422, Maximum 3%.

.5 Soaked CBR: to ASTM D1883, Min40 when compacted to 100% of ASTM D1557.


3.1 PLACING

Place granular sub-base after subgrade is inspected and approved by Owner.

Construct granular sub-base to depth and grade in areas indicated.

Ensure no frozen material is placed.

Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, free from snow or ice.

Begin spreading sub-base material on crown line or high side of one-way slope.

Place granular sub-base materials using methods which do not lead to segregation or

degradation.

For spreading and shaping material, use spreader boxes having adjustable templates or screeds which will place material in uniform layers of required thickness.

Place material to full width in uniform layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness. Engineer Consultant may authorize thicker lifts (layers) if specified compaction can be achieved.

Shape each layer to smooth contour and compact to specified density before succeeding layer is placed.

Remove and replace portion of layer in which material has become segregated during spreading.

3.2 COMPACTION

Compaction equipment to be capable of obtaining required material densities.





Efficiency of equipment not specified to be proved at least as efficient as specified equipment at no extra cost and written approval must be received from Owner before use.

Equipped with device that records hours of actual work, not motor running hours.

Compact to density of not less than 98% maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 ASTM D1557.

Shape and roll alternately to obtain smooth, even and uniformly compacted sub-base.

Apply water as necessary during compaction to obtain specified density.

In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact to specified density with mechanical tampers approved by Owner.

Correct surface irregularities by loosening and adding or removing material until surface is within specified tolerance.

3.3 PROOF ROLLING

For proof rolling use standard roller of 45400 kg gross mass with four pneumatic tires

each carrying 11350 kg and inflated to 620 kPa. Four tires arranged abreast with centre to centre spacing of 730 mm maximum.

Obtain approval from Owner to use non standard proof rolling equipment.

Proof roll at level in sub-base as indicated. If non standard proof rolling equipment is approved, Owner to determine level of proof rolling.

Make sufficient passes with proof roller to subject every point on surface to three separate passes of loaded tire.

Where proof rolling reveals areas of defective subgrade: .1 Remove sub-base and subgrade material to depth and extent as shown. .2 Backfill excavated subgrade with common material and compact in accordance

with this section. .3 Replace sub-base material and compact.

Where proof rolling reveals areas of defective sub-base, remove and replace in

accordance with this section at no extra cost.

3.4 SITE TOLERANCES

Finished sub-base surface to be within 10 mm of elevation as indicated but not uniformly

high or low.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

3.5 PROTECTION

Maintain finished sub-base in condition conforming to this section until succeeding base is constructed, or until granular sub-base is accepted by Independent Testing Agency and Owner.

END OF SECTION



32 11 23 - GRANULAR BASE


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Section 32 11 16 - Granular Sub-base.

1.2 REFERENCES

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest updates at time of tender: .1 ASTM C117-95, Standard Test Methods for Material Finer Than 0.075 mm Sieve

in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. .2 ASTM C131-96, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of

Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

.3 ASTM C136-96a, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

.4 ASTM D698-00a, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400ft-lbf/ft3) (600kN-m/m3).

.5 ASTM D1557-00, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000ft-lbf/ft3) (2,700kN-m/m3).

.6 ASTM D1883-99, Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory Compacted Soils.

.7 ASTM D4318-00, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and PlastiOwner Index of Soils.



Stockpile minimum 50% of total aggregate required prior to beginning operation.

Store cement in weathertight bins or silos that provide protection from dampness and easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Granular base materials: .1 Crushed stone or gravel.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1 CAN/CGSB-8.2. .1 Gradation Method # 1 to:

Sieve Designation % Passing (1) (2) (3) 100mm - - - 75mm - - - 50mm 100 - - 37.5mm 70-100 - - 25mm - 100 - 19mm 50-75 - 100 12.5mm - 65-100 70-100 9.5mm 40-65 - - 4.75mm 30-50 35-60 40-70 2.00mm - 22-45 23-50 0.425mm 10-30 10-25 7-25 0.180mm - - - 0.075mm 3-8 3-8 3-8

.2 Gradation Method #2 to: insert name of agency and material type except

that percentage finer than 0.075 mm not to exceed 8%. .3 Material to level surface depressions to meet gradation (2) limits in

accordance with Method #1. .4 Liquid limit: to ASTM D4318, maximum 25. .5 PlastiOwner index: to ASTM D4318, maximum 6. .6 Los Angeles degradation: to ASTM C131. Max. % loss by weight: 45. .7 Crushed particles: at least 60% of particles by mass within each of

following sieve designation ranges to have at least 1 freshly fractured face. Material to be divided into ranges using methods of ASTM C136.

Passing Retained on 50mm to 25mm 25mm to 19.0mm 19.0mm to 4.75mm

.8 Soaked CBR: to ASTM D1883, min 80 - 100, when compacted to 100%

of ASTM D1557.


3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

Place granular base after sub-base subgrade surface is inspected and approved by

Owner.





Placing .1 Construct granular base to depth and grade in areas indicated. .2 Ensure no frozen material is placed. .3 Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, free from snow and ice. .4 Begin spreading base material on crown line or on high side of one-way slope. .5 Place material using methods which do not lead to segregation or degradation of

aggregate. .6 For spreading and shaping material, use spreader boxes having adjustable

templates or screeds which will place material in uniform layers of required thickness.

.7 Place material to full width in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness. Owner may authorize thicker lifts (layers) if specified compaction can be achieved.

.8 Shape each layer to smooth contour and compact to specified density before succeeding layer is placed.

.9 Remove and replace that portion of layer in which material becomes segregated during spreading.

Compaction Equipment

.1 Compaction equipment to be capable of obtaining required material densities.

.2 Efficiency of equipment not specified to be proved at least as efficient as specified equipment at no extra cost and written approval must be received from Engineer Consultant before use.

.3 Equipped with device that records hours of actual work, not motor running hours.

Compacting .1 Compact to density not less than 98% maximum dry density in accordance with

ASTM D698 ASTM D1557. .2 Shape and roll alternately to obtain smooth, even and uniformly compacted base. .3 Apply water as necessary during compacting to obtain specified density. .4 In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact to specified density with

mechanical tampers approved by Owner. .5 Correct surface irregularities by loosening and adding or removing material until

surface is within specified tolerance.

Proof rolling .1 For proof rolling use standard roller of 45400 kg gross mass with four pneumatic

tires each carrying 11350 kg and inflated to 620 kPa. Four tires arranged abreast with centre to centre spacing of 730 mm.

.2 Obtain approval from Owner to use non standard proof rolling equipment.

.3 Proof roll at level in granular base as indicated. If use of non standard proof rolling equipment is approved, Owner to determine level of proof rolling.

.4 Make sufficient passes with proof roller to subject every point on surface to three separate passes of loaded tire.

.5 Where proof rolling reveals areas of defective subgrade: .1 Remove base, sub-base and subgrade material to depth and extent as

directed by Owner. .2 Backfill excavated subgrade with common material and compact in

accordance with this Section and with Section 32 11 16.01 - Granular Sub-Base .





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

.3 Replace sub-base material and compact in accordance with Section 32 11 16.01 - Granular Sub-base.

.4 Replace base material and compact in accordance with this Section. .6 Where proof rolling reveals defective base or sub-base, remove defective

materials to depth and extent as directed by Owner and replace with new materials in accordance with Section 32 11 16.01 - Granular Sub-base and this section at no extra cost.

3.2 SITE TOLERANCES

Finished base surface to be within plus or minus 10mm of established grade and cross

section but not uniformly high or low.

3.3 PROTECTION

Maintain finished base in condition conforming to this Section until succeeding material is

applied or until acceptance by Testing Agency and Owner.

END OF SECTION


DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

33 46 16 - SUBDRAINS


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Section 31 32 19 – Geotextiles Section 31 23 33 - Excavating Trenching and Backfilling

1.2 REFERENCES

American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM), latest updates at time of tender: .1 ASTM C4-02, Standard Specification for Clay Drain Tile and Perforated Clay

Drain Tile. .2 ASTM C136-01, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates. .3 ASTM C444M-95, Standard Specification for Perforated Concrete Pipe Metric. .4 ASTM C654M-99, Standard Specification for Porous Concrete Pipe Metric. .5 ASTM D698-00a, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3(600 kN-m/m3)).

Bureau de normalisation du Québec (BNQ), latest updates at time of tender: .1 BNQ 3624-115-2002-02-04, Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings-Flexible

Corrugated Pipes for Drainage-Characteristics and Test Methods.


Canadian Standards Association (CSA International), latest updates at time of tender: .1 CSA B1800-02, Plastic Non-pressure Pipe Compendium - B1800 Series

(Consists of B181.1, B181.2, B181.3, B181.5, B182.1, B182.2, B182.4, B182.6, B182.7, B182.8 and B182.11). .1 CSA B182.1-02, Plastic Drain and Sewer Pipe and Pipe Fittings.

.2 CSA-G401-01, Corrugated Steel Pipe Products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittals.

Inform Independent Testing Agency of proposed source of bedding and filter materials and provide access for sampling at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work.

Submit to Independent Testing Agency for testing samples of materials proposed for use at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work.

Submit manufacturer's test data and certification that drain pipe materials meet requirements of this Section at least 4 weeks prior to beginning Work.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

Certification to be marked on pipe.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Plastic pipe and fittings: to BNQ 3624-115, nominal inside diameter 100mm.

Perforated plastic pipe and fittings: to CAN/CSA-B182.1. Nominal pipe sizes as indicated

on drawings.

Bedding gravel or crushed stone; hard, durable particles, graded evenly in size from 16 to 8 mm.

Granular filter material as per detail and in accordance with the following requirements: .1 Screened stone or gravel. .2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136. Sieve sizes

to CAN/CGSB-8.1 CAN/CGSB-8.2.

Table Sieve Designation % Passing 200mm - 75mm - 50mm - 38.1mm - 25mm - 19mm - 12.5mm 100 9.5mm - 4.75mm 70-100 2.00mm 60-95 0.425mm 15-40 0.180mm 0-10 0.075mm -

Geotextile filter: In accordance with Section 31 32 19 - Geotextiles.


3.1 TRENCHING

Do excavating trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 33 - Excavating

Trenching and Backfilling.





Place bedding filter material after approval of excavation trench by Independent Testing Agency.

3.2 BEDDING

Place 100mm thick layers of bedding filter material to full trench width as indicated and

compact to minimum 95% of corrected maximum dry density maximum density to ASTM D698.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SUB-DRAINS

Lay pipe drains on prepared bed, true to line and grade with inverts smooth and free of

sags or high points. .1 Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with bed throughout full length.

Begin laying at outlet and proceed in upstream direction.

Lay perforated pipes with perforations downwards at 4 o'clock and 8 o'clock positions.

Lay bell and spigot pipe with bell ends facing upstream.

.1 Do not mortar joints. Cover joints of bell and spigot clay tile pipe with two-ply tar paper strips not less than 150

mm wide. .1 Use strips of sufficient length to permit ends to be laid flat on bedding and turned

outward on either side of pipe for a minimum distance of 75 mm.

Make joints tight in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Make watertight connections to existing drains, new or existing manholes and catch basins.

Plug open upstream ends of pipes with watertight concrete, steel or wood bulkheads.

Surround pipe with bedding gravel and compact to the approval of the Independent Testing Agency.

Surround and cover drain with filter material in uniform 150 mm layers as indicated to an elevation of at least 150 mm above top of drain and compact to at least 95% of corrected maximum dry density 98% maximum density to ASTM D698.

Wrap or sleeve perforated pipe with geotextile filter as indicated.

Backfill remainder of trench to Section 31 23 33 - Excavating Trenching and Backfilling.

Do not place bedding surround and backfill materials in frozen condition.

Protect sub-drains against flotation during installation.





WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

END OF SECTION

Mechanical Specifications

INTERIOR RENOVATIONS WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1070 McCarney Street East, Oakville, ON Project No.: 17040

JSC Project No.: 17-127

ISSUED FOR PERMIT / TENDER

Date: MARCH 12, 2017 Prepared by: Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. 7405 East Danbro Crescent Mississauga, ON, L5N 6P8

MECHANIICAL SPECIFICATION Table of Contents MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS

SECTIONS TITLE

21 05 01 General Mechanical Requirements 21 07 00 Insulation 23 31 00 Air Distribution

SECTION 21 05 01 Contents Page GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE 1.1 General Conditions 1.2 By-Laws & Permits 1.3 Co-Operation & Co-Ordination 1.4 Job Site Work Shop and Storage 1.5 Shop Drawings 1.6 Examine Site & Conditions 1.7 Drawings 1.8 Record Drawings 1.9 CAD Drawings 1.10 Cutting & Patching 1.11 Excavating and Backfilling 1.12 Supports 1.13 Hangers 1.14 Sleeves 1.15 Access Doors 1.16 Flashings 1.17 Wiring & Motors 1.18 Painting 1.19 Equipment Markers & Nameplates 1.20 Cleanup 1.21 Instructions to Operator 1.22 Cold Weather Work

SECTION 21 05 01 Page 1 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS .1 Conform to all applicable Sections of Division 1 and Instructions to Bidders. .2 All work must confirm to local Bylaws, Ontario Building Code and Authorities having

jurisdictions. .3 Work includes supply and installation of all labour and material necessary for various

systems as required to make finished installations even though each and every miscellaneous item of labour and material is not mentioned in Specifications or shown on Drawings.

1.2 BY-LAWS & PERMITS .1 Obey Government, Municipal and Underwriters Standards and perform work in accordance

with requirements of By-Laws and Regulations in force where building is located. Obtain and pay for all permits, fees, inspections, deposits and service charges required by Authorities.

1.3 CO-OPERATION & CO-ORDINATION .1 Each Section and Trade shall: Confer with other Sections and arrange work so it will be carried on in best interests of all

concerned bearing in mind building construction and finish required. 1.4 JOB SITE WORK SHOP AND STORAGE .1 Supply job site office, workshop, tools, scaffolds and material storage as required to

complete the work of this Division. Location of temporary buildings, use of space on site or within building shall be to later direction.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit for review within 30 days of Contract award, two (2) copies and one (1)

reproduceable of Shop Drawings and Room Equipment Schedules covering material to be supplied.

1.6 EXAMINE SITE & CONDITIONS .1 Examine site and local conditions during tender period. Examine carefully all Drawings and

complete Specifications to ensure that work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. Before commencing work, examine the work of other Sections and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work, its completion or warranty. No allowance will be made later for any expense incurred through failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies in writing.


JSC NO. 18-115

1.7 DRAWINGS .1 Mechanical Drawings do not show all existing, structural and related details. Take

information involving accurate measurement from building drawings, or at building. Make, without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to runs of piping, conduits and ducts to accommodate structural conditions. Location of pipes, ducts, conduits and other equipment may be altered by Architect without extra charge provided change is made before installation and does not necessitate major additional material.

1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 Conform to General Requirements. Maintain at least 2 sets of documents and clearly mark on same as job progresses, changes and deviations from work shown so that on completion Owner will have records of exact location of ducts and equipment and record of material and equipment changes.

.2 Contractor shall obtain clean set of prints from Consultant at start of Contract Work and shall

keep these prints up-to-date at jobsite, accurately recording all changes made on project and locating all services, equipment, etc. which may have been shown only diagrammatically on Contract Documents.

.3 Contractor shall ensure that as-built information is accurately recorded and shall check

same. As-Built drawings shall be reviewed with Consultant at each jobsite meeting.

.4 Upon completion of Contract Work, prior to Substantial Performance inspection and after final review with Consultants, Contractor shall neatly transfer recorded information and make final As-Built submission to Consultant for review in the following form: - One (1) set of clean, legible prints. - One (1) ACAD 2017 format drawings. Files shall retain all setting (layers, line

types, scales colors, etc) as used in the drawing files (produced) by consultant.

.5 After Record Drawings have been reviewed, revised if necessary until acceptable to the consultant. Deliver drawings in the form of CD (CAD + PDF) and three (3) sets of prints taken from that CD to Owner.

1.9 CAD DRAWINGS

.1 If required for coordination purposes or for As-Builts, the Contractor may obtain Design

Drawings from the Consultant after completing the required Document Request Form and paying a handling charge of $75 + HST per drawing.

1.10 CUTTING & PATCHING .1 Perform all cutting and patching of portions of building as necessary to accomodate

installation of work of the Contract.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Work shall be done by qualified tradesmen, using materials matching or compatible with original construction, surfaces and finishes. All cutting shall be neatly done and kept to minimum amount necessary.

.3 Core drill holes in concrete walls and floors for piping where not previously sleeved. Do not

use mechanical hammers or drills without prior approval in writing. Neatly patch holes to approval and where located in exterior walls above grade, make watertight. Make holes in walls below grade with due provision for pipe movement (min. 50 mm clear all around), fill with 50 mm thick fibreglass blanket insulation and seal watertight with mastic.

1.11 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING .1 Perform necessary excavating and backfilling necessary to connect new work to existing

drains. Remove existing excavated material not approved as backfill. Provide necessary supports, shoring incompliance with Occupation Health and Safety Standards, and Ontario Trench Excavator's Protection Act.

.2 Backfill at least 150 mm above top of piping with clean coarse sand hand placed in 75 mm

layers and compacted to 100% density proctor (ASTM #D968 compaction). .3 Backfill balance of excavation with M.T.C. granular `B' or clean coarse sand in 150 mm

layers mechanically compacted to give minimum of 105% density proctor (ASTM #D968) compaction. Backfill under all existing, new and future concrete paved surface shall be M.T.C. Granular `B'.

.4 Verify requirement with local authorities before tender submission. Comply to all

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.12 SUPPORTS .1 Provide supports, stands and platforms necessary for proper installation of equipment and

components, of concrete, steel or wood as may be required and as approved or elsewhere shown or specified. Provide necessary anchor bolts and other fastenings. Secure work to concrete with Phillips "Red Head" concrete anchors.

.2 Construct concrete bases at least 100 mm high (or as otherwise noted), of 20 MPa concrete

with trowel finish in compliance with applicable articles of Concrete Section for support of equipment noted, size 50 mm larger than base of apparatus with outside corners chamfered 40 mm. Grout pumps and equipment to their bases to approval.

1.13 HANGERS .1 Provide hangers to support unburied piping and ducts. Obtain approval of methods of

hanging to building before proceeding. Ensure that load on building structure does not exceed maximum mechanical loading per square metre shown on Structural Drawings or as directed by Architect.

.2 Do not hang from steel or tectum decking. Provide structural framing where necessary to

support work in these areas. Provide hanger at each fitting.


JSC NO. 18-115

.3 Support unburied horizontal cast iron piping at each hub length (max. 1500 mm) with Grinnell #260 or Myatt #124 clevis hangers. Where groups of fittings occur, not more than 900 mm shall be between hangers. Support other horizontal piping with Grinnell #260 or Myatt #124 clevis hangers as follows:

Up to 32 mm size - 1800 mm maximum spacing 38 to 75 mm size - 3000 mm maximum spacing 88 mm and larger - 4300 mm maximum spacing .4 Support plumbing piping in accordance with more stringent requirements of Plumbing Code

or otherwise specified. .5 Support through vertical piping with Grinnell #261 or Myatt #182 riser clamps at each floor

level or maximum of 3000 mm whichever is shorter. Secure vertical RWL, soil and vent risers at 1500 mm intervals to approval. Secure small vertical piping with long ring stays.

.6 On copper piping, provide approved separation to ensure no contact between copper and

ferrous hanger or other work. Provide barrier to prevent copper pipe being in contact with ferrous or cinder materials.

.7 Support piping on walls with Myatt #157 offset wall hooks fastened to wall with toggle bolts or

Phillips "Red Head" concrete anchors. .8 Where structural bearings do not exist, provide angle or channel iron of sufficient size from

other structural bearings to support hangers or equipment. .9 Hangers shall be arranged so as to load structural steel in a concentric manner. Loads to be

imparted either on joist panel points or within 150 mm of panel joint. .10 Do NOT use percussion type fastenings of any kind without prior approval in writing. .11 Support all hangers directly from building structure only. Do not support pipes, ducts or other

equipment from other pipes, ducts, equipment, suspended ceilings or their suspension systems.

1.14 SLEEVES .1 Where pipes pass through interior masonry walls, provide metallic pipe sleeves of equivalent

weight and material. Where ducts pass through interior masonry walls, provide suitable 18 gauge galvanized steel sleeves. Size sleeves on insulated piping or ducts to permit insulation to continue through sleeves.

.2 Where piping or ducts pass through interior concrete or frame construction, provide 1.2 mm

thick galvanized iron sleeves. On copper pipe, provide copper pipe sleeves. .3 Sleeves on buried piping shall be 50 mm larger all round than pipe and be filled with 50 mm

thick fiberglass blanket insulation and sealed with mastic.


JSC NO. 18-115

.4 Seal spaces between unburied pipes and ducts through "required fire separations" with U.L.C. listed (Guide 40U19) fire stopping including pipe insulation. Fire stopping shall comply with O.B.C., be approved by local Building Department and installed as per listing card. Fire stopping shall have approved FH (hose stream) rating.

.5 Seal all holes and openings through floors water tight. .6 In rooms with mechanical equipment, sleeves through floors shall be welded water stop

flange steel pipe sleeves poured in place and extending at least 100 mm above floor or pipes shall have Corrosion Services Co. Ltd. "Link Seals" installed to manufacturers directions. Where ducts pass through floors, provide 100 mm high by 100 mm concrete curb around ducts sealed to floor. Locate openings in field to be snug around ducts and be responsible for correct size and location.

1.15 ACCESS DOORS .1 Supply as required, 2.8 mm thick hinged metal access doors with frames for installation by

other Sections in walls or ceilings to permit access to built-in or unaccessible controls, dampers, valves, cleanouts and components.

.2 Access doors shall be Stelpro Ltd. #722 flush type of size to suit controls, valves, cleanouts,

dampers or components serviced, minimum size 300 mm x 300 mm "Reach-in", with prime coat finish, concealed hinges, screwdriver lock and plaster key. Access doors in finished masonry or drywall construction shall be #722 less plaster key. Access doors shall be #726 in acoustic tile ceilings; #726E in plaster ceilings and #704 in drywall ceilings.

1.16 FLASHINGS .1 Where vents stacks or other pipes pass through roof, provide Thaler insulated "Stack Jacks",

spun aluminum flashings and telescopic cap. .2 Where ducts pass through roof, another Section will provide suitable curb and flashing.

Provide approved counterflashing of same material as flashing. 1.17 WIRING & MOTORS .1 Electric connections and wiring for equipment supplied under this Division will be by

Electrical Division except for Temperature Control System, Air Conditioning Equipment, and other equipment noted elsewhere. Provide electric wiring to all complete systems. All electrical work must conform to conditions noted in Electrical Division and be concealed except in service areas. All wiring MUST be in conduit or EMT using #18 wire for 24 volt or less, #14 wire for 120 volt control and #12 wire for 120 volt power wiring. Use wiremold where exposed in finished areas.

.2 Electrically operated equipment shall be C.S.A. approved and bear approval label. Special

Inspection Label of Provincial Authority having jurisdiction will be accepted in lieu of C.S.A. approval. Each motor shall have an approved starter.


JSC NO. 18-115

.3 Supply controls and accessories required to operate equipment installed. Supply necessary wiring diagrams and instructions to Electrical Division. Starters and controls shall be for surface or flush mounting as required. Arrange equipment, piping and ductwork to permit access to and mounting of starters and controls. Co-operate with Electrical Division to ensure electrical equipment can be installed and serviced. See Electrical Drawings.

.4 Electrically operated equipment, starters and controls shall be rated for satisfactory operation

on following nominal system voltages unless otherwise noted: Up to and including 250 W - 60/1/120 V 370 W and larger - 60/3/575V or as noted SEE STARTER SCHEDULE VERIFY above with Electrical Division BEFORE ordering equipment. Starters for automatic

or remote device for interlock shall include H/O/A device. 1.18 PAINTING .1 Supply all equipment and materials fabricated from iron or steel (except piping and ductwork

materials) prime painted at factory before shipment. .2 All metal parts, miscellaneous metal items and work installed exterior to building must be

degreased and prime painted unless otherwise noted. 1.19 EQUIPMENT MARKERS & NAMEPLATES .1 Attach to each item of equipment (including electric motors), proper manufacturer's

nameplates showing size, model number, serial number, and all information usually provided including voltage, cycle, phase and horsepower of motors and name and address of unit manufacturer.

1.20 CLEANUP .1 On completion, remove from premises surplus materials and debris resulting from work of

this Division. Keep work areas clean and in a workmanlike manner at all times to approval. .2 Fill in, compact and level off exterior excavations after final settlement of backfill to approval. 1.21 INSTRUCTIONS TO OPERATOR .1 Instruct Building Operators in repair, maintenance and operation of Mechanical Systems and

associated equipment. .2 Supply full Operation and Maintenance Instructions in triplicate, each in stiff cover, three-ring

binder suitably indexed, separated and labelled. Operate each item of equipment in presence of Operators to ensure understanding of working parts and function of each item of equipment. Supply one complete set of "Reviewed" Shop Drawings in separate hard cover binder suitably separated and labelled for Owner's use.


JSC NO. 18-115

1.22 COLD WEATHER WORK .1 Wherever work is performed in surrounding air temperatures below 4.0oC special approved

precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to mortar, concrete or materials. All such materials used at such times shall be heated. Right is reserved to suspend work at any time should climatic conditions be deemed unsuitable for proper execution of work.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 07 00 Contents Page INSULATION DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions 1.2 Work Included 1.3 Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.2 Duct Insulation 2.3 Pipe and Equipment Insulation PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Testing 3.2 Installation Instructions 3.3 Field Quality Control

SECTION 21 07 00 Page 1 INSULATION DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Comply with requirements of Section 21 05 01, General Mechanical Requirements. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Work under this contract shall include but is not limited to the following. .2 Supply and install insulation for following piping and duct systems:

.1 Supply Air Ducts .2 H.W. Heating Piping

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit detailed list of material for each service stating manufacture, 'K' value, density, finish,

flame spread and smoke ratings, permability, materials, finishes, cements and adhesives. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Insulation, jackets and adhesives shall be incombustible and in compliance with Ontario

Building Code. Products containing asbestos shall not be used. .2 All insulation products used shall be fully tested and approved as fire retardent by

Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Limited. .3 Materials shall be of Canadian manufacture where available, of best quality of their

respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout. .4 All insulating materials shall be fire retardent. Adhesives shall be waterproof and

incombustible flame resistant. Combustible wrappings or vapour barriers used in conjunction with thermal insulating materials shall be treated to reduce their combustibility so that flame spread classification of entire assembly shall not exceed 25 and smoke developed number shall not exceed 50. Submit report from an approved testing laboratory confirming foregoing ratings.

.5 Wheat pastes shall not be used. .6 Canvas covering shall be close weave fibre fire retarding canvas of weights specified, 135.6

g/m2 where concealed and at least 203.4 g/m2 where exposed to view. .7 Consultant reserves right to demand test samples to composite insulation systems for fire

hazard test rating. .8 Where wire is specified to secure insulation, it shall be stainless steel wire, 1.3 mm gauge,

dead soft annealed type.


JSC NO. 18-115

2.2 DUCT INSULATION .1 Externally insulate all supply air duct carrying air conditioned with 25 mm thick rigid

glasswool 72 kg/m3 density vapour-seal duct insulation. Seal holes with Bakelite #110-14. Incase insulation in aluminum metal casing. Slope duct to shed water to sides.

2.3 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION .1 H.W. heating piping: 38 mm thick heavy density glass fibre preformed pipe insulation with

maximum of 0.033 conductivity at 10oC mean with factory applied vinyl foil kraft laminated glass fibre reinforced fire resistive vapour barrier jacket with not more than 1.15 perm rating (ASJ) with sealed lapped joints.

.2 Valves and fittings: 25 mm glass fibre blanket conforming to CGSB #51-BF11 compressed to

same thickness as adjoining insulation and secured with jute twine. Over this apply smooth coat of insulating cement and recover with 4 oz. (135.6 g/m2) canvas. On cold water piping wrap blanket with foil faced friction tape overlapped to form vapour barrier before applying insulation cement. Seal all vapour barriers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING .1 Insulation shall not be installed until piping and ductwork has been tested to Consultant's

satisfaction. Repair to or replacement of insulation is required if installed prior to such testing approvals being given.

.2 Insulate all supply air ducts carrying air conditioned air similar to exhaust air ducts. 3.2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS .1 General

.1 Pipe and fittings shall be dry, free of dirt, scale, rust, oil and grease before insulation is applied. Rustproof ferrous materials where necessary as directed by Consultant using approved materials and methods.

.2 All insulation material and adhesives shall be installed in strict compliance with latest

editions of manufacturer's recommendations and shall present neat workmanlike appearance upon completion.

.3 Under no circumstances shall ambient temperature in space be less than 10oC

during application of any insulation or finishing. Where higher temperature is required by manufacturer's recommendations, this higher temperature requirement shall be complied with.

.4 Work shall be performed only by tradesmen experienced in insulation work. See 21 05 01-1.3.


JSC NO. 18-115

.5 Recover all interior insulation exposed to view with 6 oz. (203.4 g/m2) canvas duck pasted on over insulation with approved flame resistant adhesive to form smooth even surface.

.6 Work which is inaccessible for application of insulation after installation shall be

insulated and finished before being placed in position. .7 Provide suitable approved openings in insulation for inspection outlets, equipment

nameplates and operating devices. .8 Install all insulation in first class manner with smooth and even surfaces. Outline of

round insulation shall be true circular and concentric shape. Outline of fitting insulation shall be shaped to blend with adjacent covering. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where full length section will fit.

.9 Joints in insulation shall be made by cementing pieces together and finishing so that

there are no cracks or gaps. .10 Take care that insulation over flexible connections in piping does not unduly

increase lateral or longitudinal stiffness of connections. .11 Sectional insulation furred into spaces or concealed in walls, hung ceilings and pipe

spaces shall not have extra jacket. However, canvas covers supplied as standard on insulation used in such locations, shall remain with overlap pasted down.

.12 Keep insulation clear of instruments, controls, components, access doors and

operating devices so that it will not hinder or interfere with removal, setting, reading of or access to same. Verify with Consultant as to whether such items are located properly before applying any insulation, otherwise be responsible for all retouching that may be required.

.13 Repair and reseal all breaks, cracks and perforations in vapour barriers. Seal all

weld pin penetrations of vapour barrier with 100 mm x 100 mm patch of aluminum foil tape.

.14 Size all insulation exposed to view and leave ready for painting by another Section

unless otherwise noted. .15 Insulation shall continue through sleeves and openings except at "Required Fire

Separations" where sleeves and openings shall be "Fire Stopped". See 21 05 01-3.9, Sleeves. Insulation shall be butted tight to fire stopping and vapour sealed.

.16 Insulate all piping noted to be electrically traced. Install insulation after electric trace

wiring is tested and approved.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Pipework

.1 Pipe insulation shall be carried uninterrupted through pipe sleeves except where otherwise noted or required by Ontario Building Code or local authority. Where space will not permit application of sectional insulation on pipes in sleeves, pack sleeves with approved fire stop material.

.2 Insulation shall be continuous on piping systems. Insulate valves and joints to same

thickness of insulation as specified for pipe. Seal vapour barriers to approval where pipes pass through sleeves after sleeves are packed.

.3 Do not insulate unions but terminate pipe insulation neatly with cement at each end

of unions except on cold water piping where unions shall be insulated. .3 Ductwork

.1 Co-operate with sheet metal installer to ensure correct installation of insulation plugs for pitot tube test openings in ductwork.

.2 Duct insulation shall be carried uninterrupted through sleeves except where

otherwise noted or required by Ontario Building Code or local authority. Where space will not permit application of sectional insulation on ducts in sleeves, pack sleeves with approved fire stop material. See 21 05 01-3.9. Seal vapour barriers to approval where ducts pass through sleeves after sleeves are packed.

.3 Where duct insulation is secured by wire or glass twine, it shall not be drawn so

tightly as to unduly compress insulation. Where Consultant judges insulation has been compressed too much under wire or twine or at corners, it shall be removed and reapplied.

.4 Sagging of duct insulation will not be accepted. Remove and reapply. .5 Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier by hanger or rods. Remove

hangers temporarily to facilitate installation of vapour barrier where required. .6 Supply and install cap strips to cover turned out legs of ductwork reinforcing and

supporting members. .7 Seal duct insulation at all joints, pins and openings. Tape joints with approved

self-adhesive foil faced 50 mm wide vapour barrier tape. .8 Insulate each duct access door to maintain insulation and vapour barrier rating when

access door is closed. .9 Where ducts are acoustically lined, thermal insulation is not required but shall

overlap liner at least 150 mm.


JSC NO. 18-115

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Keep insulation materials dry while in shipment and on site. .2 Treat all insulation and finishes so that maximum Flame Spread Rating is 25 or lower and

Smoke Index Rating is 50 or lower. .3 Protect insulation passing through walls and similar barriers with a metal sleeve large

enough to accommodate full thickness of insulation. END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 21 00 Contents Page LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Instructions 1.2 Work Included

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials 2.2 Pipe & Fittings 2.3 Valves 2.4 Radiant Ceiling Panels 2.5 Flow Measuring Equipment

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Piping Tests 3.2 Piping Installation 3.3 Temperature Controls 3.4 Radiant Ceiling Panels 3.5 Cleaning Systems 3.6 Existing Systems & Materials

SECTION 23 21 00 Page 1 LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 Conform to requirements of Section 21 05 01 - General Mechanical Requirements. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Supply and installation of new piping. .2 Supply and installation of other components, accessories and incidentals to complete above

systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Materials shall be of Canadian manufacture where available, of best quality of their

respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout. 2.2 PIPE & FITTINGS .1 Heating hot water supply and return piping: standard black welded steel pipe, Schedule #40,

CSA #B63 (ASTM#A53). .2 Fittings on unburied piping up to and including 50 mm size: 125# steam WP black cast iron

ANSI #B16.4. Fittings on 63 mm size and larger: #B16.9 butt-welding type with bends, tees and reducing couplings manufactured welding fittings where 2 sizes or less smaller than main.

.3 Flanges: 150# steam WP welding type, ANSI #16e, either slip-on or welding neck. Unions:

ground joint, 150# steam WP brass to iron face. 2.3 VALVES .1 Valves shall be Crane, Jenkins, McAvity or Toyo (Industrial Class) manufacture, all-brass up

to and including 50 mm size. Larger sizes shall be iron body, bronze mounted. Valves 100 mm size and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be for 125 psi steam working pressure or equivalent.

.2 Shut-off valves, up to and including 50 mm size: lever handle ball valves rated for 600#

WWP, Crane #9302 or Alternate. .3 Shut-off valves 63 mm size and larger: Crane, McAvity, DeZurik, Toyo, Jenkins, Demco, or

Keystone lug wafer butterfly valves rated for 150# W.P., 135oC with bronze or alum/bronze disk, 18-8 S.S. shaft, EPT liner, 3 bearings, manual lockable lever operator, positive seal, conforming to MSS Standard SP-67 for dead end service with one flange disconnection.


JSC NO. 18-115

.4 Check valves: of same materials and pressures as specified for gate valves above, of swing check type with regrinding feature. Install check valves. Mission (Ontor Ltd.) "Duo-Check" #15SMF, Proquip Valve Inc. or Rite Mfgr. Ltd. check valves may be used in vertical position.

.5 Throttling, control or by-pass valves: globe type, Crane #14-1/2P or Alternate, all-brass up to

and including 50 mm size with stainless steel seats and discs. Larger size valves shall be butterfly valves as for shut-off valves but with manual gear operator.

2.4 RADIANT CEILING PANELS

.1 Provide Engineered Air Airex radiant ceiling panels (recessed) of size and types shown.

.2 The Airtec HEF-2 radiant ceiling extrusions shall consist of extruded aluminum with

copper tubing 12.8 mm (0.504”) I.D. mechanically attached to the aluminum face plate. The copper tube shall be held in place by an aluminum saddle which extends more than half way around the diameter of the tube. A non-hardening heat conductive paste shall be placed between the copper tubing and the aluminum face plate. Panels shall weigh no more than 10.5 kg/m2 (2.15 lb/ft2) when operating. The use of adhesive and/or clips to attach the copper tube to the extrusion will not be acceptable.

.3 Panels shall be finished in the manufacturer’s standard white colour. Obtain approval of

colour from Architect prior to manufacture. The panel lengths and widths to be obtained from Architectural drawings.

.4 All interconnecting of radiant panels by the mechanical contractor shall consist of 0.500”

O.D. soft copper tubing or AIRTEX accessories as recommended by Engineered Air, i.e. factory supplied 360 deg. inter-connecting loops and 180 deg. return U-bends. Supply shall be connected to tubing closest to perimeter wall. Multiple panels shall be circuited to ensure serpentine flow over complete length of zone. Individual serpentine panel coils connected in series is unacceptable for multiple panel zones.

.5 All radiant panels shall run continuous from wall-to wall and shall be field trimmed to

length ensuring adequate expansion allowance while maintaining panel end coverage by architectural mouldings. Inactive filler panels will be permitted only where indicated on drawings.

.6 The ceiling support mouldings and channels for Radiant Panels to be supplied and

installed by Mechanical Division. Ensure ceiling openings and wall mouldings are installed as per radiant panel shop drawings. Hanger wires for safety and seismic restraint shall be installed at 1200 mm (4 ft.) o.c.

When panel mounted in drywall ceiling as per floor plans provide factory built frame to house the panel.

.7 All panels to come with 600x600mm removable panel for access to piping connections. .8 Output based on 70C supply, 82.2C mean return, with 21C ambient air temperature

and 19.5C AUST with natural convection.


JSC NO. 18-115

.9 Alternate Equipment: 1. Trane 2. Rosemex Inc.

2.5 FLOW MEASURING EQUIPMENT .1 Provide in new supply lines to radiant panel, a S.A. Armstrong circuit balancing valve to suit

pipe size. .2 Circuit Balancing Valve shall be Model CBVI screwed end circuit balancing fitting with

shutoff/balancing valve, drain connection and meter connections. Fittings shall be rated for 862 kPa working pressure.

.3 Alternate Equipment: 1. Taco 2. Delta `P' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING TESTS .1 In addition to any tests required by local authorities, or elsewhere stated, test piping in

presence of Consultant as hereinafter described. .2 Notify Consultant in writing at least 48 hours prior to start of tests. Failure to do so may

require test to be redone. .3 Fill hot water heating piping systems with cold water and pressure test at 100 psi for not less

than four hours without decrease in pressure. .4 Perform tests before application of pipe covering. Test concealed piping before concealing

in structure. Protect equipment and materials not capable of withstanding test pressure during tests.

.5 Make leaks tight while systems are still under test. If this is impossible, remove and refit

defective parts. Caulking of threaded joints or welds will not be permitted. .6 After leaks have been repaired, repeat tests as often as necessary to ensure tightness of

each system. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION .1 Supply and install all necessary piping including fittings and unions to complete systems

shown. Cut pipes true and square, ream or file ends to smooth surface, all to pipe manufacturer's and accepted trade standards. Fittings shall be of equivalent bore as pipe, of equal strength and weight. Install piping to manufacturer's specifications and published directions.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Install piping to clear other piping, insulation, obstructions, access doors and controls. Take branches off mains with fitting and 45o or 90o elbow. Locate valves for easy operation. Locate valves in accessible locations to approval and to suit access.

.3 Do not use ferrous piping, fittings, bushings, nipples or plugs in copper piping. Supply

Dielectric bushings at connections to ferrous materials or equipment on water supply. .4 Make joints in copper piping with 95/5 tin/antimony solder with non-corrosive soldering flux.

Clean and ream each joint and remove excess solder and flux. Do not use hemp or lampwick on threads.

.5 Provide flanges, unions or compression fittings on equipment side of shut-off valves in piping

connections to equipment so same can be disconnected for service. Flanges and unions shall be of same material as piping.

.6 Install swing check valves in horizontal position ONLY. .7 Supply shut-off valve on connection to each item of equipment on system side of union or

compression fittings. .8 Supply on piping to and from each item of equipment necessary shut-off valves full size of

line for isolating same on system side of unions or flanges. .9 Support piping independently of equipment to permit disconnection and removal without

disruption of piping system. Locate valves, unions and flanges to permit easy removal of coils and equipment with minimum removal of piping.

3.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS .1 General

.1 Provide Honeywell temperature controls complete in all details, substantially as shown or described together with minor details not specifically mentioned, or shown, but as may be reasonably inferred and necessary to complete each system and place in successful operating service.

.2 Temperature control systems shall be electrically operated except where otherwise

noted. Systems shall be installed by competent mechanics and electricians employed by controls manufacturer.

.3 All thermostatic controls shall read in Celsius or have dual C/F scale. Wall mounted

manually operated controls in Service Rooms shall be mounted not more than 1800 mm above floor.

.4 Provide engraved black and white lamacoid plastic nameplates, 25 mm x 63 mm

minimum at all duct mounted instruments, reset controls, thermometers and panels so as to clearly indicate service of particular device. All manual switches unless they come with a standard nameplate shall be similarly labelled.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Electrical Wiring

.1 All electrical wiring required for temperature controls (except where otherwise noted) shall be supplied and installed by control supplier. All control wiring installed by control supplier shall be run in EMT conduit and shall otherwise conform with requirements of Electrical Division.

.2 Co-ordinate location of power outlets for controls with Electrical Division. Provide

on/off switch on each circuit for service. .3 Exterior wiring shall be in rigid conduit with waterproof connections and junction

boxes. .3 Actuators

.1 Electric/electronic sized to provide adequate power for opening, closing and or valves in specified time.

.2 Properly sized and selected by the manufacturer in accordance with load

requirements and characteristics of the systems to which they are applied.

.4 Automatic Control Valves

.1 Automatic control valves shall be properly sized and selected by the manufacturer in accordance with load requirements and characteristics of the systems to which they are applied. Provide all actuators and associated accessories.

.2 Valves shall be normally open, spring return. Do not provide, under any

conditions, valves smaller than 20mm (¾”).

.3 Water pressure drop through all automatic control valves: 18 kPa (2.5 psi) for all two-way valves.

.4 All valves to be modulating, fully proportional and shall spring return to normal

position on control system failure (i.e., rad valves full open, coil valves open to coil, see schematics). Drive open-drive close operation is not acceptable.

.5 For two-way radiation valves of 20mm-pipe diameter, valve orifice diameter shall

not be less than 13mm (½”) in diameter.

.5 Operating Instructions

.1 Supply operating instruction to Building Operators for Temperature Control System. Include description of sequence of operation, and drawings of system schematics. Provide three copies of control drawings and sequence of operations with maintenance instructions.


JSC NO. 18-115

.6 Sequence of Operation .1 Room thermostat shall modulate 2-way control valve in HWS line serving the radiant

panel to maintain room temperature. 3.4 RADIANT CEILING PANELS .1 All radiant panels shall be installed by personnel wearing clean white gloves, to avoid soiling

of panel face. .2 All active panels shall be covered with 25 mm thick batt insulation. 3.5 CLEANING SYSTEMS

.1 On completion, clean each complete piping system using cleaner for at least 48 hours at 70oF. Flush out each system, opening and cleaning each scale pocket and strainer.

.2 Provide written report to Architect when cleaning is completed on form supplied by Owner.

Advise Architect, Engineer and Owner at least 48 hours prior to cleanout so same can be witnessed.

3.6 EXISTING SYSTEMS & MATERIALS

.1 Removed materials shall be the property of the Mechanical Contractor. They shall be removed and allowed to accumulate on site.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 31 00 Contents Page AIR DISTRIBUTION DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions 1.2 Work Included 1.3 Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.2 Grilles & Diffusers 2.3 Low Pressure Ductwork PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Low Pressure Ductwork

3.2 Operate and Adjust Systems 3.3 Quiet Operation 3.4 Warranty

SECTION 23 31 00 Page 1 AIR DISTRIBUTION DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Comply with requirements of Section 21 05 01 - General Mechanical Requirements. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Supply and installation of each exhaust system shown on Drawings including fan, ductwork

and back-draft damper. .2 Supply and installation of supply/return air duct systems with accessories to complete each

system. .3 Supply and installation of all grilles and diffusers terminals and accessories for all duct

systems. .4 Supply and installation of all components, accessories and incidentals necessary to

complete each system and put same in safe, efficient operation. .5 Adjusting of air systems to obtain required air volumes in each room or space as directed by

Air Balance Specialist. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit Shop Drawings for following: 1. Grilles & Diffusers PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Materials shall be of Canadian manufacture where available, of best quality of their

respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout. 2.2 GRILLES & DIFFUSERS

.1 Provide E.H. Price Ltd. grilles and diffusers of sizes and types shown conforming to and Certified Test Rated in accordance with Air Diffusion Council Equipment Test Code No. 1062R2 of latest date.

.2 Grilles and diffusers shall be of steel construction (except use aluminium throughout all

aluminium duct systems, see Ductwork), with baked white enamel finish, to coordinate finish with Architect, except in walls where prime coat finish shall be supplied. Aluminum frames and bars shall be extruded from hard stock, free from pits and spots. Joints shall be 'hairline'. Attachment shall be with stainless steel or C.P. screws with 6.4 mm thick urethane sponge gasket set under flange.


JSC NO. 18-115

.3 Diffusers shall have white baked-on enamel finish. Diffusers shall be sized within limits of sound pressure level NC-26 curve in typical room having average attenuation of 8 DB. Each supply air diffuser shall be complete with flow equalizer and separate volume control operable from ceiling level. Supply diffusers shall be sized so that neck velocities do not exceed 4 m/sec.

.4 Return air grilles in lay-in ceilings in sizes 300 mm x 300 mm and larger shall be

#R80/BFD-0 Steel frame return air grille with aluminum eggcrate face plate, 16 mm wide margin to fit 600 mm O.C. lay-in inverted T-bar ceiling, less volume damper. Where located in ducted system, register shall have volume damper.

.5 Air volume extractor shall be #AE-1 set in each 90 degree supply take-off where shown

or where required to give efficient branch air duct performance. .6 Return air grilles into ceiling spaces shall be #510FSS set on transfer duct in ceiling.

Where grille size is 300 mm x 300 mm or larger in ceiling, provide R80/BFD grille. .7 Type A diffusers shall be #SCD-3, of steel construction and fit 600 mm O.C. T-bar

suspended lay-in ceilings. Inner assembly shall be easily removable. Diffuser face shall be 600 mm x 600 mm size unless otherwise noted.

.8 Alternate Equipment: 1. Kruger 2. Airvector 3. Carnes Mfg. Corp. 4. Nailor Hart Ind. Ltd. 5. Titus 6. Tutle & Bailey

2.3 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK .1 Ducts shall be made of first quality smooth finished, cold rolled galvanized steel guaranteed

to double seam without fracturing of thicknesses noted. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A525 (G90).

.2 Balancing damper operators shall be Duro Dyne #KS-195L lockable quadrant type. .3 Splitter damper operators shall be Duro Dyne #SRP24/SRP40 rod operators. .4 Flexible connectors shall be Duro Dyne Durolon coated glass fabric. .5 Pitot tube opening enclosures shall be Dial #1000 or 2000 (Air Power Equipment, Toronto). .6 Duct sealants shall be Duro Dyne S-3 standard type. .7 Air turning assembly shall be double thickness type with Duro Dyne #VR-2 vane rails. .8 Duct tape shall be Duro Dyne GS, 50 mm wide self adhesive duct tape.


JSC NO. 18-115

.9 Flexible duct shall be preinsulated Trans-Continental Equipment Ltd. type `PI' Al-U-Flex aluminum or Thermoflex M.KC glass fibre flexible air duct hoses each U.L.C. listed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK .1 Construct ducts and sheet metal shown and required to complete duct systems and put each

in operating condition. This Section is responsible for laying out this work. Drawings showing ducts must not be used for obtaining dimensions for layout except where dimensioned. Mechanical drawings indicate general location and route of ductwork to be installed. General layout of ducts may be taken from drawings but this Section is responsible for avoiding interferences with other Sections not specifically shown on mechanical drawings. Actual measurements shall be taken at building before ductwork is fabricated.

.2 Make without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to layout of ductwork to

accommodate structural, duct, piping, ceilings, electrical or equipment conditions. Where openings in walls for ductwork have been provided by others, make full use of such openings by fabricating ductwork to fit them or if necessary, provide offsets and transitions to suit. Location of ducts may be altered if change is made before installation, is submitted in writing, is approved by Architect and does not cause Owner or other Sections any extra expense.

.3 Construct ductwork of following sheet metal material: Longest Side U.S. Ga. Up to 300 mm 26 325 to 750 24 775 to 1350 22 1375 to 2100 20 2125 & Over 18 .4 Seal and waterproof ducts passing through roof. Solder all joints and seams. Degrease and

prime paint any ferrous counterflashings. .5 Form ducts with thickness markings on exterior of ductwork visible from floor. .6 Make joints suitably air tight with laps in direction of air flow. Wherever possible, sizes of

ducts shall conform to those indicated. Where building conditions require shape be modified, ducts must have same cross-sectional area indicated and width of duct shall not exceed six times depth except with special approval. Ductwork shall be in accordance with SMACNA Standard of latest publication. Duct leakage shall not exceed 3% of air volume at 500 Pa S.P.

.7 Construct ducts up to 600 mm with reinforced ribs formed by pocket slip spaced not more

than 2400 mm apart. Make ducts 600 mm and over in either dimension with reinforcing rib formed by pocket slip spaced not more than 1200 mm apart. Provide supplemental stiffening to prevent drumming and make a structurally sound assembly. Cross-break all duct faces except those to which rigid board type insulation is to be applied.


JSC NO. 18-115

.8 Install in ductwork where shown or required all components such as smoke detectors, controls and duct coils in accordance with setting instructions supplied by equipment supplier.

.9 Assemble various duct sections with Pittsburgh lock and grooved longitudinal seams

carefully closed for tightness and appearance. Join duct sections with pocket slip sized to conform to following requirements:

Maximum Duct Slip Slip Slip Side Duct U.S. Ga. U.S.Ga . Size Reinforced Up to 300 mm 26 26 25 No 325 to 750 24 24 25 No 775 to 1350 22 22 25 No 1375 to 2100 20 20 38 3 x 28 mm 2125 & over 18 18 38 3 x 28 mm .10 Support duct assemblies and components from building structure with 25 mm x 18 gauge

thick galvanized steel `Z' band hangers secured under ducts. Support ducts over 900 mm size with 6 mm steel rods and 6 mm x 32 x 6 angle iron. Space hangers at not over 1800 mm centres. See 210501-3.08 and 3.09.

.11 Make radius of turns at least one duct width. Where space prevents such radius, make turns

square and fit with turning vanes of double faced hollow type with Duro Dyne vane-rails secured with sheet metal screws.

.12 Provide splitter damper in each supply takeoff. Provide manual balancing damper in each

return or exhaust take-off set as close as possible to trunk duct. Make turning vanes, dampers, deflectors, splitters or same material and thickness as for equal size ductwork with formed edges, cross-broken and stiffened. Fit balancing dampers with lockable quadrant operator. Fit splitter dampers with rod-operators spaced at maximum 600 mm centres. Splitters shall be full depth of branch duct and 1-1/2 times branch width.

.13 Provide access doors of suitable size (min. 300 x 300 mm) for access to installed duct coils

and other equipment in ducts and where necessary for access to balancing and Fire Dampers. Make doors of 22 gauge thick galvanized steel hinged to 22 gauge thick galvanized mounting frame provided with approved quick fastening devices to give tight closure on fire resistant gasket. Provide access in ceilings where necessary for splitter and balancing dampers.

.14 Seal all duct joints during construction with duct sealer and duct tape. Apply to faces of joints

before cleats are installed. .15 Install grilles to manufacturer's direction. Supply and install baffles in diffusers to suit air

pattern. Adjust grilles and registers to give required air pattern.


JSC NO. 18-115

.16 Provide extension collars for outlets, air guide vanes and other special features as indicated or required including connections to equipment provided by Owner or other Sections. Transition ducts at not more than 30 degree slope to full size of each grille, register or equipment.

.17 Paint inside of duct connections behind each grille and register with two coats of black

non-reflective paint to visually conceal duct interior to approval. .18 Install ductwork to clear structural members and any fireproofing. Locate ducts to permit their

proper insulation where required. Do not remove or damage structural fireproofing. Leave space to permit insulation and fireproofing to be inspected and repaired.

.19 Provide 13 x 13 mm mesh galvanized steel birdscreen over intake of each fresh and open air

duct. Hinge birdscreen on upstream end of ducts for easy opening and secure with catches at not more than 600 mm centres.

.20 Provide where shown, Trans-Continental Equipment Ltd. pre-insulated Type ‘SI’ ‘A1-U-Flex’

aluminum or Thermoflex S-TL glass fibre flexible air duct hoses each U.L.C. listed for service. Secure hose to metal ducts with Duro Dyne S-3 duct sealant and tape seal with Permascreen fiberglass duct tape. Minimum length 25% longer than measured distance. Maximum length 50% more than measured length (max. 4.3 mm). On air conditioning ducts, provide Type ‘S’ preinsulated ‘A1-U-Flex’ SI or Thermoflex M.KC. Provide manual balancing damper in truck duct at connection to each flexible duct.

.21 Install flexible duct where shown. Secure hose to metal ducts with Duro Dyne S-3 duct

sealant and tape seal with Permascreen fiberglass duct tape. Minimum lenght 25% longer than measured distance. Maximum lenght 50% more than measured length, 10 feet total. Provide manual balancing damper in truck duct at connection to each flexible duct.

.22 Soundline all new supply air ducts with 25 flexible sound lining. .23 Provide pitot tube opening enclosures in ductwork for each supply, return and exhaust

system. Provide openings at all supply fan discharges, at return inlets and exhaust fan inlets, and at main branch duct take-offs. Locate openings in straight duct runs. Provide a minimum of three holes per duct at each of above locations, and at not more than 18" centres.

.24 After final adjustments are made for air handling systems, lock each control device in

position and visually indicate required setting. For splitter and balancing dampers, provide additional locking screw or bolt to approval.

3.2 OPERATE AND ADJUST SYSTEMS

.1 Operate all systems to full capacity and verify proper, safe efficient operation of all parts and each complete system. Oil motors and grease bearings before operating equipment.

.2 When work is complete and systems are in operation, adjust belt drives, controls, dampers

and thermostats so that there is even distribution of air throughout. Turn over to Owner, necessary keys, handles and operating devices for each system.


JSC NO. 18-115

.3 Each air handling system shall be balanced and air quantities per outlet listed and forwarded to Engineer for checking and approval. Balancing Report shall be suitably bound, 216 x 279 mm size, six copies required. Clean or replace filters and leave systems in clean operating condition.

.4 Test and balance each air system such that air quantities at each outlet, diffuser, grille and

register are within 5% of design figures. Fan speeds, splitter and balancing dampers shall be adjusted to achieve these results. Prepare and submit a final balancing report for checking and approval.

.5 Testing and balancing of air handling systems shall be under supervision of qualified

personnel. Balancing and testing shall be performed by trained personnel with records kept of each trial balance for supervision and approval.

.6 If spot checking reveals actual air quantities do not agree with air balance report, this Section

will be called upon to completely rebalance systems until satisfactory, without extra remuneration.

.7 Air quantities shall not be increased at the expense of adjacent Suites. Mark air balancing

dampers position in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. .8 Balancing existing hydronic system to within 5% of design water flow.

3.6 QUIET OPERATION .1 Each air handling system has been designed to be quiet in operation, N.C. 35 maximum. It is

responsibility of this Section to supply equipment and install systems to ensure noise levels will be maintained satisfactory to Architect.

3.7 WARRANTY .1 Furnish to Owner through General Contractor and Architect, written warranty covering

materials and workmanship and free service for one year from date of start of lien period. .2 Warrant apparatus installed to properly cool, heat and ventilate without undue noise through

every item of equipment and system and to maintain required room conditions. .3 Warranty shall entail repair or replacement of materials installed without charge to Owner

except where, in opinion of Architect, such repair or replacement was caused by improper use or lack of proper maintenance.

END OF SECTION

Electrical Specifications

INTERIOR RENOVATIONS WHITE OAKS LIBRARY

1070 McCarney Street East, Oakville, ON Project No.: 17040

JSC Project No.: 17-127

ISSUED FOR PERMIT / TENDER

Date: MARCH 12, 2017 Prepared by: Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. 7405 East Danbro Crescent Mississauga, ON, L5N 6P8

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION Table of Contents ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS

SECTIONS TITLE

26 01 00 Electrical General Requirements 26 05 00 Basic Materials & Methods 26 50 00 Lighting System 26 53 00 Emergency Lighting System 26 72 00 Fire Alarm System 26 75 00 Telecommunication Raceway System

SECTION 26 01 00 Contents Page ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE 1.1 References 1.2 Application 1.3 Work Included 1.4 Intent 1.5 Workmanship 1.6 Temporary & Trial Usage 1.7 By-Laws & Regulations 1.8 Permits & Fees 1.9 Certificates 1.10 Guarantee - Warranty 1.11 Specifications, Drawings & Job Conditions 1.12 Tenders & Substitutions 1.13 Interference Drawings 1.14 Shop Drawing Material & Lists 1.15 Record Documents 1.16 CAD Drawings 1.17 Job Site Work Shop and Storage 1.18 Protection 1.19 Instructions to Operator 1.20 Cleaning, Lubrication and Adjustment 1.21 Inspection & Testing 1.22 Certification of Tests 1.23 Completion

1.24 Alterations to Existing Building 1.25 Cash Allowances

SECTION 26 01 00 Page 1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES

.1 Division 1, General Requirements, is a part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here.

1.2 APPLICATION .1 This Section applies to and is a part of all Sections of Division 26. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED .1 Sections of these Electrical Specifications are not intended to delegate functions nor to

delegate work and supply to any specific trade and the work shall include all labour, materials, equipment and tools required for a complete and working installation as described.

1.4 INTENT .1 Mention herein or indication on drawings of articles, materials, operations or methods

requires: supply of each item mentioned or indicated, of quality, or subject to qualifications noted; installation according to conditions stated and; performance of each operation prescribed with furnishing of necessary labour, equipment and incidentals for Electrical Trade, Division 26.

.2 Supplementary to definitions established are: `Supply' shall mean furnishing to site in

location required or directed complete with accessory parts. `Install' shall mean set in place and secured or affixed to building structure as noted or directed. `Provide' shall mean supply and install as each is described.

.3 Where used, wordings such as "approved, to approval, as directed, permitted,

permission, accepted, acceptance", shall mean: approved, directed, permitted, accepted, by authorized representative of the Owner.

.4 Equipment provided under this Division shall conform to applicable standards and

regulations of the following organizations: Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Electrical Inspection Department of Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code (ESC) Canadian Underwriters Association (CUA) National Building Code (NBC) Ontario Building Code (OBC)


JSC NO. 18-115

1.5 WORKMANSHIP .1 Workmanship and method of installation shall conform to best standards and practice.

Where required by local or other By-Laws and Regulations, tradesmen shallbe licensed in their trade.

1.6 TEMPORARY & TRIAL USAGE .1 Temporary or trial usage of any equipment or materials shall not be construed as

evidence of acceptance of same and no claim for damage shall be made for injury to or breaking of any part of such work which may be so used..

1.7 BY-LAWS & REGULATIONS .1 Work shall conform with latest rules, regulations and definitions of Canadian Electrical

Code and applicable Municipal and Provincial Codes and Regulations, and with requirements of other authorities having jurisdiction in the area where work is to be performed. Minor changes required by an authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out without change to the Contract amount. Standards established by drawings and specifications shall not be reduced by applicable codes or regulations.

1.8 PERMITS & FEES .1 File Contract Drawings with proper authorities and obtain their approval of installation

and permits for same before proceeding with work. Prepare and submit necessary detailed shop drawings as required by Authorities.

.2 Pay all fees in connection with examination of drawings, permits, inspections and final

certificate of approval. 1.9 CERTIFICATES .1 Furnish necessary certificates as evidence that work installed conforms with laws and

regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.10 GUARANTEE - WARRANTY .1 Guarantee and warranty requirements of the Contract shall apply except for

incandescent lamps which shall be guaranteed for a period of ninety days after acceptance by the Owners.

1.11 SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS & JOB CONDITIONS .1 Electrical Drawings do not show structural and related details. Take information involving

accurate measurement of building from building drawings, or at building. Make, without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to electrical work or equipment locations to accommodate structural conditions. Equipment locations may be altered by Engineer without extra charge provided change is made before installation and does not necessitate major additional material.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Examine site and local conditions. Examine carefully all drawings and complete specifications to ensure that work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. Before commencing work, examine the work of other Sections and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work, its completion or warranty. No allowance will be make later for any expense incurred through failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies in writing.

.3 Relocate equipment and/or material installed but not co-ordinated with work of other

Sections as directed, without extra charge. .4 Furnish "built-in" items in ample time and give necessary information and assistance in

connection with building-in of same. Notify Section concerned in writing of size and location of recesses, openings and chases at least 48 hours before walls are erected, floors poured and similar work.

1.12 TENDER & SUBSTITUTIONS .1 Tender shall be submitted based on specified manufacturer or "approved manufacturers"

and equipment only. .2 Substitutions for materials may be proposed by submitting details with Supplementary

Tender Form together with price difference to Stipulated Sum Tender amount under the following conditions:

1. Product name shall be stated together with price difference, if any, to stipulated sum for each substitution proposed.

2. Material or equipment substituted shall not exceed space requirements allocated. Extra charges will not be allowed for any additional installation cost resulting from acceptance of proposed substitutions.

3. If an item of material specified is unobtainable or unavailable to meet proposed completion, state in tender the proposed substitute and amount to be added or deducted for its use. Extra charges will not be allowed for substitutions after the Contract has been awarded.

1.13 INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS .1 Prepare and submit composite interference drawings if required to avoid and/or resolve

conflict of trades and to co-ordinate work of Electrical Division with all other trades. .2 Interference drawings shall indicate exact arrangements, of all areas and equipment to

scale with dimensions. .3 Co-operate with work of Divisions 21, 22 and 23 and provide data requested and as

required in the preparation of interference drawings for the work of Divisions 21, 22 and 23.


JSC NO. 18-115

.4 Make interference drawings in conjunction with all parties and trades concerned showing sleeves and openings and passage of electrical work through building structure. Drawings shall also show inserts, special hangers and other features to indicate routing through confined spaces, installation of equipment in such areas.

.5 Provide detail drawings, fully dimensioned, of equipment in Boiler and Mechanical

Equipment Rooms, Electrical Rooms, Fan Rooms, etc. Base equipment drawings on approved Shop Drawings and include, but do not necessarily limit to, details pertaining to access, clearances, sleeves, connections, etc.

.6 Provide detail drawings of pulling pits, equipment bases, anchors, floor and roof curbs,

etc., pertaining to Electrical work. 1.14 SHOP DRAWING MATERIAL & LISTS .1 Prepare and submit shop drawings and lists of materials for review in accordance with

Architectural Sections. Make submittals of more than two pages in booklet form. Individual and loose drawings will not be accepted for review.

.2 Prior to equipment fabrication, delivery or installation, submit complete lists of materials

proposed, indicating manufacturer, catalogue numbers and complete performance data. .3 Review of Shop Drawings by Consultant is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance

with general design concept. This review shall not mean that Architect and/or Engineer approves detail design inherent in Shop Drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor and such review shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of work with all trades.

.4 Shop drawings transmitted via facsimile (fax) machines, or copies of same, will not be

accepted for review. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS

.1 Conform to General Requirements. Maintain at least 2 sets of documents and clearly mark on same as job progresses, changes and deviations from work shown so that on completion Owner will have records of exact location of ducts and equipment and record of material and equipment changes.

.2 Contractor shall obtain clean set of prints from Consultant at start of Contract Work and

shall keep these prints up-to-date at jobsite, accurately recording all changes made on project and locating all services, equipment, etc. which may have been shown only diagrammatically on Contract Documents.

.3 Contractor shall ensure that as-built information is accurately recorded and shall check

same. As-Built drawings shall be reviewed with Consultant at each jobsite meeting.


JSC NO. 18-115

.4 Upon completion of Contract Work, prior to Substantial Performance inspection and after final review with Consultants, Contractor shall neatly transfer recorded information and make final As-Built submission to Consultant for review in the following form: - One (1) set of clean, legible prints. - One (1) ACAD 2017 format drawings. Files shall retain all setting (layers, line

types, scales colors, etc) as used in the drawing files (produced) by consultant.

.5 After Record Drawings have been reviewed, revised if necessary until acceptable to the consultant. Deliver drawings in the form of CD (CAD + PDF) and three (3) sets of prints taken from that CD to Owner.

1.16 CAD DRAWINGS

.1 If required for coordination purposes or for As-Builts, the Contractor may obtain Design

Drawings from the Consultant after completing the required Document Request Form and paying a handling charge of $75 + HST per drawing.

1.17 JOB SITE WORK SHOP AND STORAGE .1 Supply job site office, workshop, tools, scaffolds and material storage as required to

complete the work of this Division. Location of temporary buildings, use of space on site or within building shall be to later direction.

1.18 PROTECTION .1 Securely plug or cap open ends of electrical raceways or equipment to prevent entry of

dirt, dust, debris, water, snow or ice. Clean all equipment inside and outside before testing.

.2 Equipment stored on site shall be protected from weather and kept dry and clean at all

times. Take care to avoid corrosion of metal parts. .3 Protect work installed from damage. Secure all unfinished or loose work to prevent

movement. 1.19 INSTRUCTIONS TO OPERATOR .1 Contractor will be responsible for collecting and organizing three (3) copies of all data,

operating instructions, trouble-shooting instructions, parts lists, parts diagrams, evidence of all tests, maintenance manuals, etc. and assembling them in neat manuals. This shall include (however not be limited to) all reviewed shop drawings, manufacturer’s operation manuals, complete fire alarm verification report, final ESA inspection certificate, emergency lighting levels plot and verification letter, panel directories and lamp list.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Contractor shall also collect from Subtrades and Suppliers all Guarantees/Warranties specified. Check that starting date (date of Substantial Performance of entire project) and extent of each guarantee/warranty are clearly indicated. Check also that all guarantees/warranties indicate Supplier’s Name or Subcontractor’s Name as appropriate together with contact phone number. Assemble neatly in labeled section of each manual.

.3 Submit manuals to Consultant for approval prior to requesting Substantial Performance

inspection. .4 Arrange for on-site instruction by various Manufacturers where considered necessary by

Consultant, at no additional cost to Owner. 1.20 CLEANING, LUBRICATION AND ADJUSTMENT .1 Immediately prior to completion of work:

1. Remove all dust, dirt and other foreign matter from internal surfaces of enclosed electrical apparatus and equipment.

2. Remove all temporary protective coverings and coatings, temporary labels. 3. Clean, repair, lubricate and adjust all mechanism and moveable parts of

apparatus and equipment leaving it in new condition and operating properly. 4. Balance demand loads for service and distribution feeders within 5 percent upon

completion of work and after the building is in full operation. 1.21 INSPECTION AND TESTING .1 Systems, equipment, and all major items of material shall be tested to the satisfaction of

the Architect, and as required to establish compliance with plans and specifications, and with the requirements for the Supply and Inspection Authorities.

.2 Faulty and defective equipment shall be replaced with new materials. Conductors which

are found to be shorted or grounded, or to have less than proper insulation resistance, shall be replaced with new conductors.

.3 Tests shall include but are not limited to the following:

1. Test of secondary voltage cables shall include megger tests to establish proper insulation resistance, and phase-to-ground resistance of cables.

2. Proper functioning of all systems. 3. Polarity tests - to establish proper polarity connections to all sockets and

receptacles. 4. Megger tests to establish proper insulation resistances and phase to ground

resistance of wiring.

1.22 CERTIFICATE OF TESTS .1 When work is complete submit three copies of test results and a signed statement listing

all tests that have been performed as required by specifications and manufacturer's instructions.


JSC NO. 18-115

1.23 COMPLETION .1 Provide receipts from designated representative of Owner for portable and loose

materials (e.g. spare fuses, fixture relamping equipment and the like). .2 Provide copy of final inspection certificate from Electrical Inspection Authority. .3 Perform tests and provide documentation as further described herein. .4 Provide Record Drawings to approval. .5 Provide manufacturers corrected "as built" shop drawings for all major electrical items

and systems, including all shop drawings returned for modifications. 1.24 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING BUILDING .1 Note that certain alterations and structural changes are to be made to existing building.

Architectural drawings and site are to be examined to determine extent of alterations affecting existing electrical systems. Where existing conduits and wires run through areas to be altered, to feed other parts of existing building, they shall be re-routed and reconnected to maintain their original function. Drawings do not necessarily indicate outlets, switches, receptacles, and the like, and other electrical equipment which are required to be relocated or abandoned. Provide decorative blanking cover plates for obsolete outlet boxes remaining.

.2 Electrical services and auxiliary services (fire alarm, Intrusion Alarm, and the like) shall

be maintained continuously without interruption. Interruptions to services shall be confined to periods of time to be designated by Architect, and/or Owner’s designated representative. Include in tender for temporary connections, overtime labour charges, and such related allowances in order to conform with these conditions.

.3 The Electrical Contractor is responsible for removal, reinstallation, cutting and patching of

ceiling and walls as required in the existing building. .4 Cutting directly related to electrical work, regardless of whether such work occurs in new

or existing construction, shall be coordinated and paid for by Electrical Subcontractor involved, under supervision of Contractor.

.5 Where existing electrical items or systems are demolished and removed from existing

construction assemblies, Electrical Subcontractor involved shall be responsible for infilling entire hole left after removal of item or system with new construction assembly to match existing. Where new electrical items or systems are installed through existing construction assemblies, Electrical Subcontractor involved shall be responsible for properly sized and accurate cutting of existing construction assembly to allow installation of new work.


JSC NO. 18-115

1.25 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Refer to Division 1 for Cash Allowances.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 53 00 Contents Page BASIC MATERIAL & METHODS DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 References 1.2 Materials 1.3 Material Acceptance PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Raceways 2.2 Wire & Cable 2.3 Devices 2.4 Device Cover Plates 2.5 Panelboards 2.6 Switches

2.7 Fuses PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Equipment Locations 3.2 Mounting Heights 3.3 Holes & Drilling 3.4 Cutting & Patching 3.5 Excavation & Backfill 3.6 Concrete Work 3.7 Hangers & Inserts 3.8 Painting 3.9 Nameplates & Schedules 3.10 Branch Circuit Wiring & Feeder Cables 3.11 Conduit, Raceways and Wireways 3.12 Wire & Cable 3.13 Outlet, Junction & Pull Boxes 3.14 Access Doors & Access Markers 3.15 Panelboards 3.16 Inspection & Testing

3.17 Electric Work For Other Divisions 3.18 Grounding – General 3.19 Fireproofing & Sealing

SECTION 26 53 00 Page 1 BASIC MATERIAL & METHODS DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES .1 Conform to Section 26 01 00 - Electrical - General Requirements. 1.2 MATERIALS .1 Materials shall be new, of Canadian manufacture where available, first quality and uniform

throughout. Submit tender based on the use of materials and equipment specified, or on the listed acceptable alternate equipment as further detailed.

.2 Electrical materials shall be C.S.A. approved and be so labeled. Material not C.S.A. approved

shall receive acceptance for installation by Ontario Hydro Special Inspections Branch before delivery, and modifications and charges required for suchf acceptance shall be included in work of this Section. Material shall not be installed or connected to the source of electrical power until approval is obtained.

.3 Confirm capacity, ratings and characteristics of equipment items being provided to supply

power to equipment provided under other Sections of the work. Resolve discrepancies before such items are purchased.

1.3 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE .1 Acceptance of materials installed presumes that materials have not been damaged or exposed

to conditions that would adversely affect performance and life expectancy.

.2 If in the opinion of the Architect, materials have sustained damage, or have been exposed to abnormal conditions it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to have such tests performed as deemed necessary by the Architect to establish condition and therefore, acceptability of installed materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS .1 Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 45. .2 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 83. Connectors

and couplings to be forged steel. Connectors to have factory-installed insulated throats. .3 Rigid PVC conduit shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 136. .4 Watertight flexible conduit: "Sealtite" PVC jacketed flexible steel with Hubbell-Kellum strain

relief grips; shall comply with CSA Standard C22.2 No. 56.


JSC NO. 18-115

2.2 WIRE & CABLE .1 Branch wire and cable shall comprise copper conductors, sized as noted, rated 90 deg. C., 600

volt minimum flame retardant insulation, and CSA approved for application. .2 Wire and cable installed in conduit shall be thermoplastic insulated Type T90 - Flame retardant

and comply with latest CSA Specification. .3 Use Electrovert "Z-Type" code markers for control & communication conductors. 2.3 DEVICES .1 Wiring devices unless otherwise specified herein, or noted, shall be as manufactured by

Hubbell, Leviton, P & S, Bryant Electric. .2 Switches for 120 volt branch lighting circuits, generally shall be A.C. "Quiet Type" rated 20

amp. 120 volt, totally enclosed phenolic housing Hubbell 1200 Series, white/beige toggle handle.

.3 Double Pole lighting switches shall be connected to 2 pole circuit breakers. .4 Key-operated switches shall be Hubbell 1221-L Series of the types listed above, except

key-operated, and shall be keyed-alike. .5 Standard 15 amp. 125 volt duplex receptacles generally shall be Specification grade Hubbell

Cat. No.5262, white/beige CSA #5-15R. .6 Standard Duplex receptacles indicated to have `split-feed' shall be two-circuit type wired and

connected to a 2 pole common trip circuit breaker in associated panelboard. Orientation of common circuit shall be similar throughout project.

.7 Special purpose receptacles as noted on the drawings shall be Hubbell Conforming to CSA

configurations (Table 46 and Table 47 of Canadian Electrical Code) for non-locking and locking receptacles. Provide attachment cap for each special purpose receptacle.

.8 "Range" receptacles shall be CSA Type 14-50R, 50 amp. 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding 125/250V

flush receptacle. Provide the above with 5 foot rubber cord set, 50 amp. and connect equipment.

.9 Receptacles with integral ground fault interrupter shall be Hubbell No. GF-5262 with matching

stainless steel faceplate. .10 Isolated ground receptacles shall be Pass & Seymour #IG26262GRY, grey finish. .11 Clock receptacles shall be recessed fitting, Leviton 5261/CH. .12 Red services receptacles on MCPs and as noted on drawings shall be labeled “Custodial” and

be Hubbell #5262-RD. .13 Dimmer switches for lighting shall be compatible with LED lighting.


JSC NO. 18-115

.14 Tamper-resistant duplex receptacle 15A, 120V, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire Hubbell #BR15WHIWR. 2.4 DEVICE COVER PLATES .1 Switch and receptacle and other device faceplates for flush mounted devices, generally shall be

single or multi-gang as required, type 301, stainless steel, #4 brushed finish with removable protective covering.

.2 Cover plates for other devices such as flush fan controls, telephone, etc., shall be stainless

steel to match above. 2.5 PANELBOARDS .1 Panelboards as scheduled, shall comprise "Branch" panelboards, with fixed bolted connection

thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, 40oC, calibrated ULC rated `SWD' switching duty, molded-case circuit breaker branches. "Plug-in" breakers are not acceptable. Multipole breakers shall be common trip type.

.2 Panelboards shall include the following features: .1 Flush or surface trim as noted. .2 Concealed hinges. .3 Combination catch and lock semi flush tumbler type - all keyed alike. .4 Adjustable self-positioning trims. .5 Plain trims not displaying any names or Symbols. "Vault" type handles shall not be used except in unfinished areas. .6 Typed schedules of circuits indicating equipment and area controlled on the backs of

panel doors, in a steel trim pocket, covered with transparent non-inflammable plastic. .7 Insulated neutral block. .8 Supplementary ground block. .9 Copper Bus. .10 Isolated ground bar, as noted. .11 Surge-suppression system, as noted. .12 Sprinklerproof .3 Power and Distribution type panelboards shall be breaker type, as scheduled on the drawings. .4 Fusible switch type panelboards shall be complete with suitable fuses as specified under

"Fuses". .5 Unless noted otherwise, panelboards with main breakers or remote controlled switches shall be

provided with an indicating pilot lamp flush mounted in top of face trim which shall be connected to a 15 amp. circuit in the panelboard which shall be locked on and shall serve to indicate when the main breaker is in the closed position. Pilot lamp units shall be LED type or other approved types designed to provide maximum lamp life. Provide lamacoid nameplate to identify main breaker.


JSC NO. 18-115

.6 Panelboards of the types scheduled shall comprise the following: General Note for All Types: Refer to Drawings for more information about electrical panels and

comply accordingly. Type 1

Branch panelboards circuit breaker type, 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire mains, minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 amps. RMS asymmetrical at 120 volts.

Type 2 Power distribution panelboard (CDP), circuit breaker type 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire mains,

minimum interrupting rating of 35,000A, RMS symmetrical at 208 volt. .7 Acceptable Manufacturers are: .1 Cutler-Hammer .2 Square `D' .3 Siemens 2.6 SWITCHES .1 Provide fusible and non-fusible switches, NEMA Type `HD' with quick-make, quick-break

contacts, horsepower-rated where required, to match the motor protected. Provide holders to accept specified fuses. Switches to include mechanical cover interlocks and line side barriers.

.2 Where applicable and available, switches shall be CSA "Approved For High Service Factor". .3 Provide safety disconnect switches adjacent to motors and other equipment when required by

regulations. 2.7 FUSES .1 Provide fuse holders in fusible equipment with a complete set of proper size Form 1, HRC

Nema J or L current limiting fuses. Fusible equipment so provided shall be adapted to reject CSA Standard C22.2 No. 59 fuses. Fuses shall be Federal Pioneer - "Econolim".

.2 Provide one complete set of spare fuses for each rating and type used, unless otherwise

scheduled. .3 Apply Thomas & Betts "Kopr/Shield" conductive anti-seize compound to all fuse ferrules and

holders. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS .1 Approximate locations of electrical equipment, fixtures switches, outlets, and the like, are given

on the drawings. Refer to the architectural drawings and room elevations for application. In absence of definite detail exact location of outlets shall be determined on site as work progresses. Local switches for lighting shall generally be installed on the lock side of doors. Verify switch locations on the site.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Device plates shall cover opening left for outlet box, and plates shall be attached to boxes in an approved manner. Outlets and fixtures are to be located symmetrically, (i.e. centred in wall panels, ceiling panels or tiles, columns, between and above doors and the like).

.3 The right is reserved to alter the location of equipment and outlets a distance of up to 3 metres

without involving a change to the Contract amount, providing notice is given prior to installation.

3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS .1 Mounting heights of outlets, top of outlet to finished floor, except for exposed masonry

construction as noted on drawings, shall generally be as follows: Lighting Switches - 1200 mm Receptacles - 400 mm above finished floor Television Outlets - 400 mm Telephone Outlets - 400 mm Panelboards - 2000 mm to top of trim for standard panels. Clocks - 2000 mm or 300 mm below ceiling. Fire Alarm Equipment- As per CAN /ULC – S 524 Standard. 3.3 HOLES & DRILLING

.1 Pneumatic hammers and percussion drills are prohibited. .2 Where not sleeved, make holes through concrete walls and floors by core-drill only. Obtain

Architect's approval before drilling. .3 Seal holes and sleeves through floors to serve as water dam.

3.4 CUTTING & PATCHING .1 Layout and install work in advance of other Sections for all new work. Bear all costs resulting

from failing to comply with this requirement. .2 Pay for cutting and patching and making good as required for work of this Division by reason of

faulty or late work. Employ appropriate trades already engaged on the site to perform such cutting, patching and making good existing walls, floor, ceiling, etc. Before commencing, obtain Architect's approval for extent and nature of cutting. Make good, disturbed surfaces to the Architect's approval.

3.5 EXCAVATION & BACKFILL .1 Provide necessary excavating and backfilling inside and outside building required for work of

this Division, performed as specified under another Division of the work, except as modified below.

.2 Keep excavations free from water, pump as necessary. .3 Excavation for underground services shall be to required depths and dimension and shall be

prepared as required, so that no portion of any conduit, bears directly against any rock or other hard surface.


JSC NO. 18-115

.4 Remove and dispose of all surplus excavated material. .5 Backfill promptly after approval of work. Prevent damage to or displacement of walls, piping,

conduits, waterproofing and other work.

.6 For direct buried conduit and cable in all soil conditions excavate to 150 mm (6") below and a minimum of 200 mm (8") to either side of the cable run. Fill back with a bedding of sand.

.7 Backfill trenches within building, with clean sharp sand in individual layers of maximum 150 mm

(6") thickness, compacted to a density of 100% Standard Proctor. Hand compact the first layers up to a compacted level of minimum one foot. Hand or machine compact the balance up to grade, using approved equipment.

.8 Backfill trenches outside buildings with granular `A' gravel in layers not exceeding 150 mm (6")

thickness, compacted to 100% Standard Proctor density up to grade level; manual compaction up to 450 mm (18") and mechanical compaction, using approved equipment, for the balance.

.9 Make good work where damaged by excavation and filling work of this Division. Repair any

subsequent settlement of fill placed under this Division and pay all costs in replacement of other work damaged by such settlement and restoration.

3.6 CONCRETE WORK .1 Provide concrete work where required for work of this Division in accordance with applicable

requirements specified in Concrete Division 3. .2 Provide concrete Lighting Standard Bases, required for the work of this Division. Refer to detail

on drawings. .3 Provide concrete Duct Banks required for the work of this Division. Refer to detail on drawing

for typical construction details. .4 Reinforced concrete duct banks shall be keyed into sides of foundation walls. Extend and

connect reinforcing steel of duct banks to reinforcing steel of foundation wall construction to prevent failure at the junction of the pipe support and wall.

.5 Provide 100 mm (4”) high housekeeping pads for all floor mounted electrical equipment, such

as switchboard, distribution panels and transformer, etc. 3.7 HANGERS & INSERTS .1 Provide necessary hangers and inserts for work of this Division. .2 Fasten to cast-in place concrete by suitable drilled or cast-in inserts. .3 Fasten to structural steel using bolts or welded fasteners.

.4 Do not use wood, chain, wire lashings, strap or grappler bar hangers except where noted or detailed.


JSC NO. 18-115

.5 Support fixtures independently of ceiling suspension systems. Provide additional supports as

required, which shall be fastened to building structure steel members, joists, beams, etc., but not metal pan or roof decking. Material for additional supports and their installation shall comply with requirements of U.L.C. Refer to "List of Equipment and Materials" Vol. 2, and "Supplement" for application to rated assemblies.

.6 Support outlet and junction boxes independently of the conduits running to them where required

by electrical code and where deemed necessary by the Architect, use steel angle brackets or steel rods to support outlets and fixtures, to the building structure.

.7 Drilled fastenings to concrete shall be self-drilling concrete anchors, Phillips 'Red-Head' or

approved equal. The maximum weight per fastening shall not exceed 25% of manufacturer's 'pull-out' load data.

.8 Surface mounted or stem suspended fixtures fastened to non-removable ceilings, 2 hr. fire

rated ceiling assemblies, or mounted between metal suspension of exposed T-grid ceilings, shall be provided with minimum of two points of attachment for each 300 mm x 1200 mm (1' x 4') luminaire, using metal `channel-bar' fastened to building structure. Attach luminaires to `channel-bar' by means of threaded steel rods. Channel-bar shall be adequately supported and of a construction to prevent deflection under load, as selected from manufacturer's published data, and to Architect's approval. `Channel-bar' shall be Unistrut, Burndy, Flexibar, Cantrough or Canadian Strut Products or approved equal.

.9 Use support clips (e.g. Caddy Type IDS) for suspension of fixtures attached to exposed T-grid

ceilings. Clips shall be supported directly from building structure and not from suspended ceiling system.

.10 Provide recessed fluorescent fixtures with support frames, and plastering frames where

applicable. .11 Safety chain for the installation of fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be No. 4, 2 mm (.080")

Tenso Pattern coil steel chain, plated with a strength of 82 kg (180 lbs.) as manufactured by Dominion Chain Co. Ltd. or approved equal. Where 'S' hooks are used with chain, they shall be No. 6 type with open strength of 82 kg (180 lbs.) minimum. Attachment of chain at both ends of support shall develop full strength of chain.

.12 Support outlet boxes, junction boxes, conduit and the like, mounted on exposed steel deck

roofing by means of self-tapping minimum #10 gauge screws, secured through bottom member of deck corrugation. Do not pierce top of steel deck.

3.8 PAINTING .1 Hangers, support framing and all equipment fabricated from ferrous metals which are not

protected with zinc or other suitable corrosion-resistant finish shall have at least one coat of a corrosion-resistant paint applied before shipment or immediately on arrival at the site.

.2 After installation, touch up all scratches, chips, other damage and defects in paint, using zinc

chromate primer or paint or special enamels as necessary to match the original. .3 Finish and colour of all equipment shall be coordinated to provide uniform appearance.


JSC NO. 18-115

.4 Painting of conduits and supports and other exposed surface work will be done under Painting Section except as noted. Install materials in time to be painted together with mounting surfaces.

.5 Do not paint over nameplates. .6 Refer to other Sections for special paint finishes of equipment. 3.9 NAMEPLATES & SCHEDULES .1 Identify electrical equipment supplied under this Division with 3 mm thick black laminated plastic

nameplate to indicate equipment controlled to provide instruction or warning. Fasten each plate with two chrome plated screws. Lettering shall be 6 mm high for small devices such as control stations and at least 13 mm high for all other equipment. Submit a list of proposed nameplates for approval before manufacture.

.2 Provide panelboards with typewritten schedules identifying outlets and equipment controlled by

each branch circuit including existing panels being changed. Protect schedules with non-flammable clear plastic.

.3 Identify junction boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduits and the like, provided for future

extension, indicating their function (e.g. power, fire alarm, communication). .4 Verify room names and numbers prior to listing on nameplates and schedules. 3.10 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING & FEEDER CABLES .1 Provide branch circuit wiring, conduits and feeders as required for Lighting, Power and Auxiliary

Systems. Separate conduit systems shall be provided for feeder, lighting and power systems, for exit light system and auxiliary communication systems.

3.11 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS .1 Wire and cable shall be installed in conduit as follows: Rigid galvanized steel conduit with threaded IPS fittings to be used: .1 Where noted and required by regulations. .2 Where subject to mechanical damage. .3 For all exposed conduit work. .2 Conduit embedded in concrete or buried below grade floors shall be CSA approved rigid PVC

type. .3 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used in place of rigid conduit in dry locations subject to

governing regulations, embedded in masonry walls, and concealed above suspended ceilings. Connectors shall be provided with factory-installed insulated throats.


JSC NO. 18-115

.4 Use flexible metallic conduit for connections to chain suspended and recessed fixture drops, motors and similar equipment to prevent transmission of vibration. A code-gauge green grounding conductor shall be provided for all such connections. Use "Sealtite" conduit with Hubbell-Kellum Sealtite conduit strain relief grips for all such connections at motors.

.5 Fasten every conduit and cable to structure by means of approved conduit clamps or clips.

Wire lashing is not acceptable. .6 Conceal conduits and wiring except where noted. Run exposed conduits parallel to building

lines and to other conduits. Provide every empty conduit with a pull rope (3 mm polypropylene rope) and identify to designate its function (Power, Telephone, Fire Alarm and the like).

.7 Where conduit is installed in concrete slabs, obtain general approval, prior to commencing the

work, on both maximum dimension and cross-overs which may be used therein. .8 Install conduits in such a manner as to conserve head room and interfere as little as possible

with free use of space through which they pass. Obtain approval for routing of same. Keep conduits at least 150 mm clear high temperature work.

.9 Conduit installed at the roof level of exposed structures, shall be run tight to roof deck, above

purlins and beams. .10 Conduit and cables for electrical work in demountable type and drywall type partitions shall

enter from above, from a junction box concealed in the ceiling above and shall comprise a flexible conduit connection.

.11 All branch wiring shall be provided with a separate code gauge supplementary grounding

conductor run in each conduit or duct, terminating at ground block at panelboards. .12 Run conduit exposed in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical rooms, fan rooms, and the like,

and installed after mechanical and other equipment is completed. Install fixtures, outlets, starters, etc., to clear and to suit application.

.13 Wiring, boxes, conduit fittings, etc., in hazardous areas shall conform with Ontario Electrical

Code, covering explosion-proof areas. Provide conduit seals where required by these regulations.

.14 Provide housekeeping curbs around exposed conduits feeding panels, disconnect switches,

starters, etc. penetrating floors in front of walls. .15 Motor connections and dry type transformer connections shall be through flexible metallic

conduit (motors in excess of 1/3 horsepower with “Liquiseal” type of flexible conduit). 3.12 WIRE & CABLE .1 Wire and cable shall not be installed at temperatures below 20oC unless "minus 40" type is

used. Wiring to heating equipment shall be rated 90oC minimum, the ampacity of which shall be limited to 75oC value.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Conductors used for all auxiliary systems (e.g. Fire Alarm) shall be tagged and/or colour-coded, and where applicable shall agree with manufacturer`s wiring diagrams.

.3 Minimum wire size for power wiring shall be No. 12 AWG gauge unless specified otherwise.

Minimum wire size for "Common" neutral conductors shall be No. 10 AWG. Control wiring shall be #14 AWG red insulation. Maximum voltage drop between furthest outlet of any circuit, when fully energized, and panel to which it is connected shall not exceed two percent except for electric heating circuits which shall not exceed one percent.

.4 Cables shall be terminated with moisture-proof connectors, clamped to sheet metal enclosure

by a single non-ferrous locknut and grounding bushing. .5 Sheaths of multi-conductor cables shall be grounded at both cable ends. .6 Sheaths of single conductor cables shall be grounded at supply end only. Provide a Code

Gauge Grounding Conductor with each feeder cable run. .7 Number of wires indicated for lighting and power, motor and motor control, alarm, signal,

communications, and auxiliary systems is intended to show general scheme only. The required number and types of wires shall be installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer's diagrams and requirements, and with requirements of the installation, except that specification standards shall not be reduced.

.8 Solderless connectors with nylon-jacketted "Vibration-proof" screw-on wire connectors ideal

"Wing Nuts", rated 600 volts shall be used for joints in Branch Wiring. .9 Use compression joints and terminals for all control wiring; and all conductors #4 AWG and

larger. Mechanical connections are acceptable at panelboards and circuit breakers where these are part of factory-assembly.

.10 Wire or cables in feeders, sub-feeders and branch circuits shall be colour-coded in accordance

with Ontario Electrical Safety Code. Each end of feeder terminations (e.g. in Switchboard, Panelboards, switches, splitters and the like) Code Phase A - Red, Phase B - Black, Phase C - Blue, Neutral - White.

.11 Use C.G.E. Vulkan X-Link insulated cables for circuits protected by ground fault circuit

interrupters. .12 Include in each conduit, tubing and raceway, a code gauge green supplementary grounding

conductor which shall be connected to suitable ground bus in equipment. .13 Armoured or sheathed cables may be used only for wiring within demountable and dry wall type

partitions and if additionally specified or detailed; however it shall not be directly buried in or below concrete slabs.

3.13 OUTLET, JUNCTION & PULL BOXES .1 Use suitable electrical boxes for terminations and junctions on conduit work. Install pull boxes

where necessary to permit installation of conductors. Support pull boxes, outlet boxes, panels and other cabinets independently of conduit.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Provide each light switch, wall receptacle and other device with an outlet box of suitable dimensions and a faceplate. Outlet boxes shall be adapted to their respective locations.

.3 "Thruwall" and "Utility" type boxes shall not be used. .4 Electrical boxes and panels shall be CSA approved, code-gauge sheet metal, galvanized or

with suitable protective treatment. Secure covers with screws or bolts. .5 Outlet boxes shall not be installed "Back-to-Back" in walls; separate by a minimum of 150 mm. .6 Use "Masonry Type" outlet boxes for flush installation in masonry walls. Standard sectional

boxes, 1004, 1104 and the like, shall not be used). .7 Install surface mounted devices, in cast conduit fittings, with threaded hubs and suitable

stainless steel faceplates. .8 Main pull and junction boxes (excluding obvious outlet boxes) shall be clearly identified by

painting the outside of the cover in accordance with the following schedule: - Lighting Yellow - Power Blue - Emergency Power Orange - Fire Alarms Red - Telephone Cream - Control Brown - Intercom & Sound Green .9 In addition, each box shall be identified with a system and service designator of logic reference

to the service. 3.14 ACCESS DOORS & ACCESS MARKERS .1 Supply access doors for installation under the work of other Divison where electrical equipment

requiring maintenance or adjustment or inspection is located above ceilings, within walls or behind furring; except ceilings of lay-in removable panel type.

.2 Access doors shall be 12 gauge hinged metal Stelpro Ltd. or equal #722 flush type, minimum

size 300 mm x 300 mm (12" x 12") "Reach-in" 300 mm x 600 mm (12" x 24") "Crawl-in", with prime coat finish, concealed hinges, screwdriver lock and plaster key. Access doors in finished masonry or drywall construction shall be #722 less plaster key. Access doors shall be #726 in acoustic tile ceilings; #704 in drywall ceiling and #726E in plaster ceilings.

.3 Access doors in fire rated ceiling assemblies, all fire rated walls, duct shaft or in corridor walls

shall be UL, ULC or WHI listed 1-1/2 hour fire rated access doors equal to LeHage #L1010 or Acudor #150B with screwdriver lock.

.4 Where lay-in removable panel ceilings requiring hold-down clips are used, access doors are not

required but panels shall be secured with accessible hold-down clips and marked with Buildemup #6 RH brass paper fasteners inserted through acoustic panel and bent over. paint heads with blue enamel before installation.


JSC NO. 18-115

.5 Obtain approval for sizes and locations. 3.15 PANELBOARDS .1 Provide handle locking devices on circuit breakers feeding Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating

equipment and controls and all auxiliary systems, time switches, and other devices as noted. Paint handles white, to permanently identify location and function. Provide 30 spare handle locking devices for future use.

.2 Circuit numbers on drawings do not necessarily correspond to the numbers on the lighting

panels. Circuits sharing a common neutral shall not be connected to the same main. Panel circuit breakers which are used directly for the switching of lighting fixtures shall be grouped in consecutive numbers commencing at breaker number one.

.3 Use "Panduit" lok-strap cable ties for panelboard branch wiring. .4 Provide empty conduits from flush panelboards, and others as noted, terminating in accessible

ceiling spaces, sized to accommodate spare and space breaker provisions. One 25 mm (1") conduit for each three spare breakers or spaces.

3.16 INSPECTION & TESTING .1 Systems, equipment and all major items of material shall be tested to the satisfaction of the

Engineer, and as required to establish compliance with plans and specifications, and with the requirements for the Supply and Inspection Authorities.

.2 Faulty and defective equipment shall be replaced with new materials Conductors which are found to

be shorted or grounded, or to have less than proper insulation resistance, shall be replaced with new conductors.

.3 Tests shall include but are not limited to the following:

.1 Test of power cables shall include megger tests to establish proper insulation resistance, and phase-to-ground resistance of cables.

.2 Test of all new adjustable electrical protective devices of switchgear to establish calibration and operation in accordance with specifications.

.3 Visual examination of switchgear to determine adherence to allowable manufacturing tolerance and compliance with manufacturer's recommended installation requirements.

.4 Proper functioning of all systems.

.5 Polarity tests - to establish proper polarity connections to all sockets and receptacles.

.6 Calibration setting, and test-tripping, of all protective relays and devices, using "Primary-injection" equipment, in accordance with approved co-ordination schedule.

.7 Test of all alarm devices and contacts.

.8 Inspection after system is energized shall include infrared thermographic examination of current carrying parts in switchgear, transformers, and at ducts. The Contractor shall cooperate with Inspection personnel, open all equipment enclosures to permit inspection, and make good defective conditions.


JSC NO. 18-115

.4 Certification of Tests .1 When work is complete, submit three copies of test results and a signed statement listing

all tests that have been performed as required by specifications and manufacturer's instructions.

3.17 ELECTRIC WORK FOR OTHER DIVISIONS .1 Examine Architectural and Mechanical (Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning)

plans and specifications to determine extent of electrical work in connection with these Divisions which is to be done under the work of the Electrical Division.

.2 In general, all motor starters and associated controls for mechanical equipment will be supplied

under that Division of the work which supplies the equipment, for installation and connection to both source and load under the work of the Electrical Division 26. Refer to the Mechanical Division 21, 22 and 23 Specifications, drawings, and schedules for the exact intent and extent of the work to be included in the Electrical Division.

.3 Coordinate the exact location and verify characteristics of electrical provisions for the work of

the Mechanical Division. .4 Coordinate locations of starters, motors and associated equipment with the work of the Division

21, 22 and 23 Mechanical Trade Sections to ensure proper location of equipment. The exact locations of conduit terminations at Mechanical units shall be determined from equipment manufactures' approved shop drawings. Conduits must be installed to enter only in the locations designated by equipment manufactures.

.5 Provide safety switches required for disconnection of remotely controlled motors, and where

required at motors by C.E.C. regulations whether shown on the drawings or not. Where required at fan motors, they shall be concealed in the fan housing if possible.

.6 Provide for the 120 volt mechanical equipment where noted, all necessary wiring and

connections including wiring and installation of starters, thermostats, aquastats, speed controllers and time switches controlling equipment.

.7 Where motor starters, switches and the like, are grouped together, a suitable 19 mm (3/4") thick

plywood panelboard shall be provided to which all such equipment shall be secured. Provide all necessary angle iron supports for support of panelboard and paint entire assembly with two coats of fire retardent type enamel acceptable to Building Inspection Department.

.8 Provide weatherproof unfused safety disconnect switches, fastened to exterior of roof mounted

units, to approval. .9 Connect high temperature thermostats "Firestats" provided in ductwork by Mechanical Division,

to exhaust fan systems, to provide fan shutdown on activation. .10 Refer to Equipment Schedule for further Detail. .11 Refer to Mechanical Equipment Wiring Schedule for further Detail.


JSC NO. 18-115

3.18 GROUNDING - GENERAL .1 Ground all electrical systems in accordance with provisions of the Ontario Electrical Code. .2 Provide a grounding electrode in accordance with Section 10 of the Canadian Electrical Code. .3 Install grounding conductors to permit the shortest and most direct path from equipment to

ground. Install grounding conductors in rigid galvanized conduit with both conductor and conduit bonded at both ends. Provide bonding jumpers with approved clamps to maintain ground continuity of metallic raceway systems at all expansion joints.

.4 Ground connections to grounding conductors shall be accessible for inspection and made with

approved solderless connectors bolted to the equipment of structure to be grounded. Clean contact surface prior to making connections to ensure proper metal to metal contact. Connections shall be of the type that grounds both conduit and conductor, and cap screws, bolts, nuts and washers shall be silicon bronze.

3.19 FIREPROOFING & SEALING .1 Make watertight seal at sleeves and other openings through floors above grade. Sleeves to

extend minimum 25 mm (1 inch) above finished floors. .2 Provide Fireproofing protection of openings through floors and fire rated walls. Refer to

Architectural Drawings for rated surfaces. .3 Caulk spaces between conduit, cables, bus ducts, raceways, cabletrays with "Cerafibre" 2300 F

packing to Building Department approval. Pack and seal both sides of openings with Electrovert "Flameseal" putty, minimum thickness 25 mm (1"). Install in accordance with Electrovert Instruction Bulletin #3601.

.4 Provide roof cones to run wiring to rooftop equipments.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 50 00 Contents Page LIGHTING SYSTEM DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions 1.2 Work Included 1.3 Shop Drawings PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Reference Numbers 2.2 Drivers for LED Fixtures 2.3 LED Fixtures 2.4 Fixture Schedule 2.6 Exit/Emergency Lighting System PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation 3.2 Recessed Fixtures 3.3 Testing and Verification 3.3 Completion

SECTION 26 50 00 Page 1 LIGHTING SYSTEM DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Refer to Section 26 01 00 - Electrical General Requirements. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Provide electrical lighting fixtures as per electrical documents, complete with LED fixtures, LED drivers and necessary accessories required for their installation and performance.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Conform with requirements of Section 26 01 00. .2 Submit for review a bound brochure containing illustrations of each fixture. Illustrations to

be complete showing dimensions light distribution and mounting requirements. Illustrations to be noted to indicate special features and finishes. A copy is to be retained by the Contractor on the site, to ensure co-ordination of installation requirements.

.3 LED fixture shop drawings must indicate LED driver Manufacturer and Model No. for

each fixture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REFERENCE NUMBERS .1 Catalogue reference numbers given for individual fixture types are intended as a guide

when read with the description and the fixture as finally applied. Verify catalogue references with description and coordinated with installation conditions, with particular regard to ceiling construction details, type and finish before ordering fixtures.

2.2 DRIVERS FOR LED FIXTURES

.1 Electronic Driver for LED Fixtures: Comply with UL 1310 Class 2 requirements for dry and damp locations. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Rated for 50,000 hours of life, unless otherwise noted. 2. Sound Rating: Class A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 20 percent or less. 4. 5 year warranty on the whole fixture including all components, minimum. 5. Approved Manufacturer: Philips Advance or approved equal. 2.3 LED FIXTURES

.1 Except as otherwise indicated, provide LED luminaires, of types and sizes indicated on

fixture schedules.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each Luminaire shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LEDs as the light

source. In addition, a complete luminaire shall consist of a housing, LED array, and electronic driver (power supply). Minimum of two drivers for two step dimming (50% and 100%) luminaires.

2. Luminaire optics shall consist of precision formed optical assembly with positively retained high grade high transmittance translucent polycarbonate lens.

3. Each luminaire shall be rated for a minimum operational life of 50,000 hours utilizing a minimum ambient temperature of (25°C).

4. Complies with LM-80 Standards. 5. Color Rendering Index (CRI) of 80 at a minimum. 6. Color temperature 4000K, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Fixture efficacy of 111 Lumens/Watt, minimum. 8. Fixture depth shall be no greater than 7”. 9. 5 year luminaire warranty, minimum. 10. Photometry must comply with IESNA LM-79. 11. Luminaries shall be Design Lights Consortium Qualified wherever applicable

(depends on fixture type being used and application, doesn’t apply to potlights – Energy Star rating is more appropriate for these).

12. The individual LEDs shall be constructed such that a catastrophic loss of the failure of one LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire.

13. Luminaire shall be constructed such that driver may be replaced or repaired without the replacement of the whole fixture.

14. Luminaires shall be UL 1598 and UL 2043 listed. .3 Technical Requirements

1. The luminaire shall not consume power in the off state. 2. Operation Voltage: The luminaire shall operate from a 50 HZ to 60 HZ AC line

over a voltage ranging from 120 VAC to 277 VAC/XX. The fluctuations of line voltage shall have no visible effect on the luminous output.

3. Power Factor: The luminaire shall have a power factor of 0.9 or greater. 4. THD: Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power

line by a luminaire shall not exceed 20 percent. 5. Operational Performance: The LED circuitry shall prevent visible flicker to the

unaided eye over the voltage range specified above.

.4 Thermal Management 1. The thermal management (of the heat generated by the LEDs) shall be of

sufficient capacity to assure proper operation of the luminaire over the expected useful life.

2. Thermal management shall be passive by design. The use of fans or other mechanical devices shall not be allowed.

3. The luminaire shall have a minimum heat sink surface such that LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature is not exceeded at maximum rated ambient temperature.

.5 Fixture Schedule, See Drawings for Lighting fixtures Schedule.


JSC NO. 18-115

2.4 FIXTURE SCHEDULE .1 Lighting fixtures shall be as scheduled on enclosed drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Pendant mount exit sign in service rooms and other areas where necessary to clear obstructions. Install suspended exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers.

.2 Refer to electrical drawings for more information and details regarding the installations of the

new LED light fixtures and comply accordingly. .3 Do not energize light fixture until directed by Consultant which generally shall be just prior to

completion of the work, accordingly electrical contract shall provide temporary lighting as deemed necessary during the replacement period of the existing light fixtures.

.4 Provide all necessary material, labor, testing, etc. for fully operational lighting system.

.5 Install all fixtures in the standard manner for the type of fixture and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Support all fixtures from structural members except that fixtures installed in suspended ceilings may be supported by the ceiling where the ceiling supports are reinforced to carry the weight of the fixtures. Co-ordinate with Division 9 and submit written confirmation to the requirements of the Inspection Authority.

.6 In non-accessible ceilings wire with not less than 1220 mm AC90 or RW90 wire in flexible conduit to adjacent outlet boxes placed above finished ceiling within reach of the fixture openings.

.7 In accessible ceilings wire with 1830 mm AC90 or RW90 wire in flexible conduit to adjacent outlet boxes.

.8 Where fixtures are not installed in approved ceiling system, provide steel fixture studs, brackets and hangers. Where fixtures are hung on chain hangers, provide chain of closed link type capable of supporting ten times the fixture weight. Use U-bolts for chain ends; S-hooks are not acceptable.

.9 Provide suitable trim for all fixtures installed in drywall ceiling or within lay in or snap in tiles.

.10 Provide I.C. frame/enclosure for all fixtures installed in insulated ceiling. Confirm the insulated ceiling areas with Consultant. Provide fire rated boxes for all recessed fixture in fire rated ceiling area.

.11 Provide plaster frames for all fixtures recessed in plaster ceilings. Have plaster frames installed under Division #9 and ensure that they are located correctly. Pay for all work associated with this work.


JSC NO. 18-115

.12 Protect fixtures from dirt and damage during construction and clean when the installation is completed. Replace fixtures showing marks or scratches due to handling or tool marks.

.13 Align fixtures shown in continuous rows or broken lines so that all rows appear as straight lines. Crooked lines and misplaced fixtures will not be accepted.

.14 Where luminaries are surface mounted on inverted T-bar ceilings, they shall be supported directly from the building structure. Where this is not possible due to presence of mechanical ducts or other obstruction, supply and install galvanized steel channel, above the ceiling, securely attached to the structure and not from the suspension system for the ceiling, and fasten the luminaires to the channel with clamping nut, bolt, flat washers and lock washer to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Provide bolts at least every 1.2m length of fixture (i.e., 3 bolts for 2.4m fixture).

.15 Fixtures are shown on the electrical drawings in approximate locations only. Install fixtures in accordance with reflected ceiling plans, details and/or field instructions issued by Consultant.

.16 Install lighting fixtures in service areas, underground parking areas, unfinished areas, mechanical and electrical rooms after the mechanical and electrical equipment is in place. Locate fixtures on site to clear all obstructions to the approval of the Consultant. Provide auxiliary steel members for hanging fixtures below ducts and other equipment. Where ceiling height is more than 3 metres, suspend ceiling surface mounted fixtures at 3 metres AFF. Where ceiling height is more than 3 metres, suspend ceiling surface mounted fixtures at 3 metres AFF.

.17 Provide all mounting hardware for all fixture

.18 Check the latest ceiling finishes in all areas where recessed fixtures are specified to ensure that fixtures are purchased with suitable ceiling trim for the particular ceiling finish. Replace fixtures which are sent to the site with wrong ceiling trim or flanges with fixtures having the correct trims, flanges, etc. as required without additional cost.

.19 Provide safety chains for all fixtures. Attach chain to fixture and building structure. Safety chain to be designed and secured so as to sustain the sudden weight of the fixture.

.20 In stairs, provide fixture on every main and half landing level. Co-ordinate with Architectural drawings for number of landings.

.21 Fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the reflected ceiling layouts with due consideration for mechanical diffusers, bulkheads, sprinkler heads, and other obstructions. Check Mechanical and Architectural Drawings before roughing-in to avoid any possible conflict

.22 Fixtures connected to ground fault interruptor circuits shall have separate neutrals (common neutrals for 2 or 3 circuits are not acceptable).


JSC NO. 18-115

.23 Exterior wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be mounted on recessed boxes except where fixtures with integral outlet boxes are specified in which case the recessed outlet box is not required. Outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored to the wall.

.24 Unless otherwise indicated supply and install concrete bases for lighting standards. Concrete bases shall be trowel finished with all exposed corners bevelled at 45 degrees. Junction boxes shall be carefully set and anchored to ensure flush fit of junction box cover. Concrete bases shall be constructed of 20 Mpa concrete air entrained and steel reinforced as shown on the Drawings.

.25 Manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized technician to confirm proper installation and operation of light control system.

.26 Manufacturer shall provide factory authorized technician to train owner personnel in the operation, programming and maintenance of the lighting control system including all occupancy sensors controls.

.27 Manufacturer shall provide system programming for lighting control system including: .1 Wiring documentation. .2 Switch operation. .3 Telephone overrides. .4 Operating schedules.

These shall be provided on CD compatible with the central PC's Lighting Control Program.

.28 Manufacturer shall provide a 2 years extended warranty in addition to a required one year warranty for lighting control system components.

.29 Pendant mount exit sign in service rooms and other areas where necessary to clear

obstructions. Install suspended exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers.

3.2 RECESSED FIXTURES .1 Provide plaster and/or framing rings for recessed fixtures (except for `Lay-in Tee-Bar'

types) the installation of which shall be the responsibility of this Section. .2 Recessed incandescent fixtures shall conform with requirements of latest bulletin of

Ontario Hydro Inspection Department. Thermal insulation and combustible materials shall be kept clear of recessed fixtures, unless approved, rated fixtures are utilized.

3.4 COMPLETION .1 Fixtures shall be clean at the time of final acceptance.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 53 00 Contents Page EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Summary 1.2 Reference

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation

SECTION 26 53 00 Page 1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

.1 This section of Specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and shall be read accordingly.

.2 Comply with general CCDC2 2008 and City of Burlington Supplementary Conditions, and

section 260100 – Electrical general requirements. .3 Provide emergency lighting system including exit signs, remote heads, and battery units,

as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein and as otherwise required. 1.2 REFERENCE

.1 Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the following: .1 CSA-C22.2 No. 9, General Requirements for Luminaires. .2 CSA-C22.2 No. 141, Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting. .3 CSA-C22.2 C860, Performance of Internally Lighting Exit Signs. .4 CSA-C282, Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data in accordance with Section 260100. .2 Include fixture catalogue data sheets with Shop Drawings indicating dimensions,

components, electrical characteristics and performance data for each fixture and device. Arrange the fixture catalogue data sheets and identify in the same sequence as the specified fixture list.

.3 Submit test report and verifications following the completion of testing.

1.4 WARRANTY

.1 For complete system, provide a 2-year no-charge, unconditional guarantee, and 5-year pro-rate charge guarantee on workmanship and parts.

.2 For batteries, on the second 5-year, provide a pro-rate charge guarantee on workmanship

and parts.

2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RUNNINGMAN EXIT SIGNS

.1 Extruded aluminum self-powered pictogram exit sign. .2 Lamps: Less than 2W, LED. .3 Inputs:

.1 DC: 24V as shown.

.2 AC: Universal: 120V/347V.


JSC NO. 18-115

.4 Directional arrows: universal type for field adjustment. .5 Mounting: wall or ceiling recessed for field selection. .6 Beghelli-Quadra Series. .7 Include for the supply, installation and wiring (to nearest normal & emergency lighting

circuit) of 3 additional exit signs at locations later directed on site. 2.2 WEATHER-PROOF EXIT SIGNS

.1 Same as standard exit signs, except: .1 Housing to be industrial grade polyvinyl chloride fully gasketted around lens and

canopy. .2 The sealed face plate shall be constructed of heavy duty vandal-resistant

polycarbonate.

2.3 STANDARD REMOTE HEADS

.1 Single or double cast aluminum head(s), complete with mounting plates, 300 degree horizontal and 80 degree vertical minimum adjustment. Vandal resistant polycarbonate cube.

.2 Lamps: MR16, 7W LED .3 Input: 24VDC. .4 Mounting: ceiling or wall as shown. .5 Beghelli #BTMR Series

2.4 BATTERY UNIT

.1 Supply voltage: as indicated on the Electrical Drawings. .2 Output voltage: 24V DC. .3 Operating time: 1/2 hour minimum. .4 Battery: sealed, maintenance free, long-time lead with rated life of ten (10) years. .5 Charger: solid state, multi-rate, voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature

compensated, short circuit protected with regulated output of plus or minus 0.01V for plus or minus 10% input variations capable of restoring a discharged battery to the fully-charged state within twenty-four (24) hours, and switched to a float charge when not in full charge mode.

.6 Solid state transfer circuit. .7 Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, operates at 80% battery output voltage.


JSC NO. 18-115

.8 Signal lights: solid state, for “AC Power ON’ and ‘High Charge’. .9 Lamp heads: integral on unit and remote, 345° horizontal and 180° vertical adjustment,

white painted cast aluminum head. Lamp type: wide beam flat 2-20W, unless noted otherwise.

.10 Cabinet: suitable for direct or shelf mounting to wall and complete with knockouts for

conduits. Removable or hinged front panel for easy access to batteries. .11 Finish: standard factory finish. .12 Auxiliary equipment:

.1 Advanced diagnostic printed circuit board with auto self test and time delay.

.2 Test switch and LED trouble indicator.

.3 Battery disconnect device.

.4 AC input and dc output terminal blocks inside cabinet.

.5 Mounting shelf.

.6 Transient voltage surge suppressor on the supply side of power to the unit. 2.5 ACCEPTABLE EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS ARE:

.1 Lumacell .2 Luxnet .3 Emergi-lite .4 Beghelli

3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Pendant mount exit sign in service rooms and other areas where necessary to clear obstructions. Install suspended exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers.

.2 Install all unit equipment, remote heads, exit signs, and accessories in accordance with

manufacturer’s instruction. .3 Direct heads for illumination to meet OBC requirements.

3.2 TESTING AND VERIFICATION

.1 Arrange with the manufacturer to conduct a complete inspection and test of all installed emergency lighting system.

.2 Manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for properly aiming remote heads,

recording the light level readings, recording battery full load operation time, issuing a verification indicating that lighting levels meet OBC requirements, and the system has been installed properly.


JSC NO. 18-115

.3 Submit report and verification to Consultant. .4 Correct all deficiencies. .5 Witnessed by Consultant. .6 All cost involved in testing, verification, and corrections shall be included in the Base Bid

Price.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 72 00 Contents Page FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General 1.2 Fire Alarm System

SECTION 26 72 00 Page 1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Section 26 01 00 - Electrical - General Requirements. .2 Conform with applicable Section 26 05 00 requirements governing installation, electrical

connections, raceways, conductors and the like. 1.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM .1 General .1 The Building consists of an existing Mircom 1000 Series Fire Alarm System.

Provide all additional devices as shown on the Drawings and extend existing Fire Alarm System to New Addition. Provide all necessary material, labour, programming, etc. for upgrade of the existing System to accommodate the additional devices.

.2 All components shall be CSA and ULC listed and labeled, acceptable to the Ontario Fire Marshal and the local Fire Department and suitable for operation on service characteristics noted. System equipment and operation and installation shall comply with the National and Provincial Building Code; Canadian Underwriters Association Standards CUA-70 and CUA-72A, Canadian Electrical Code, and ULC Standard CAN4-S524-M91 and latest amendments.

.2 System Components .1 Fire Alarm Signaling Device Fire alarm signaling device shall have temporal pattern. Connect adjacent

signals on different and alternating circuits. New devices to match existing. .2 Fire Alarm Strobe Fire Alarm Strobes to match existing. .3 Manual Alarm Stations Manual stations to match existing. Stations shall be pull-lever open circuit type

with a break-glass feature. A locked test feature shall be provided to permit transmission of an alarm without breaking the glass. For surface mounted applications surface cast back boxes shall be provided. Provide guards for stations in rooms noted. All pull station shall be c/w clear lexan polycarbonate shield and local built-in horn.

.4 Automatic Detectors Automatic detector stations generally shall be combination, fixed temperature

and rate-of-rise for 57 deg. C. (135 deg. F.) applications. All detectors shall be ceiling mounted on flush octagonal outlet boxes complete with adapter plates to conceal outlet box. Provide guards for detectors in rooms as noted. New devices shall match existing.


JSC NO. 18-115

.5 Photo Electric Smoke Detectors Shall be operating on the OPTO-Electronic system working with the

light-scattering principle, a gallium-arsenide diode as an infrared light source, a silicon as a light receiver, a light trap and shield against outside light. Protect against interference by using special geometry of optics and light cone, pulsating light source and CMOS evaluating electronics. New devices shall match existing.

Equip detectors with a mechanism or special tool so that the unit or part of the

unit cannot be removed by unauthorized personnel. .4 Operation .1 The operation of any detector, pull station, or similar device shall cause all of the

audible and visual devices in the building to operate until the device and panel are restored to normal. Trouble signals shall be automatically disconnected during an alarm.

.2 System shall be capable of normal operation at 85 to 110% of rated supply

voltage. Voltage above and below these limits shall initiate transfer to standby supply, and actuate trouble indication.

.3 Alarm initiating devices shall be grouped in zones. Appropriate zone of alarm

indication shall be displayed by electrically supervised lamp annunciator on the control unit and on remote annunciators.

.4 Operation of Air Duct Detectors in Individual Supply Air Handling Systems shall

initiate alarm to main system and shut down fan motors. .5 Failure of any fuse (except auxiliary fuses), loss of main power, loss of standby

power, a broken detection or signal circuit conductor, or single ground fault shall result in a distinct trouble signal at the control panel and at any other location indicated on the drawings. The audible trouble signals may only be silenced manually at the control panel and the silencing mechanism must be automatically reset upon correction of the fault.

.6 Supervise all mechanisms such that none can be left "OFF" or deactivated

without causing the trouble signals to operate. .7 Supervisory circuits for sprinkler system and standpipe valve supervisory

switches shall not cause an alarm but shall be individually annunciated and shall cause all trouble signals to sound.

.3 Installation .1 ULC and CSA standards and Electrical Safety Code, shall establish installation

requirements.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Conductors entering the control panel shall be identified and terminated on individual terminals.

.3 Wiring for audible and visual signal circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum. Voltage drop to any signal shall not exceed 10 percent. Wiring for detection circuits shall be No. 16 AWG minimum. Wire resistance shall not exceed 50 Ohms. Conductors shall be connected in accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagram and run in conduit throughout.

.4 Wiring must be cut at each automatic and manual station and device, and

connected to the four terminals provided on the unit. (These connections ensure supervision of the circuit. Looping of the wires under terminal screw is not permissible). All wiring shall be continuous between control panel, detectors, stations and signals. Splices where permitted by the Engineer shall comprise soldered joints.

.5 Install resistor for signal circuit in a suitable box adjacent to the last signal of the

signal circuit; if diodes are used, install in the outlet box of the last signal of the signal circuit and indicate on signal. End-of-line resistors for station circuits shall be mounted in flush box, maximum of 6 feet above floor beyond last device on circuit.

.6 Mount detectors on ceiling as per ULC standard CAN4-S524-M91 unless

otherwise specified herein, at the highest point where variations in ceiling height exist. Do not mount detectors on sides, undersides, or less than 12" (300 mm) from beams, joists, open web steel joists or any structure projecting below actual ceiling height.

.7 Should interference from obstruction, lamp positions or heat radiating surfaces

be encountered in locating any detector where shown, locate the detector as near as possible to the indicated position, clear of obstacles, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

.8 Identify signal circuit, box circuit, auxiliary circuit, wiring at fire alarm control

panel, annunciator, terminal boxes or elsewhere on completion of work. .9 Wiring for sprinkler system devices, flow switches and monitor switches, will be

provided under this Division of the work. .6 Tests .1 Retain the services of the equipment supplier to provide Special Commissioning

"Verification, Inspection and Certification" and to supervise the connection, initial test and adjustment of the system throughout the entire renovated/addition area. The verification shall be done to suit code and Local Authorities requirements.


JSC NO. 18-115

.2 Verification procedure shall comply with ULC standard CAN4-S537-M86 and shall include providing proper functioning and connection of each device and function of the systems. Furnish upon completion of the work, a letter from the manufacturer as evidence that such tests and instruction have been performed to their satisfaction, and additionally to indicate that:

a. System complies with manufacturer's installation recommendations, ULC requirements, and specified operation.

b. Installation is acceptable for Warranty. c. Completed system complies with regulations concerning supervision of

functions, signals, stations, and automatic detectors. d. Test completed systems for Building Approval Authority. Advise Local

Fire Department when "Verification" is to be performed. .7 Shop Drawings & Documents .1 Prepare maintenance schedule. Contractor to correct shop drawings to provide

"as-installed" record. .2 Shop Drawings for the Fire Alarm System shall include copies of documents to

substantiate ULC listing for all items, identified by catalogue. .3 Provide copies of Inspection and Verification Certificates to Local Fire

Department, Fire Prevention Division. .8 Inspection Certification .1 Retain services of the Supplier to perform tests and provide the following

documents: a. A copy of the inspection Technician's report showing location of each

device, and certifying the test results of each device. b. A Certificate of Verification confirming that the inspection has been

completed and showing the conditions upon which such inspection and certification have been rendered.

c. Proof of liability insurance for the inspection. d. Audibility level plots in the renovated and addition areas.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 26 75 00 Contents Page TELECOMMUNICATION RACEWAY SYSTEM DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Summary 1.2 Reference

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation

SECTION 26 75 00 Page 1 TELECOMMUNICATION RACEWAY SYSTEM DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 This section of specification is an integral part of the contract documents and shall be read

accordingly.

.2 Comply with Section 260100 – Electrical General Requirements.

.3 Provide empty raceway systems including conduits, cable trays, terminal cabinets, plywood backboards, pull boxes, outlets and cover plates for enclosure of wiring.

.4 Telecommunication systems include, but not limited to, telephone, data cabling, P.A., CCTV, CATV, security and access control, etc.

.5 Co-ordinate with system contractors for all the work.

1.2 REFERENCE .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the following:

.1 EIA/TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

.2 J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Wall outlets shall be 115 mm square boxes with plaster rings to suit single gang devices

unless otherwise noted. Provide stainless steel cover plates for the outlet boxes for future use.

.2 Conduit size shall be in accordance with systems contractor’s requirements and recommended standards.

.3 Minimum pull box and junction box size shall be as follows:

Maximum conduit size

Size of boxes in millimetres For each additional conduit size increase width by:-

Width Length Depth 27mm 102mm 406mm 76mm 51mm 35mm 152mm 508mm 76mm 76mm 53mm 203mm 914mm 102mm 127mm 78mm 305mm 1219mm 127mm 152mm 103mm 381mm 1524mm 203mm 203mm

SECTION 26 75 00 Page 2 TELECOMMUNICATION RACEWAY SYSTEM DATE 12 MARCH 2018 Jain Sustainability Consultants Inc. Project 17040 – Oakville

JSC NO. 18-115

.4 Plywood backboards shall be minimum 1200 x 2400 mm, 19 mm thick, painted with 2 coats of fire retardant light grey enamel.

.5 Provide a minimum of 2 duplex receptacles on separate circuits at each backboard.

.6 Provide grounding at each backboard.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Vertically mount outlet boxes, unless noted otherwise, 300 mm to centre above floor, or 150

mm above counter top where shown at counters or benches.

.2 Fish conduit, clear blockages and outlet and clean out pull boxes at completion of installation. Leave conduit free of water or excess moisture. Install No. 12 gauge galvanized soft iron pull wire, or 3.175mm nylon pull cord (minimum 400LB) continuously from outlet to outlet, through conduit and fasten at each box.

.3 Conduit bonds shall have a bending radius of not less than nine times conduit diameter. Ream out conduit and identify ends with green paint.

.4 Install additional steel pull boxes in such a manner that, throughout entire system, there shall be not more than two 90 degree or equivalent bends or more than 30 m in each run, so that wire or cables may be pulled in or withdrawn with reasonable ease.

.5 Show as-installed conduit routing and location of all pull boxes on the record drawings, prior to project completion, for use by systems contractors to facilitate wiring and equipment installation. Include above noted information on final record drawings at project completion.

END OF SECTION

INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO WHITE OAKS LIBRARY · interior renovations to . white oaks library . for ....

Documents

Transcript of INTERIOR RENOVATIONS TO WHITE OAKS LIBRARY · interior renovations to . white oaks library . for ....